ἄρχεται —not historic, but primary and connected with γέγραπται below. Thuc. means to say ‘what preceded ( i.e. book I.) was an introduction: now begins (my account of) the war itself.’ Cf. ἀρξάμενος, I. 1, 1: Diod. XII. 37 τὴν ἱστορίαν ἐντεῦθεν ἀρξάμενος. Ullrich first rightly explained this passage.

ὁ πόλεμος — i.e. the Archidamian War, 431-421; not the whole war to 404.

ἐνθένδε ἤδη —cf. Aristoph. Ach. 539 κἀντεῦθεν ἤδη πάταγος ἦν τῶν ἀσπίδων, referring to the outbreak of the war. ἐνθένδε refers back to I. 146, i.e. the account of the αἰτίαι καὶ διαφοραὶ is now concluded. (The other explanation, referring ἐνθένδε to the attack on Plataea, is less satisfactory, as ἐνθένδε is so far from the account of the attempt.)

τῶν ἑκατέροις ξ. —when ξύμμαχος is in the gen. plu., it is generally constructed as an adj., following that of ξυμμαχεῖν. Thus cacophony is avoided. Contrast I. 18 τοῖς ἑαυτῶν ξυμμάχοις, IV. 81 τοῖς Ἀθηναίων ξ. ἐν ᾧ—neut. Cf. c. 11, 6, 35, 2, = quo tempore. It expresses not merely time, but includes circumstances. ἐν ᾧ=‘during which period.’

οὔτε...τε —cf. c. 5, 5.

ἐπεμείγνυντο παρ’ ἀλλήλους —the ἐπι-expresses reciprocity, as in ἐπιχρῆσθαι. During the period of suspicion which preceded war, ἐπεμείγνυντο καὶ παρ’ ἀλλήλους ἐφοίτων ἀκηρύκτως μέν, ἀνυπόπτως δ’ οὔ, 1.146 .

καταστάντες —sc. ἐς πόλεμον , when once they had definitely started. Cf. c. 9, 1 and I. 49, 3. This refers to the interval between the attempt at Plataea and the invasion of Attica.

ξυνεχῶς —down to the truce that preceded the Peace of Nicias. Cf. v. 24 ταῦτα τὰ δέκα ἔτη ὁ πρῶτος πόλεμος ξυνεχῶς γενόμενος , VI. 26 ἄρτι δ’ ἀνειλήφει ἡ πόλις ἑαυτὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ ξυνεχοῦς πολέμου.

γέγραπται —sc. μοι.—This resumes ἄρχεται, but γέγραπται is probably impersonal, Thuc. meaning γέγραφα. Attic prose shows a marked preference for perf. pass. over perf. act. forms in 3rd sing. Thus ἃ πέπρακταί μοι is far commoner than ἃ πέπραχα, which is quite rare. γέγραφα occurs once in Thuc., γέγραπται ἐγέγραπτο or partic. nine times.

ἑξῆς —explained by κατὰ θ. καὶ χειμῶνα. Distinguish between τάξις, the arrangement of the subject matter as a whole, διαίρεσις, the divisions in which the separate events are grouped, ἐξεργασία, the treatment of the separate events. It is to the διαίρεσις that Thuc. refers.

ὡς ἕκαστα ἐγίγνετο —neut. plu. is used of the several events, just as Thuc. uses αὐτὰ constantly of the details of the subject he is dealing with.

κατὰ θ. καὶ χειμῶνα —as Thuc. begins his account of each summer with the first event of the new campaign, the summer in his history does not always begin exactly at the same time. Thus in 429, the account of summer begins with the Peloponnesian expedition against Plataea, which took place ἀκμάζοντος τοῦ σίτου, i.e. 80 days after the opening of spring ( II. 71, 1; 79, 1; cf. c. 19, 1 and 2, 1). In 428 the account of the summer only begins ἅμα τῷ ἦρι ἀκμάζοντι ( III. 1, 1). Phormio's arrival at Piraeus did not occur till spring had opened; but, for the sake of convenience, that event is tacked on to the preceding winter ( II. 103 ). But usually the opening of spring is reckoned with summer. Autumn also is counted with summer. Though Steup maintains that summer and winter are of equal length in Thuc., Poppo's view, that the summer consists of eight months (Elaphebolion to Pyanepsion) is probably correct. Thus the winter is from Maemacterion to Anthesterion.

γὰρ —takes up ἄρχεται and introduces the narrative. So c. 49, τὸ μὲν γαρ ἔτος takes up δηλώσω. ἐνέμειναν—the aor. of a single historical fact. M. T. 56, 57 (sometimes called ‘complexive).’

Εὐβοίας ἅλωσιν —Euboea revolted at the same time as Megara, 445 B.C. See I. 114, 115. The place of the article is taken by the gen., as often. Cf. I. 1 διὰ χρόνου πλῆθος. Comparing this phrase with c. 49, 4 μετὰ ταῦτα λωφήσαντα, VI. 3, 3 μετὰ Συρακούσας οἰκισθείσας, II 68 ἀπὸ τῶν Ἀμπρακιωτῶν ξυνοικησάντων, VI. 80, 2, and similar predicative uses of the partic. collected by Stahl, Quaest. Gram. p. 28, we might suppose that Thuc. could have written μετὰ Εὔβοιαν ἁλοῦσαν, just as below we have ἐπὶ Χρυσίδος ἱερωμένης, but, with the solitary exception of ἅμα with expressions of time, as ἄμα τῷ σίτῳ ἀκμάζοντι, it is improbable that this convenient use of the partic. was ever employed unless the expression made sense without the partic., which would not be the case here. This convenient use is of course much commoner in Latin than in Greek.

ἐπὶ Χρυσίδος —Argos, though humbled by Sparta, 495 B.C., was still the third state in Greece. The Argives reckoned by the number of years during which the priestess of Hera had held office. Hellanicus had written a work on the Priestesses of Argos, using them as marks for the dates.

Αἰνησίου —sc. ἐπί: so with Πυθοδώρου. ἐφόρου — i.e. the Ephor ἐπώνυμος. The omission of ὄντος, for which cf. v. 25, 1, is rare except in dates. ἐφόρου ὄντος = ἐφορεύοντος. τέσσαρας μῆνας—the archons entered on office on the 1st of Hecatombaeon, which in 431 B.C. fell on August 1st. To express a period of time, the pres. (or imperf.) or perf. (or pluperf.) participle is used: to supply the reference to the completion of the period, ( a) ἤδη is added, in primary sequence, which becomes τότε in secondary sequence: both refer to a period past at the time of speaking: ( b) ἔτι referring to the completion of a period in the future. Thus v. 112, 2 οὔτ’ ἐν ὀλίγῳ χρόνῳ πόλεως ἑπτακόσια ἔτη ἤδη οἰκουμένης τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἀφαιρησόμεθα, and observe τότε ἱερωμένης and ἔτι ἄρχοντος here. The four months are Elaphebolion, Munychion, Thargelion, Scirophorion.

Ἀθηναίοις —cf. 1. 93 ἀρχὴν ἄρχειν Ἀθηναίοις, but in v. 25 ἄρχοντος Ἀθήνησι. The dative is probably local. Cf. c. 86 and 92 ἀπὸ τῶν Ἀθηναίων for ἀπὸ τῶν Ἀθηνῶν. [

μετὰ τὴν μηνὶ ἕκτῳ ]. Reasons for regarding these words as a later addition to the text are 1. Nearly a year ( I. 125 ) intervened between the day on which the allies of Sparta decided to go to war and the first invasion of Attica (c. 19 ). Between the battle of Potidaea and the decision came the events recorded in I.63-88 , 118-125 . The invasion was 80 days after the attempt on Plataea (c. 19 ). So for the period between the battle at Potidaea and the attempt on Plataea we get nearly a year minus 80 days and the time occupied by the events of I. 63-88, 118-125. The result must clearly be more than six months But Lipsius' ἕκτῳ καὶ δεκάτῳ probably gives too much time: thus, from battle at Potidaea to attempt on Plataea = 15 months; from attempt on Plataea to invasion of Attica = 80 days. Total about 17 1/2 months. Deducting nearly a year for the time between the decision of the allies and the invasion, we get about 6 1/2 months, at least, for the events of I.63-88 , 118-125 . These events were as follows: the Athenians built a wall on the north side of Potidaea and garrisoned it. After a considerable interval ( χρόνῳ ὕστερον) Phormio was sent from Athens with 1600 hoplites. He spent some time on the road ( κατὰ βραχὺ προιών). On arriving, he built a wall south of Potidaea. The Corinthians called a meeting of allies at Sparta. The Spartans sent to Delphi. Then a general meeting of allies was held at Sparta. at which the decision was come to. It is not clear whether the Corinthians proposed the first meeting after the north wall was built, or only after the south wall was finished. It is however highly improbable that they waited to take action till Potidaea was completely shut in; for they were most anxious about Potidaea, and were anxious to force on war. The Athenians would occupy about a month in building the north wall. Thus the Corinthians probably suggested the meeting about 40 days after the battle. Thus, the whole time would only be about 40 days + the time taken in the mission to Delphi and the calling of the second meeting. 2. The bracketed words give no additional indication of the date of the attempt on Plataea. Thuc. wishes to be precise here, but he has given no definite indication of the date of the battle at Potidaea, nor was it necessary to do so. He says (1) the decision of the allies was some 11 months before the invasion, (2) the invasion was 80 days after the attempt. All that could be found from μηνὶ ἕκτῳ would be the date of the battle of Potidaea. If any event were here referred to it would rather be the decision of the allies.

ἅμα ἦρι ἀρχομένῳ —the last day of Anthesterion, in 431 April 4th. See c. 4, 2

βοιωταρχοῦντες —the 11 chiefs of the Boeotian confederacy, of whom Thebes elected two, the other cities one each.

περὶ πρῶτον ὕπνον —cf. VII. 43 ἀπὸ πρώτου ὕπνου. When the article is omitted with expressions of time, a preposition is usually present, except with ἡμέρας and νυκτός. See Rutherford, Syntax, p. 4. There were three watches, the first beginning about 10 o'clock.

ξὺν ὅπλοις —in later Attic, except Xenophon, σὺν has only two uses; (1) the old phrase σὺν ( τοῖς) θεοῖς, (2) in enumerating things which are thrown together in a sum total; so that σὺν is very rare with persons, and it never implies a willing connection. Andoc. II. 7 τὸν πατέρα σὺν ἐμαυτῷ ἀποκτεῖναι. Of (1) Thuc. has 1 example, II. 86 ; of (2) 11 examples, e.g. ( a) with things —c. 13 , 77 ,; v. 26 ξὺν τῷ πρώτῳ πολέμῳ τοσαῦτα ἔτη. Cf. VII. 42 ; VIII. 90 , 95 : ( b) with persons, comparatively common in Thuc., I. 12 ; II. 6, 13 ; IV. 124 ; v. 74 . Besides these, Thuc. has the old military phrase, ξὺν ( τοῖς ) ὅπλοις, 8 times. Cf. Eur. Hec. 112 . Aristoph. Nub, 560. In the same class fall ξὺν ἑνὶ ἱματίῳ, II. 70, ψιλοὶ ξὺν ξιφιδίῳ and ξὺν δορατίοις III. 22. Cf. the Homeric σὺν τεύχεσι. Further, 6 cases of verbal nouns which modify the meaning of a verb, viz.: ξὺν ἐπαίνῳ ἐξοτρύνειν I. 84, ξὺν κατηγορίᾳ παροξύνειν ib., ξὺν χαλεπότητι παιδεύεσθαι ib., ξὺν φόβῳ ἔχειν τι I. 141, ξὺν ἀνάγκῃ τι παθεῖν III. 40, ξὺν προφάσει κακῶς ποιεῖν ib. The absence of this archaic idiom from the later books is remarkable. Lastly, 3 cases of a connection willingly formed, viz. : II. 58 ; III. 90 ; VII. 57 . This is common in Tragedy and Xenophon. In inscriptions of the classical period only the Attic use marked (2) above is found, and that never with persons.

ἐπηγάγοντο —the τάξις (see on c. 1 ) of this c. is dramatic, the causes which led to the attempt being given parenthetically in 2 and 3, while the narrative is continued at 4.

Πλαταιῶν ἄνδρες —the Thebans call them, III. 65, ἄνδρες οἱ πρῶτοι καὶ χρήμασι καὶ γένει. These leaders of the aristocratic party represent the great land-owners as distinct from the merchants.

ἄνδρας τοὺς ὑπεναντίους —the order, noun, art, adj., puts emphasis on the adj. Cf. c. 34, 4.

ἔπραξαν —of manipulation or diplomacy, as often. Cf. c. 5, 7. An abuse of the meaning ‘to succeed.’

ἔσοιτο — was certain. Cf. c. 13, 1.

ἔτι ἐν εἰρήνῃ —cf. III. 13 ἔτι ἐν τῇ εἰρήνῃ, and c. 5, 4. Here τε καὶ joins a positive to a negative expression which merely repeats it from another point of view. Cf. v. 9, 2 τῷ τε κατ’ ὀλίγον καὶ μὴ ἄπαντας κινδυνεύειν.

μήπω —the sentence expresses a wish.

ᾗ καὶ ρᾷον —cf. ᾗ καὶ μᾶλλον I. 11, 25; III. 13 ; IV. 1, 103. ᾗ καὶ before a comparative adverb emphasizes an inference.

ἔλαθον ἐσελθόντες —see M. T. 144, 146, 887.

προκαθεστηκυίας —Pp. compares anteponere vigilias, Tac. An. I. 50.

θέμενοι τὰ ὅπλα — cum in foro constitissent, lit. ‘having grounded their arms.’

τοῖς ἐπαγομένοις —the temporal force is lost, and the partic. becomes a substantive, as in οἱ προδιδόντες c. 5 .

ἐπείθοντο ὥστε —cf. c. 101, 5.

ὥστε is often inserted with verbs which take simple infin., the main emphasis is transferred from the finite to the infin. M. T. 588.

ἔργου ἔχεσθαι — rem aggredi. Cf. 1.49, 7 , 78, 3.

ἰέναι ἐς —for the hostile sense of ἰέναι cf. v. 69 ἐς τὴν γῆν ἐλθεῖν, ‘to attack.’ ἐπὶ is commoner than ἐς, as I. 58 ἢν ἐπὶ Ποτείδαιαν ἴωσιν. Cf. c. 3, 4. ἔρχομαι, εἶμι, ἥκω, ἦλθον and synonyms are far more supple in sense than our ‘to come.’ Note that the moods of εἶμι are usually present in meaning, except in Oratio Obliqua.

γνώμην ἐποιοῦντο — i.e. ἐγίγνωσκον, ‘came to a decision.’

ἐπιτηδείοις —so c. 18, 3.

καὶ ἀνεῖπεν —‘and in fact,’ καὶ introducing the parenthesis and emphasizing the word following. Cf. c. 49, 5, 51, 5.

εἴ τις βούλεται —in a protasis to a condition in Oratio Obliqua, probably only the future indicative is ever changed into optative, so that the optative in protasis in Or. Obl., except in the future, represents either ἢν and subjunctive or εἰ and optative of the Recta.

κατὰ τὰ πάτρια —in Iliad II. 504 Plataea is enumerated among the Boeotian confederate cities.

ξυμμαχεῖν —this may be a gloss on τίθεσθαι κ.τ.λ. Cf. IV. 30 προκαλούμενοι, εἰ βούλοιντο, τὰ ὅπλα κελεύειν παραδοῦναι, and so 37 ; v. 115 ἐκήρυξαν, εἴ τις βούλεται, λῄζεσθαι, VII. 82 κήρυγμα ποιοῦνται, εἴ τις βούλεται, ὡς σφᾶς ἀπιέναι. With βούλομαι an infinitive has often to be supplied from the context.

ὡς ᾔσθοντο —cf. c. 5, 4, 31, 1, 94, 3. The aorist is usual with ὡς, but, whatever tense is used, it is always independent of that of the main verb. In this respect ὡς differs from other temporal particles. Thus if imperf. is used, as in c. 77, 1, or pluperf. as in c. 59, 1, it is because that tense is required to describe a continuous or completed act, apart from the main verb. If the act in a temporal sentence is represented as simultaneous with or preceding the action of the main sentence, ὅτε or ἐπειδὴ is used.

ᾔσθοντο —‘became aware,’ ingressive aor., a use almost confined to 1st aor. forms.

ἐξαπιναίως —this and ἐξαπίνης, in place of ἐξαίφνης or αἰφνιδίως, are Ionic, and only found in Thuc. and Xenophon of Attic prose writers. [Dem.] c. Neaeram § 99 is copied from this passage. Cf. c. 48, 2, 93, 3.

καταδείσαντες καὶ ν. — ingressive, ‘having become alarmed,’ etc.

πολλῷ πλείους — sc. ἢ ἐσῆλθον. An ellipse with comparative is very common.

ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ — per noctis caliginem. Cf. ἐν νυκτὶ below, and c. 4 ἐν σκότῳ καὶ πήλῳ.

πρὸς ξ. ἐχώρησαν — se converterunt Cf. III. 66 προείπομεν τὸν βουλόμενον κατὰ τὰ πάντων Βοιῶτων πάτρια πολιτεύειν ἰέναι πρὸς ἡμᾶς, IV. 120, VIII. 40, 2.

ἐνεωτέριζον —the subject is changed, as in 4 below . Thuc. assumes that his readers will follow the narrative attentively.

πράσσοντές πως —the particle implies that unnecessary details are omitted. Cf. ἄλλως πως in brief narrative, I. 99, , VI.2 .

κρατήσειν —Cl. defends κρατῆσαι, on the ground that the aor. expresses confidence in the result of the action in ἐπιθέμενοι. But the aor. inf. is very doubtful used thus for the future.

τῷ γὰρ πλήθει — γὰρ gives the writer's explanation, and shows that οἱ Πλαταιῆς above was loosely used for τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Π.

βουλομένῳ ἦν —so VII. 35 ; VIII. 92, 6. M. T. 900. The editors compare Sallust, Jug. 84

, ib., 100 Livy XXI. 50 .

ἐπιχειρητέα εἶναι —cf. I. 118 ἐπιχειρητέα ἐδόκει εἶναι πάσῃ προθυμίᾳ. Plur. neut. forms for sing. are very common in Thuc., especially with verbals.

ξυνελέγοντο —with παρ’ ἀλλήλους, διορύσσοντες τοὺς τ.—cf. τοιχωρύχος.

ἁμάξας τε —the conjunction adds a third and important fact, as often.

ᾖ —sc. αὐτό, what has just been described, the barrier of waggons.

ἑτοῖμα —the plur. marks the details of a complex act. See c. 10, 2

φυλάξαντες ἔτι νύκτα —cf. VII. 83 τῆς νυκτὸς φυλάξαντες τὸ ἡσυχάζον. ‘Waited for the time when it was still night.’

ἔτι νύκτα is equivalent to τὴν ἔτι νύκτα.

φυλάξαντες ἔτι νύκτα —cf c. 2, 1.

καὶ —adds the more exact time.

περίορθρον —the beginning of that time of night denoted by ὄρθρος. Cf. IV. 110 νυκτὸς ἔτι καὶ περὶ ὄρθρον, VI. 101 περὶ ὄρθρον, According to Phrynichus (Bekker An. Gr. 54, 8) ὄρθρος ἐστιν ἡ ὥρα τῆς νυκτὸς καθ’ ἣν ἀλεκτρύονες ᾅδουσιν. ἄρχεται δὲ ἐνάτης ὥρας καὶ τελευτᾷ εἰς διαγελῶσαν ἡμέραν. So in III. 112, Demosthenes attacked the Ambraciots ἅμα ὄρθρῳ, at which time they could not distinguish friend from foe, νυκτὸς ἔτι οὔσης. Thus the Plataean rally was at about 2 o'clock.

γίγνωνται —sc. οἱ Θηβαῖοι. Cf. I. 143 οὐκέτι ἐκ τοῦ ὁμοίου ἔσται, III. 12, 3.

φοβερώτεροι —for the passive meaning, ‘timid,’ cf. IV. 128, 4. Conversely ἀδεὴς which is usually active is occasionally passive = not formidable. See I. 36, 1. Cf. προστρόπαιος, ἀλιτήριος, and in Latin formidolosus and others. See Cook on Sallust, Cat. 39, 2. Shil. quotes Soph. O. T. 153 φοβερὰν φρένα δείματι πάλλων.

ἥσσους ὦσι τῆς — i.e. ἡσσῶνται equivalent to νικῶνται ὑπὸ τῆς κ.τ.λ. σφετέρας—indirect reflexive, i.e. refers to subject of the main verb, not to that of its own clause. Cf. c. 83, 3, 89, 4; IV. 37, 1; V. 47 ; VII. 48 ; VIII. 74, 3. This is the regular use of σφέτερος, whereas σφέτερος αὐτῶν is the same as ἑαυτῶν. But Thuc. also uses σφέτερος alone as direct reflexive, as IV. 33 οὐκ ἐδυνήθησαν τῇ σφετέρᾳ ἐμπειρίᾳ χρήσασθαι: and in dependent clauses, as c. 71 and IV. 11 τας σφετέρας ναῦς καταγνύναι ἐκέλευε. ta\ sfe/tera is direct in c. 20, 4; IV. 99, 1, indirect in III. 68, 3.

προσέβαλόν τε — inferential τε, ‘and so.’

ἔγνωσαν —‘became aware,’ ingressive.

ξυνεστρέφοντο —‘proceeded to rally,’ imperf. expressing difficulty.

σφίσιν αὐτοῖς —in c. 65, 12, 76, 2 Thuc. has the Ionic use of σφᾶς alone as a direct reflexive. See Rutherford, Syntax, p. 11.

δὶς μὲν ... ἔπειτα —cf IV. 115 καὶ μίαν μὲν ἡμέραν ἀπεκρούσαντο, τῇ δ’ ὑστεραίᾳ. As regards ἔπειτα without δέ, the ordinary use is πρῶτον ( πρῶτα ) μὲν. ἔπειτα, which Thuc. uses 28 times; see c. 19, 2, 49, 2, 75, 1, 89, 2, 96, 1, 98, 1. He has πρῶτον ( πρῶτα) μὲν ... ἔπειτα δὲ 8 times; see c. 55, 84. If καὶ follows ἔπειτα, δὲ is always inserted, e.g. c. 84 ; IV. 43 ; VII. 23 ; VIII. 48 ; also μάλιστα μὲν is always followed by ἔπειτα δέ, as c. 54 ; I. 75 ; VI. 11, 4, 16, 5, 67, 2. If the more emphatic ἔπειτα μέντοι is used, it is preceded by τὸ πρῶτον or τὸ μὲν π., as III. 93, 1, 111, 3; VIII. 75, 1, 86, 2. τὸ μὲν πρῶτον .. ἔπειτα occurs I. 131 ; V. 41, 3, 84, 2; the same, but ἔπειτα δὲ c. 48 ; v. 41, 2. πρῶτον alone is always answered by ἔπειτα alone, unless καὶ follows ἔπειτα, as in VII. 23 τὸ μέγιστον πρῶτον, ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ κ.τ.λ. After other phrases, ἔπειτα is without δὲ in 10 cases, has δὲ in 2, viz. c. 92, 1; I. 18, 3.

κραυγῇ —Moeris says κεκραγμὸς Ἀττικοί, κραυγὴ Ἕλληνες, but κεκραγμός , κέκραγμα and κραυγή are all Attic words. Perhaps Moeris really wrote κραυγασμὸς Ἕλληνες, which would agree with Phrynichus.

καὶ —there is chiasmus here and in λίθοις καὶ κεράμῳ.

ὀλολυγῇ —‘cheering,’ this word is used regularly of women. Pollux I. 28 ὀλολῦξαι καὶ ὀλολυγῇ χρήσασθαι ἐπὶ γυναικῶν. Hence κραυγῇ goes with οἰκετῶν, ὀλολυγῇ with γυναικῶν. Eur. I. T. 1337 ἀνωλόλυξε καὶ κατῇδε of Iphigenia; cf. Aesch. Ag. 587 of Clytaemnestra. Verg. Aen. IV. 667, IX. 477 femineo ululatu.

τε ... τε —these join χρωμένων to βαλλόντων and represent the two actions as going on simultaneously. Cf. c. 22 ἐκκλησίαν τε οὐκ ἐποίει ... τήν τε πόλιν ἐφύλασσε.

λίθοις καὶ κεράμῳ —no doubt the slaves had gathered the stones, while the women removed the tiles. For κέραμος collective, cf. III. 74, 1; IV. 48, 2. So ἔπαλξις c. 13, κάλαμος c. 76 . Xen. Mem. III. 1, 7 λίθοι καὶ πλίνθοι καὶ ξύλα καὶ κέραμος.

διὰ νυκτὸς —cf. διὰ παντὸς c. 16, 2 .

πολλοῦ —predicate with ἐπιγενομένου Cf. VII. 87 αἱ νύκτες ἐπιγιγνόμεναι μετοπωριναὶ καὶ ψυχραί.

ἐπιγενομένου —expresses any sudden or unexpected phenomenon. Cf. c. 64, 1, 70, 1, 77, 5. The other meaning occurs in 4 below .

οἱ πλείους —the subject is here limited by apposition from all to the majority, Cf. I. 2, 6 οἱ ἐκπίπτοντες ... οἱ δυνατώτατοι. So in Latin, Livy XXI.24, 2 Galli ... aliquot populi.

πηλῷ —so that progress was impeded. Cf. c. 5, 2. This shows that the streets of Plataea were bad, like Greek streets generally. On the outskirts of the town the soil was certainly soft, and the Thebans fled in the direction of the valley of the Asopus, so that the further they went, the worse the road became. Probably in wet weather the streets of the town resembled water-courses carrying down the water from Cithaeron to the Asopus.

τῶν διόδων —belongs like ᾗ χρὴ ς. to ἄπειροι ὄντες.

ᾗ χρὴ — takes the place of a deliberative subj. (why?). Cf. I. 91, 1 οὐκ εἶχον ὅπως χρὴ ἀπιστῆσαι.

καὶ γὰρ —explains only ἐν σκότῳ , πηλῷ being already explained in ὑετοῦ ἅμα. τελευτῶντος τοῦ μηνὸς—there was a new moon on the early morning of the 7th April 431, and, as the Attic months were lunar, assuming the calendar to have been in perfect order (it must have been in fair order), the month Elaphebolion began at sunset on the 6th April. The attempt was made at the end of Anthesterion, on the night of April 4th or 5th. When the calendar month did not correspond with the true lunar month, the true day of the new moon was called νουμηνία κατὰ σελήνην (c. 28 ).

ἐμπείρους δὲ ἔχοντες τοὺς δ. —for ἐμπείρων δὲ ὄντων τῶν δ. Cf. I. 144 αὐτονόμους ἀφήσομεν εἰ καὶ αὐτονόμους ἔχοντες ἐσπεισάμεθα.

[τοῦ μὴ ἐκφεύγειν —this is taken as ne effugereni. (There is another tradition, due to Kr., that it expresses a consequence, which is not in good Attic.) It must depend on διώκοντας,—which gives the platitude that the enemy pursued them that they might not escape. To avoid this, Cl. explains it as equivalent to τοῦ μὴ ἐᾶν ἐκφεύγειν and constructs it with ἐμπείρους. But (1) there is no other case of gen, of inf. with adjectives in Thuc., (2) ἐμπείρους τοῦ ἐκφεύγειν ought to mean ‘experienced in escaping.’ Supply τῶν διόδων with ἐμπείρους. ὥστε διεφθείροντο οἱ π.]—the article, found in BCEFGM and in A corrected, contradicts τὸ πλεῖστον in 5 below, and ὀγδοήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν c. 5, 7, the number captured out of a force of few over 300 (c. 2, 1), when many others had been killed or had escaped (4 below). Bekker omits οἱ, followed by most edd., and the imitation of Aen. Pol. 2, 6 is quoted οἱ μὲν γὰρ ἔφυγον ἄπειροι ὄντες ᾗ χρὴ σωθῆναι, οἱ δὲ ἐμπείρως διώκοντες πάνυ πολλοὺς ἔφθειραν. But on reading the whole chap. to 4, it becomes clear that no results of the flight are given till 4, where the fate of the whole number is told: so that these words break the continuity of the narrative.

στυρακίῳ ἀκοντίου — στυράκιον λαβών τις ἐν τῷ μοχλῷ τῆς θύρας ἐνέβαλεν, Schol. The στυράκιον is the spike at the top of a small javelin for fixing it in the ground; = Homeric σαυρωτήρ. This was used instead of the βάλανος or iron pin which was driven through the μόχλος (bar) and the door, and could not be removed without a key ( βαλανάγρα, κλείς), which fitted into it. Arnold remarks that the action is the same as spiking a gun. Cf. Aristoph. Av. 1159 ἅπαντ’ ἐκεῖνα πεπύλωται πύλαις καὶ βεβαλάνωται καὶ φυλάττεται κύκλῳ. χρησάμενος ἐς —cf. c. 49 ἔδρασαν ἐς τὰ φρέατα.

διωκόμενοι .. ἀναβάντες ἔρριψαν —the 1st partic. gives the cause of ἀνάβαντες, while the latter is temporal to ἔρριψαν. Cf. c. 59, 3, 76, 1, 90, 3. The 2nd partic. tends to become a mere adverb to the verb, as c. 90, 1 βουλόμενοι προαγαγεῖν αὐτούς, ἀναγαγόμενοι ἔπλεον. οἱ μέν τινες ... οἱ δὲ ... ἄλλοι δὲ ... τὸ δὲ πλεῖστον—the partic. διωκόμενοι is subdivided. Also οἱ μέν τινες is restricted by οἱ πλείους.

λαθόντες καὶ ]—it is evident that γυναικὸς δούσης πέλεκυν must be joined with διακόψαντες, but καὶ is in the way of this. But, though Stahl's reading is given, perhaps Thuc. wrote γυναικὸς δούσης πέλεκυν καὶ διακόψαντες τὸν μοχλὸν λαθόντες ἐξῆλθον. There would then be no objection to καί. For the want of symmetry in δούσης καὶ διακόψαντες, see c. 25, 1. For the two participles διακόψαντες, λαθόντες, the first temporal, the second defining the verb, see c. 33, 3. The objection to bracketing καὶ only is that Thuc. would have written λάθρᾳ διακόψαντες, as IV. 110 ; VIII. 84.

ἄλλοι δὲ ἄλλῃ τῆς —cf. c. 76 ἄλλας δὲ ἄλλῃ τοῦ τείχους.

τὸ πλεῖστον ... ἐσπίπτουσιν —plur. verb after a collective, as often. Rutherford, Syntax, p. 21.

ὃ ἦν τοῦ τείχους —cf. I. 134 οἴκημα ὃ ἦν τοῦ ἱεροῦ. It was not usual in early times to have buildings adjacent to the walls. Cf. c. 17, 1 note. Hence the Thebans thought the building was part of the gate-way, supposing it to be double like the Dipylon at Athens. Thebes prided herself on her seven great gates, and it is highly improbable that the pomoerium was thus violated in that city. There cannot have been many such buildings at Plataea, for in c. 76 we see there was room for a curved wall between the τεῖχος and the mass of the buildings.

ἀνεῳγμέναι ἔτυχον —in order to represent the action as complete, the perf. partic., not aor., has to be used with τυγχάνω, λανθάνω , φθάνω, unless the verb is in imperf, or pres. See M. T. 144, 146, 147, 887. Cf. I. 103 Ναύπακτον ἔτυχον ᾑρηκότες. αὐτοῦ—in the second member of a relative sentence the relative is not repeated, but a demonstrative or personal pron. takes its place. Cf. c. 34, 5, 72, 1, 74, 3. Exceptions are c. 43, 3, 44, 1, where the relative is repeated. Cf. ‘Whose fan is in His hand, and He shall throughly purge His floor.’

πύλας — πύλαι τοῦ τείχους, θύραι τοῦ οἴκου Schol. Cf. τεῖχος and τοῖχος. ἄντικρυς—‘right through.’ In VI. 49 it means direct. In all other places in Thuc. downright, complete, as VIII. 64 ἐπὶ τὴν ἄντικρυς ἐλευθερίαν. It is said that ἄντικρυς = φανερῶς , ἄντικρυ (not found in Thuc.) = ἐξ ἐναντίας .

κατακαύσωσιν —cf. c. 52 οὐκ ἔχοντες ὅ τι γένωνται. ὥσπερ ἔχουσιν—sc. οἱ Θηβαῖοι, on the spot. Often in Thuc., but later Atties use οὕτως in much the same sense.

τὰ ὅπλα καὶ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς —the phrase is common, and the order is always the same. Cf. IV. 21, 3, 30, 4, 37, 2, 38, 3. Livy XXII. 60, 24 and 26 arma et vos ipsos traditis.

χρήσασθαι ὅ τι ἂν β. —with χρήσασθαι supply σφίσι only. Cf. c. 24, 2. χρήσασθαι expresses purpose, the act. or mid. being regular in this construction even when the pass. might seem more suitable. M. T. 770. The phrase is regular in the terms of a complete surrender. Cf. IV. 69, 3; VII. 85, 1. Andoc. I. 11, 26.

μὲν δὴ —dismisses the subject.

ἐπεπράγεσαν —the pluperf shows that Thuc. has anticipated: in c. 5 he goes back.

ἔδει παραγενέσθαι —‘ought to have reached Plataea.’ M. T. 415. Cf. c. 92, 7, 95, 3.

εἴ τι ἄρα —cf. c. 12, 1. The following are noteworthy: (1) εἴ μὴ ἄρα = nisi forte, e.g. Xen. Mem. I. 2, 8 πῶς ἂν οὖν ὁ τοιοῦτος ἀνὴρ διαφθείροι τοὺς νέους; εἰ μὴ ἄρα ἡ τῆς ἀρετῆς ἐπιμέλεια διαφθορά ἐστιν. (2) εί ἄρα in indirect questions, e.g. Plat. Phaedo, 95 B πειρώμεθα εί ἄρα τι λέγεις. (3) εἰ ἄρα or ἢν ἄρα in protasis, as I. 140 ἢν ἄρα τι καὶ σφαλλώμεθα . ἄρα implies a quite unlikely contingency.

προχωροίη —the apodosis is only implied in ἔδει παραγενἐσθαι . M. T. 696. ἢν προχωρῇ might have been kept. προχωρεῖν is a favourite word with Thuc.

ἅμα —belongs to ῥηθείσης, as c. 4 ὑετοῦ ἅμα ἐπιγενομένου. ῥηθείσης—more usually ἐλθούσης, but the former is better suited to a hurried announcement to an army on the march.

τῶν γεγενημένων —the Theban reinforcements were ignorant of the destruction of their friends when they arrived, see 4 below. Hence these τὰ γεγενημένα told them were not complete. The message was doubtless brought by those who escaped κατὰ πύλας ἐρήμους, who did not know all.

ἐπεβοήθουν —‘increased their speed.’ Cf. III. 110, 1.

ἑβδομήκοντα —probably rather over the direct route, but approximately correct measured by the road.

γενόμενον —of natural phenomena, as often. Cf. c. 77 ἐγένετο φλόξ, ὕδωρ καὶ βροντὰς γενομένας. ἐρρύη μέγας—cf. c. 75 ᾔρετο μέγα.

τε —‘and so.’

ὕστερον —‘late,’ cf. c. 80 ὕστερον ἦλθον.

τῶν ἀνδρῶν —apposition with τῶν μὲν ... τῶν δὲ, as in 4, 4 .

ζώντων —predicative.

κατασκευή —‘property,’ viz. household effects and farming implements. κατασκευὴ means anything that makes a place habitable and worth living in. See L. and S.

οἷα —Ionic for ἅτε.

ἐβούλοντο εἴ τινα λάβοιεν κ.τ.λ. — M. T. 695. The second protasis is not co-ordinate with the first. In a more certain form the sentence would run ὅντινα λάβοιειν ὑπάρχειν ἐβούλοντο ἀντὶ τῶν ἔνδον ἐζωγρημένων.

διαβουλευομένων —reciprocal mid., like διαλέγομαι, διαπράττομαι. When a compound of διὰ is not available, the same sense is given by ἐν ἑαυτοῖς or σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, as IV. 25, 9 παρακελευόμενοι ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, VIII. 76 παραινέσεις ἐποιοῦντο ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, sometimes by ἐν ἀλλήλοις, for which see c. 65, 11.

ὑποτοπήσαντες —rare and poetical, used by Thuc. 8 times, only in aor. inf. or partic.

περὶ τοῖς ἔξω —the dat. with περὶ gradually disappeared in Attic and occurs but once in the orators, Isocr. Ep. 9, 10. It is regular in Thuc. with verbs of fearing.

ὁσίως —when used of states, ὅσιος means in accordance with those principles of right dealing universally recognised ( jus gentium). Cf. III. 56 ἐτιμωρησάμεθα κατὰ τὸν πᾶσι νόμον καθεστῶτα, τὸν ἐπιόντα πολέμιον ὅσιον εἶναι ἀμύνέσθαι. ib. c. 58, 3. See on c. 52, 3. Eur. Hec. 788 .

σφῶν —with πόλιν. The position is for the sake of emphasis.

πειραθέντες —the Attic aor. of πειρῶμαι is ἐπειράθην, cf. c. 33, 2. But Thuc. uses also the lonic ἐπειρασάμην in c. 44 and 85.

ἔλεγον —interrupts the structure of οὔτε ... τε, but the irregularity is very slight. λέγω in sense of κελεύω regularly takes infin., μὴ being the neg.

εἰ δὲ μή —cf. I. 28 εἰ δὲ μή, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀναγκασθήσεσθαι ἔφασαν. The addition of ἔφασαν, suspected also by Kr. in both places, certainly adds clearness, yet Thuc. proceeds in a quite different way in c. 13. But the difference in the nature of the matter of these chapters (the one narrative, the other reflective) may account for the difference of style.

ἀναχωρησάντων ... αὐτοῖς —the use of the gen. abs. in spite of the dat. following, makes the act in the partic. more prominent, and prevents it from being a mere appendage of ἀποδώσειν. A common sacrifice of form to sense in Herod. and Thuc. αὐτοῖς is wrongly bracketed in the text.

ἐπομόσαι — jusjurandum addere. Does not occur elsewhere in Thuc.

εὐθὺς —with ἀποδώσειν. as the following words show.

ἤν τι ξυμβαίνωσι —closely with γενομένων, ‘with a view to an arrangement.’ ἢν ξυμβῶσι would be ‘if they come to an arrangement.’

δ’ οὖν —doubtful statements are dismissed and the narrative of facts resumed.

οὐδὲν ἀδικήσαντες —contrast οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντες =‘guiltless.’

τὰ ἐκ τῆς χώρας ἐσεκομίσαντο —the preposition attracted to the verb, for ἐν. Cf. c. 13, 2, 14, 1.

ἀπέκτειναν —assuredly justified as an act of reprisal, but most impolitic, as calculated to provoke Thebes and Sparta.

εἷς αὐτῶν ἦν —the so-called partitive gen. is often used thus without εἷς, which is wanting in C. Cf. I. 85 εἷς τῶν ἐφόρων τότε ὤν, v. 59, 5; VIII. 39, 2.

πρὸς ὅν ἔπραξαν —so I. 131, I; IV. 114, 3. This is only a variant for πράσσειν with dat., as IV. 110, 2; v. 76, 3. But when many persons are dealt with, πράσσειν ἐς is also used, as I. 132, 4. The same three constructions follow λέγειν: πρός, Andoc. I. 48; dat., ib. I. 69; ἐς, ib., l.c. Eur. Hec. 303 εἷπον εἰς ἅπαντας, ‘proposed in the general assembly.’

οἱ προδιδόντες —see on c. 2, 4.

ἔπεμπον —the imperf. with verbs of ‘going’ and ‘sending,’ presenting the details of an elaborate negociation involving a journey, is common. Cf. c. 85, 2; I. 10, 5, 26, 1, and 3 below. But the aor. is also used. M. T. 57.

καὶ —has nothing to do with the τε preceding, which is answered by the τε following. Thus the sentence consists of two members joined by τε .. τε. Cf. I. 69, 1 τό τε πρῶτον ἐάσαντες . . καὶ ὔστερον τὰ μακρὰ στῆσαι τείχη, ἐς τόδε τε αἰεὶ ἀποστεροῦντες. So in 4 below.

ἠγγέλθη εὐθὺς —does not refer to ἔπεμπον ἄγγελον, but to two previous messages mentioned in 3 below. Plataea is something over 30 miles from Athens.

καὶ .. ξυνέλαβον — parataxis, presenting the two facts as almost concurrent. The second was prompt and hurried. Cf. I. 61 ἦλθε καὶ τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις εὐθὺς ἠ ἀγγελία ... καὶ πεμπουσιν. ἔπεμψαν ... κελεύοντες—the activity of the sender is continued in the person sent. Cf. c. 85, 1.

νεώτερον ποιεῖν — i.e. νεωτερίζειν. Cf. I. 132, 5; IV. 55 μὴ νεώτερόν τι γένηται. πρὶν ἂν—after historic tenses, πρὶν ἂν and subj. is used only in Oratio Obliqua. Cf. c. 84, 1, 102, 5.

ἅμα τῇ ἐσόδῳ γιγνομένῃ —see c. 2, 1.

οὕτω δὴ — gives the result of facts just stated, contrast c. 19, 1.

οὐκ εἰδότες — sc. ὅτι τεθνήκασιν. ἐπέστελλον—see 1 above.

ἐγκατέλιπον —so ἐγκαθέζομαι III. 1 ; ἐγκαθίστημι I. 4 ; ἐγκαθορμίζομαι IV. 1 ; ἐγκατοικοδομεῖν III. 18 ; ἐγκατασκήπτειν c. 47.

τοὺς ἀχρειοτάτους — sunt ἀχρεῖοι omnes inhabiles militiae,’ Pp. Cf. c. 44. Juv. 15, 126 imbelle et inutile vulgus. For the deeper application of ἀχρεῖος, see c. 40, 2.

ἐξεκόμισαν —c. 78, 3.

λελυμένων —before the attempt on Plataea, each side had interpreted the other's action as σπονδῶν ξύγχυσις ( I. 146 ), but there had been no open violation of the letter of the truce.

λαμπρῶς —cf. I. 49, 7; VIII. 66, 3, 75, 2.

παρεσκευάζοντο δὲ —the anaphora would have been more perfect with παρεσκευάζοντο μὲν preceding, but Thuc. often omits μέν in cases where it is not required, though a writer more careful about symmetry would msert it: perhaps he purposely avoids a rhetorical formula in narrative. The common cases in Thuc. are very simple, as πολλοὶ μὲν ... πολλοὶ δέ, εἰ μὲν .. εἰ δέ, ἅμα μὲν ... ἅμα δέ. Cf. I. 28 with πέμπετε; VI. 20, 4; also c. 41, 3 μόνη γὰρ καὶ μόνη. μέλλοντες—belongs to both subjects, as ποιούμενοι below. Probably both intended sending to Persia, though the Athenians did not carry out their intention. See c. 67.

πέμπειν — M. T. 73, 96.

ἀλλόσε —see c. 29.

ἑαυτῶν —for σφετέρας. Cf. c. 92, 4, and see c. 3, 4.

Λακεδαιμονίοις ... ἐπετάχθη — i.e. Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐπέταξαν. This dat. of the agent is very rare with other parts of the pass. than perf. It occurs in I. 51 τοῖς Κερκυραίοις οὐχ ἑωρῶντο, IV. 64 τίνες ἂν δικαιότερον πᾶσι ... μισοῖντο , ib. 109 πόλεις οἰκοῦνται ξυμμίκτοις ἔθνεσι. There are only two instances in the Orators.

αὐτοῦ —in the harbours of Peloponnese.

ἐξ Ἰ. καὶ Σ. —with τοῖς ἑλομένοις, but placed first for the sake of the antithesis with αὐτοῦ. Cf. c. 18, 3 κατὰ τὴν ἄλλην πορείαν ἡ σχολαιότης. ναῦς ἐπετάχθη—Stahl supports his reading with great ability. It will be noticed that these Dorian cities, reckoned by Sparta among her allies, are not mentioned in c. 9 with the ξύμμαχοι, because there only those who actually contributed to the armament are given, and these cities contributed nothing. III. 86, 2.

ποιεῖσθαι —middle, ναῦς being the object. Cf. I. 14, 2.

ἐς τὸν πάντα ἀ —‘in all.’ When the article precedes πᾶς, the whole is regarded as the sum of its component parts.

πεντακοσίων —by no means realised. The Spartan navy in the Archidamian War was contemptible. See c. 66 and 85. Thuc. speaks with some irony.

τά τ’ ἄλλα —perhaps τἆλλα should be read here, the τ’ being due to dittography.

ἡσυχάζοντας —the change from the dat. ἑλομένοις is due to the infin. This change from gen. or dat. is always possible except when a word is the predicate to a gen. or dat., as I. 71 βουλομένων ὑμῶν εἶναι προθύμων. See c 24, 1.

μιᾷ νηὶ —

Pp. This gives an example to show how they were to refrain from hostile acts ( ἡσυχάζοντας).

ἕως ἂν — whereas with πρίν, μέχρι and μέχρι οὗ Thuc. occasionally omits ἂν when subjunctive is used, according to the older Attic idiom, this is never the case with ἕως. Cf. c. 72, 3.

τὰ περὶ Π. —‘in the neighbourhood of P.’ like circa. Cf. c. 99, 3.

μᾶλλον —‘more than elsewhere,’ so ‘especially.’ Cf. c. 15 ἑτέρων μᾶλλον. Κέρκυραν— the places are given in inverse order, the final point reached coming first. Cf. c. 93, 1. Eur. Bach. 13 fol. At present only an ἐπιμαχία existed between Athens and Corcyra. See Intr. p. LXVI.

Κεφαλληνίαν —it took no part in the war at first, but joined Athens towards the end of the summer. See c. 30. Ἀκαρνᾶνας—except the Oeniadae, c. 102, 2, the Acarnanians were reckoned as allies from the first, though no treaty was concluded till the autumn of 430. See c. 68. Ζάκυνθον—its interests and policy coincided with those of Corcyra. Cf. c. 9, 4; I. 47, 2.

εἰ ... εἴη — Recta, ἐὰν ... ᾖ. See 2, 4 .

βεβαίως —cf. IV. 20, 3 φίλους γενέσθαι βεβαίως. πέριξ καταπολεμήσοντες — se undique impugnaturos.

ὀλίγον οὐδὲν —cf. VII. 59, 3, 87, 6; VIII. 15, 2. ὀλίγον is predicate.

τε —‘in fact,’ summing up the preceding remarks. Cf. 3 below.

ἔρρωντο — totis viribus incumbebant. Thuc. uses the literal sense only once, VII. 15.

οὐκ ἀπεικότως —so εἰκότως in the Orators is often followed by γάρ. Cf. I. 77, 5. So οὐκ ἀκουσίως below.

ἀρχόμενοι — i.e. there is greater enthusiasm at the beginning of an undertaking than after the first excitement has worn off.

ἀντιλαμβάνονται — sc. τῶν πραγμάτων, rem capessunt.

τότε δὲ —contrasted with πάντες. καὶ—an additional reason existed then.

νεότης — juventus. Cf. c. 20, 2, 21, 2. The abstract term, like ἡλικία, represents the young men as a power in the State. Cf. Pericles' remark, quoted by Aristot. Rhet. A. 7, 34 τὴν νεότητα ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ἀνῃρῆσθαι ὥσπερ τὸ ἔαρ ἐκ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ εἰ ἐξαιρεθείη. ὑπ’ ἀπειρίας —so ὑπὸ is used with any noun denoting any state of mind which is the immediate cause of action. See c. 47, 4. παροιμία· γλυκὺς ἀπείρῳ πόλεμος [Pindar, frag. 87 Bergk] Schol.

ἡ ἄλλη Ἑλλὰς —all States in or outside Greece. Cf. I. 1, 1, 6, 1.

ξυνιουσῶν — pres. not fut. Cf. v. 59, 5, 71, 1.

λόγια —a general term for all words, whether prose or verse, supposed to be ominous. Probably old stories of strange things in the past are here meant Pind Pyth. 1, 92.

ἐλέγετο —in other places the plur. verb appears after a neut. sing. (see not. crit.), viz.: I. 126, 5 ἐπῆλθον Ὀλύμπια (where CEG read ἐπῆλθεν ); v. 75, 2 Καρνεῖα ἐτύγχανον ὄντα: though elsewhere names of festivals have the sing.; v. 26, 2 ἁμαρτήματα ἐγένοντο; VI. 62, 4 ἐγένοντο ἑκατὸν τάλαντα .

Herw.

πολλὰ δὲ — i.e. χρησμοί, which are collected and interpreted by χρησμολόγοι. ἦδον—contrasted with ἔλέγετο, since the χρησμοὶ were in verse; ‘recited.’ Cf. c. 54, 2. So cano often.

Δῆλος ἐκινήθη —the centre of the Ionian race, which by its unique κίνησις foreshadowed an equally unique κίνησις of all Greece. Cf. I. 1, 2.

οὔπω —either Thuc. did not know of Herod. VI. 98, or he ignores it.

ἐπὶ —‘in view of.’ c. 36, 4.

σημῆναι —intrans., σημεῖον εἶναι. Cf. c. 43, 3, 49, 7.

ἀνεζητεῖτο —cf. VIII. 33, 4. Bloomf. quotes Aristoph. Lys. 28 πρᾶγμ’ ἀνεζητημένον, πολλαῖσιν ἀγρυπνίαισιν ἐρριπτασμένον.

ἐποίει ἐς — ἀντὶ τοῦ εὐνοικῶς εἶχον Schol.

, says Herw. The phrase is only found here in Attic, but is imitated by late writers.

προειπόντων —cf. c. 5, 5; M.T. 850; and for Latin, Riemann, S.L. § 263; a convenient use of the gen. abs., in spite of the proximity of another case, to make a fresh predication without a new sentence. Cf. c. 83, 3; I. 114, 1; III. 13, 6, 22, 1.

ἐλευθεροῦσιν —the claim continually put forward by S., that she was a Liberator. She traded on the insane craving for αὐτονομία, the evil spirit by which the Greeks were possessed. A wanton abuse of terms must lead to disaster, and after misusing the word Freedom for a century, Greece ‘buried her Liberty’ on the field of Chaeronea.

καὶ λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ — sive ... sive. There are some 50 cases of this antithesis between λ. and ἔ. in Thuc., which is not surprising considering that (1) great importance was attached to words at Athens, apart from their truth or falsity; (2) Thuc. had but too good reason to contrast the professions of men with their deeds during the war. The antithesis underlies all diplomacy. The opening of the Funeral Oration, c. 35, is a contrast of λόγος and ἔργον. Cf. c. 40, 1, 41, 2, 4, 42, 2, 4, 43, 1, 2, 46, 1, 65, 9, 72, 1, 81, 2.

ἐν τούτῳ ... ᾧ —‘in any enterprise in which he did not take part.’ ᾧ depends on παρέσται, as in I. 22 οἷς αὐτὸς παρῆν. κεκωλῦσθαι — i.e. κεκώλυται εἰ μὴ αὐτὸς παρέσομαι, the perfect being used of something bound to happen in the future if the condition is fulfilled. Livy XXI. 43, 2 vicimus for vicerimus. Cf. IV. 46, 3 ὥστ’ ἐάν τις ἁλῷ ἀποδιδράσκων, ἅπασι λελύσθαι τὰς σπονδάς. The description of the friends of Sparta is not without a touch of sarcasm.

<ἐν> ὀργῇ εἶχον —c. 59, 2.

ἀρχθῶσι —ingressive, ‘become subjects.’

φοβούμενοι —the government of Sparta kept all its proceedings too secret for them to know the true nature of the Spartan oligarchy, which was to conduct them in many cases from democracy to decarchy.

παρασκευῇ ... καὶ γνώμῃ —c. 7 and 8 are resumed by a chiasmus (see analysis of 7, 8 ).

ὥρμηντο —‘made ready for war.’ Cf. I. 32, 5.

Λακ, μὲν ... Πέλ. μὲν ... ἔξω δὲ Ἀθ. δέ —the extremes and the means are contrasted, as usually with this double use of μὲν ... δέ. Πελοποννήσιοι—in the geographical sense, the dwellers in Peloponnese of whatever stock.

[οἱ ἐντὸς Ἰσθμοῦ ]—usually in Thucydides Πελοποννήσιοι means ‘the allies of Sparta.’ In c. 11 indeed, Archidamus is made to address the officers as Πελ. καὶ ξύμμαχοι, i.e. as politically connected and as comrades in arms, but, after that it is generally taken for granted that all the allies are included in the term Πελ. But before the war, Πελοποννήσιοι means ‘the inhabitants of Peloponnese,’ and only in this sense can the Argives and Achaeans be included in the term. If οἱ ἐντὸς is in the text, the P. of Peloponnese are contrasted with those P. outside it ( Πελοποννήσιοι ἔξω Πελοποννήσου), i.e. Πελ. must mean ‘the allies of Sparta,’ which is impossible.

Πελληνῆς —near Zougra. Pellene seems to have been connected politically with Sicyon (10 miles) and Phlius (14 miles) rather than with Achaea.

ἔπειτα δὲ ὕστερον —cf. III. 94, 1; IV. 102, 2; v. 61, 4. In 417 the Lacedaemonians became more closely connected with Achaea. See v. 82, 1.

ἔξω δὲ Π. —on the land side, Athens was wedged in between enemies. This both exposed her to invasion and hampered her own undertakings. It was with a view to breaking up this hostile combination that Demosthenes undertook the expedition into Aetolia in 427.

Λοκροί —the Opuntian Locrians, with the Epicnemidian, whereas the Ozolian Locrians were allies of Athens.

ναυτικὸν —scarcely anything was done by S. with the fleet in the 1st year. Intr. p. LXXII.

Κορίνθιοι —for their naval operations, see c. 33, 80, 3, 83. Μεγαρῆς —c. 92. Σικυώνιοι —c. 80, 3.

Ἀμπρακιῶται —c. 80. [ παρεῖχον]— Intr. p. XXXIX.

αὕτη —the omission of μὲν here and in I. 125, 1. in both of which C inserts μέν, raises a difficulty. Elsewhere it is left out only when a participle prevents its use, as in the opening of c. 65, 72, 75. It is possible that αὕτη Λακ. ξυμμαχία is inserted wrongly from 6 below. (This omission is not similar to that noticed above, c. 7, 1.)

Χῖοι, Λέσβιοι — the only islands on the Aegean then retaining the position of independent allies of Athens.

ἐν Ναυπάκτῳ —placed there by Athens at the close of the third Messenian War. See c. 27, 2.

οἱ πλείους —Astacus (c. 30 ) and Oeniadae (c. 102 ) did not join Athens.

ἄλλαι —‘and other cities (besides the αὐτόνομοι ξύμμαχοι just mentioned), namely.’

Καρία —the ἔθνη are added in the nom., in spite of the dat. preceding, because these are the four financial divisions of the πόλεις ὑποτελεῖς, so that the nominatives are as much in apposition with πόλεις as with ἔθνεσι. Καρία ... πρόσοικοι—called in the tribute lists ὁ Καρικὸς φόρος, and so Ἰωνία = ὁ Ἰωνικός, Ἑλλήσποντος = ὁ Ἑλλησπόντιος, τὰ ἐπὶ Θ. = ὁ ἐπὶ Θ. φ., νῆσοι ... Θήρας = ὁ νησιωτικὸς φ. From 436 B.C. Ionia and Caria were grouped together.

Καρσὶ πρόσοικοι —for the omission of οἱ cf. c. 85, 5. It is explained by the fact that this is an official title, Kr. Gr. Gr. 50, 2, 11.

νῆσοι...πᾶσαι αἱ ἄλλαι —for ὅσος Iimited by πλήν, cf. IV. 32, 2, and for οὶ ἄλλοι V. 27, 2.

Μήλου καὶ Θήρας —both colonized by the Dorians about the time of their settlement in Crete, circ. 1100 B.C.

ναυτικὸν —this was a privilege belonging only to the independent allies. Cf. Intr. p. LXXIV. They were αὐτοτελεῖς.

ξυμμαχία —abstract for concrete.

καὶ παρασκευὴ —the chapter is summarised in inverse order, as in c. 7, 8.

περιήγγελλον —often takes the construction of κελεύω but with the dat., which κελεύω never has.

τά τε ἐπιτήδεια —sc. παρασκευάζεσθαι. οἷα εἰκὸς — quae deceret.

ὡς ἐσβαλοῦντες —because Athens was exposed to attack from the Isthmus. The corresponding Athenian incursion was merely into the Megarid; but Athens was unable to strike at Sparta herself directly. For the system adopted in consequence, see Intr. p. LXIX.

ἑτοῖμα —not with ἐπιτήδεια, but as in c. 3, 4, 98, 1.

γίγνοιτο —iterative; hence ξυνῇσαν imperf.

τὰ δύο μέρη — the denominator exceeding the numerator by 1 is invariably omitted. Contrast τῶν πέντε τὰς δύο μοίρας I. 10. τὰ δ. μέρη is in limiting apposition to the subject of ξυνῇσαν. Cf. c. 47, 2.

τοὺς . . ἀξιολογωτάτους —an indefinite expression, suited to the different circumstances and arrangements of the various contingents.

ἀξιολογωτάτους —forming one group with τοὺς ἐν τἐλει, but not identical with them. Cf. I. 10 τὰς μεγίστας καὶ ἐλαχίστας.

ἄνδρες —Thuc. shows exquisite judgment in selecting the places in which to insert speeches. They are the occasions on which it is necessary for the reader to understand the exact situation of affairs and to realise what were the infiuences at work. They stand in place of explanation and abstract reasoning. The occasions selected for this purpose in this book are ( a) the first invasion of Attica (this speech shows the feelings of the Spartans); ( b) the close of the first campaign (the Funeral Oration is an exposition of the form and theory of the Athenian polity by the ablest citizen); ( c) the close of Pericles' administration and life, the speech containing a vindication of his policy; ( d) the victories of Phormio, the one event of great importance outside Athens in 429, and the most splendid example of Athenian prowess in the whole war. Dion. Hal. totally misunderstood the significance of the speeches. Far juster is Lucian's estimate ( πῶς δεῖ ἱστορίαν συγγράφειν c. 44 ): he knew that Thuc.'s object was σαφῶς δηλῶσαι καὶ φανώτατα ἐμφανίσαι τὰ πράγματα.

οἱ ] —inserted through confusion with οἱ πατέρες. Thuc. never puts in the article in such addresses.

ξύμμαχοι —there are two elements in the force, but Archidamus groups them together, and carefully draws no distinctions. ἄνδρες goes with ξύμμαχοι also.

καὶ οἱ π. . καὶ αὐτῶν —paratactic, the 2nd member being the more prominent.

οἱ πατέρες —an opportune reference to the wars which were the glory of the Dorian race. Thuc. however avoids any commonplaces about the Persian wars such as become frequent in later writers.

στρατείας ἐποιήσαντο — = ἐστράτευσαν. ἡμῶν οἱ πρεσβύτεροι εἰσίν—with the ‘partitive’ genitive 1st or 2nd person, the verb is generally in 3rd person, but the writer always passes quickly to the 1st or 2nd. Cf. III. 62 σκέψασθε ἐν οἵῳ εἴδει ἑκάτεροι ἡμῶν τοῦτο ἔπραξαν. VII. 64 ἐνθυμεῖσθε ὅτι οἱ ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶν ὑμῶν νῦν ἐσόμενοι καὶ πεζοὶ τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις εἰσὶ καὶ νῆες. So I. 87. When for the subject a relative clause is substituted, the 3rd person is rare: e.g. Andoc. I. 46 ὁπόσοι ὐμῶν παρῆσαν (= οἱ παρόντες) ἀναμιμνήσκεσθε. Lys. 12, 97 , Aeschin. 3, 60 . The same phenomenon may be seen in Latin poets, as Ov. Trist.III. 4, 75 et qua quisque potest aliqua mala nostra levate.

μείζονα —litotes, as πλεῖστοι shows.

νῦν ἐρχόμεθα —sc. ἡμεῖς, whereas οἱ πατέρες καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι was subject to ἐξήλθομεν. στρατεύοντες —sc. ἐρχόμεθα, the antithesis being between πόλιν and αὐτοί, δυνατωτάτην and πλεῖστοι καὶ ἄριστοι στρατεύοντες.

δίκαιον οὖν —the topic is τὸ καλόν, as in 9 below. Index s. v. τόποι. It is a common subject in Thuc., especially in military harangues.

ἡμῶν αὐτῶν —put first for the sake of the antithesis. See c. 7, 2.

ἐπῆρται —cf. Dem. 4, 49 τοῖς πεπραγμένοις ἐπῃρμένον. εὔνοιαν ἔχουσα—with infin. = ἐπιθυμοῦσα, as c. 86, 5 γνώμην εἶχον μὴ ἐκπλεῖν. A periphrasis for a simple verb is very common in Tragedy.

οὔκουν χρὴ —the topic of the πίστις is τὸ ξυμφέρον, as the Schol. says. It is the commonest of all forms of argument in Thuc.

πλήθει —of superior numbers, as c. 89, 1.

ἀσφάλεια πολλὴ —opposite of κίνδυνος μέγας, but, being an abstract idea, and not, like κίνδυνος, a single entity, it requires πολλή. Cf. VI. 24. So with προθυμία, ἀθυμία and such words.

εἶναι —sc. δοκεῖ. μὴ ἄν ἐλθεῖν—after the predicative noun ἀσφάλεια, like κίνδυνος, ξυγγνωμή. διὰ μάχης ἰέναι—cf. 6 below; IV. 92, 1. So διὰ δίκης ἰέναι VI. 60, 3; δῑ ὄχλου εἶναι I. 73, 2; διὰ φόβου εἶναι VI. 59, 2; δῑ ησυχίας ἔχειν c. 22, 1.

ἀμελέστερόν τι —cf. 9 below πλέον τι. By the addition of τι the range of the adjective is indefinitely extended.

τὸ καθ’ αὑτὸν — suam quemque vicem. Cf. c. 87, 8. The subject of ἥξειν is ἡγεμόνα καὶ ς.

ἄδηλα γὰρ —Thuc. is extremely fond of γνῶμαι or general truths as arguments, whereas he does not use παραδείγματα or examples at all. The γνῶμαι have been collected by several critics, and, as might be supposed, they show a profound insight into the fundamental principles that actually guide human conduct.

ἐξ ὀλίγου —‘suddenly.’

δῑ ὀργῆς — ‘on impulse.’

αἱ ἐπιχειρήσεις γίγνονται —the passive of τὰς ἐπι. ποιεῖσθαι I. 70, 7.

τε —adds a third and important fact. [

δεδιὸς ἄμεινον ]— 1. δεδιὸς obscures the point, which is that a large force, caught off its guard, has often been defeated by a small force. There is no room here for any reference to the apprehension or precautions of the smaller force. 2. No passage supports the idea that Archidamus is pointing out the advantage of δέος in action, ἐν τῷ ἀμύνεσθαι. It is then too late for δέος, which is valuable only ἐν τῷ παρασκευάζεσθαι . 3. The assumption that δεδιὸς is answered by διὰ τὸ καταφρονοῦντας ... γενέσθαι is not borne out by the form of the sentence. 4. Archidamus merely says ‘do not be careless, lest you be caught unprepared.’ 5. Of ἄμεινον there are two explanations ( a) = ἄμεινον ἢ οἱ πλείονες τὸ ἔλασσον πλῆθος. But ἠμύναντο is used only of the side on the defensive; nor is there any reference to superiority in courage such as ἀγαθός suggests. ( b) ἄμεινον δεδιὸς ἢ μὴ δεδιός, Cl., a curious paradox worthy only of a rhetorician.Append. II.

ἠμύνατο —gnomic. Cf. c. 89 πολλὰ στρατόπεδα ἤδη ἔπεσεν ὑπὸ ἐλασσόνων.

χρὴ δὲ —a γνώμη in the form of an antithesis. For ‘figures’ in γνῶμαι, cf. c. 40 throughout.

τῇ μὲν γνώμῃ ... τῷ δὲ ἔργῳ —an imperfect antithesis. γνώμη means ‘feelings,’ ἔργον ‘actions’ (not γνώμη ‘plans,’ ἔργον ‘battle’). Cf. c. 43, 3, 64. 6, and 89 τῆ δυνάμει τὸ πλέον πίσυνοι ἢ τῆ? γνωμη?. Herod. VII. 49 ἀνὴρ οὕτω ἄν εἴη ἄριστος εἰ βουλευόμενος μὲν ἀρρωδέοι ἐν δὲ τῷ ἔργῳ θρασὺς εἴη—which is however somewhat different.

παρασκευάζεσθαι —the reading is now commonly παρεσκευάσθαι. Cr. says ‘le parfait est nécessaire,’ but gives the present. The perfect is due to a mistaken interpretation of γνώμῃ and ἔργῳ , the latter of which refers to the period before battle. The antithesis between στρατεύειν and παρασκευάζεσθαι must not be too closely pressed. (A quite different view of this passage will be found in Steup, Quaest. Thuc. p. 30.)

πρὸς τὸ ἐπιέναι εὐψυχότατοι —cf. III. 44, 3 ξυμφέρον πρὸς τὸ ἧσσον ἀφίστασθαι; VIII. 76, 6. The use of the infinitive with article in all constructions is far commoner in the speeches and the passages in the rhetorical manner than in ordinary narrative.

ἐπιχειρεῖσθαι —‘to be attacked.’ This sentence puts in the proper light the two points referred to in 3 above: so

has become , has become . results from , from .

οὕτω —with ἀδύνατον. τοῖς πᾶσι—cf. c. 36, 3.

εἰ μὴ καὶ νῦν —‘if not already ... at least.’ I see no need to alter the text with Francken, or to assume a misplacement of καί. For ἀλλά, ἀλλὰ ... γέ, ἀλλ’ οὖν ... γε, see Kr. Gr. Gr. 69, 4, 5.

ὅταν ὁρῶσι —usually in Thuc. ὅταν denotes a single act, ὁπόταν repeated action. I. 142, 9 is an exception.

τἀκείνων —for τὰ ἑαυτῶν, as ἐκεῖνος can apply to anyone other than the speaker and the person addressed.

φθείροντας — cf. Livy XXII. 3

.

πᾶσι γὰρ —the only possible way of taking these words as they stand is the traditional way of Arn., Shil., and Bh., which is supported by A. Grossman, N. Jahrb. 121, p. 523. ἐν τοῖς ὄμμασι καὶ ἐν τῷ παραυτίκα are taken after ὁρᾶν, the infinitive is made to depend on the phrase ὀργὴ προσπίπτει, as though it were λυπεῖ, and ὁρᾶν πάσχοντας = ‘to see that they are suffering.’ There are grave objections: ὁρᾶν πάσχοντας would more naturally mean ‘to see others suffering,’ and it is very doubtful whether ὀργὴ προσπίπτει can be considered a periphrasis which could legitimately take an infinitive in prose. Usener proposes πᾶσι γὰρ ἐν τῷ παραυτίκα ὁρᾶν πάσχοντάς τι ἀηθές, taking ἐν τῷ with ὁρᾶν πάσχοντας. Cf. Steup's proposal in not. crit.

γὰρ —this introduces the γνώμη by which the statement that ‘the Athenians will come out to battle’ is supported. We have here an example of the form of proof called Enthymeme, i.e. a ‘syllogism drawn, not from the premisses proper to any particular science—such, for instance, as medicine—but from propositions relating to contingent things in the sphere of human action, which are the common property of all discussion.’ Jebb, Attic Orators II. p. 289. Cf. c. 60. καὶ λογισμῷ — i.e. ‘and then men do not pause to think.’ Possibly οἱ bracketed represents a lost οἱ τοιοῦτοι, = οἱ ὀργισθέντες. θυμῷ—also, like λογισμῷ, with χρώμενοι .

Ἀθηναίους —this view of Athenian character is that of Thuc. himself. He began the description of it in the first speech of the Corinthian envoy at Sparta ( I. 70 ) and completes it in the Funeral Oration (c. 35 fol.).

πλέον τι —cf. III. 45, 6, 69, 2; IV. 78, 5; V. 29, 2; VI. 90, 1; VII. 21, 4, 49, 4. For τι with comparative, see 3 above. μᾶλλόν τι is commoner in this sense.

τῶν ἄλλων —often ἑτέρων in this idiom.

εἰκὸς — decet, with aorist infinitive, as regularly (sometimes present, c. 10, 1). Rutherford, Syntax, p. 128. The argument is now drawn from τὸ εἰκός. An orator naturally employs this topic to prove something in the past, but Thuc. to forecast the future. Index s.v. τόποι. τοῦτο δρᾶσαι—the regular phrase for referring to an action just deseribed. Cf. c. 49, 5; I. 5, 2, 6, 5. Of course Thuc. refers to the actual indignation of the Athenians at seeing their land ravaged. See c. 21, 2. It was a source of great pride that the beautiful country of Attica had never been plundered πλὴν τὰ Μηδικά. Cf. Eur. Med. 826 —the play was produced this very year— where the Athenians are addressed as ἱερᾶς χώρας ἀπορθήτου τ’ ἀποφερβόμενοι. ὁρᾶν —sc. δῃουμένην.

οἰσόμενοι —cf. c. 60 αἰτίαν φέρεσθαι. τοῖς προγόνοις — we should refer to posterity, but the ancients thought far more of the worship due to their ancestors, the θεοὶ χθόνιοι. On the excessive reverence of the Greeks for the past (from which Thuc. was remarkably free), Girard, Essai sur Thuc., p. 13, says ‘Les Grecs ne songeaient qu'aà chercher dans cet âge merveilleux leurs titres de noblesse et à y rettacher étroitement le présent.’

ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς —corrected from ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς with Hude, Comment. Crit., p. 109. ἕπεσθε strongly supports him. ‘Nulla in re magis quam in pronominibus ἡμεῖς et ὑμεῖς permutandis librarios peccavisse satis constat.’

ἀποβαινόντων —see c. 50, 2.

ὄξεως δεχόμενοι —cf. c. 89, 9.

κάλλιστον καὶ ἀσφαλέστατον —the identity of τὸ καλὸν and τὸ ἀσφαλὲς has been the prevailing idea throughout the speech. It is an idea characteristic of Sparta that εὐνομία is κάλλος. Thus Spartan tradition did not object to Athens claiming the poet Tyrtaeus for her own, though the claim was probably unfounded; but took care that the lame Athenian singer should only develop into the warrior Tyrtaeus after settling in Sparta.

ὄντας —the participle adds emphasis to πολλοὺς and heightens the contrast to ἑνί.

τοσαῦτα — haec tantum, the regular word after a short speech instead of τοιαῦτα. εἴ τι ἄρα —c. 5, 1 .

τι μᾶλλον —not for μᾶλλόν τι, but τι belongs to ἐνδοῖεν, as below, οὐδὲν ἐνδωσείουσι.

οὐδ’ — οὐδέ, μηδέ, sometimes as here = nedum ‘much less.’

τὸ κοινὸν —the βουλὴ and ἐκκλησία. ἦν ... νενικηκυῖα —except with this periphrasis in the perfect passive and middle forms, the tense of εἰμὶ must precede the participle, and is emphatic, representing a state of things existing at the time referred to, Cf. c. 67 ἦν ... πολιορκοῦν, 80 ἦσαν ... ξυμπροθυμούμενοι, 93 ἦν προφυλάσσον. Then the participle often resembles an adjective.

κήρυκα ... προσδέχεσθαι —a formal expression for breaking off all political relations. Cf. V, 80. .

ἐκτὸς ὅρων —without article, as a local expression, akin to ἐν ἄστει. Rutherford, Syntax, p. 4.

τὸ λοιπὸν — with πρεσβεύεσθαι. ἀναχωρήσαντας — i.e. retire before thinking of sending any more. The participle is emphatic.

διαλύσεσθαι —‘part from his escort.’

τοσόνδε — ‘merely this.’

ὅτι —this convenient form of quasi-oblique speech, where the speaker's actual words follow ὅτι, is colloquial and limited to prose.

ἥδε ἡ ἡμέρα —Aristoph. Pax 435 εὐχόμεσθα τὴν νῦν ἡμέραν Ἕλλησιν ἄρξαι πᾶσι πολλῶν κἀγαθῶν. Verg. Aen. IV. 169

ἔγνω —ingressive, ‘learnt.’

ἐνδωσείουσι —though Cobet and Sta. reject this, it is more probable than ἐνδώσουσι, since πω is not used with future, and Archidamus' object was to find out what the Athenians were now intending.

οὕτω δὴ —like τότε δή, gives the decisive moment. Cf. c. 19.

μέρος —of infantry. So the Boeotians did not supply cavalry only. See c. 9, 3.

λειπομένοις —for the present, see c. 2, 4.

ἐν ὁδῷ ὄντων —cf. c. 12, 1 and 2 , but referring here to the march not of the various contingents to the Isthmus, but of the whole force from the Isthmus. Several meetings of the Ecclesia were held.

Περικλῆς —O. Drefke, de orat. quae in priore parte Historiae Thuc. insunt, suggests that Thuc. probably intended to insert a speech here, but changed his mind on finding the subject unsuitable for readers. He thinks that we have here the notes Thuc. had made at the time, which assumption would explain the loose structure of the Oratio Obliqua throughout. Cf. c. 72. δέκατος αὐτὸς—the view of Gilbert, that this phrase means that Pericles was στρατηγὸς αὐτοκράτωρ, i.e. was irresponsible and had full powers to do anything he deemed necessary, is now generally accepted. Pericles held the same position in the war with Samos 440 B.C.

μὴ πολλάκις —as though ὑποτοπήσας were φοβηθείς. Cf. III. 53, 2 ὑποπτεύομεν μὴ οὐ κοινοὶ ἀποβῆτε. πολλάκις — forte, a sense which it bears only after εἰ, ἐάν, μή. μὴ δηώσῃ—should be οὐ δηώσῃ. This very rare irregularity is only possible when the second negative is far removed from the first. M. T. 306.

ἐπὶ διαβολῇ —the same thing was done by Hannibal to cast odium on Fabius, Livy, xxii. 23, 4 . For the order, see c 2, 2.

τοῦτο γένηται —c. 11, 8.

προηγόρευε —above προεῖπον. The rule about compounds of λέγω and ἀγορεύω will be found in Rutherford's New Phryn. p. 326.

οἱ —the only form of the indirect reflexive singular found in Thuc. and the orators, and rare in them.

ἐπὶ κακῷ —the same phrase in V. 44, 3, 77, 6; VIII. 58, 3, 4.

γένοιτο —sc. τοῦτο, as γένηται τοῦτο above.

τοὺς ἀγροὺς καὶ οἰκίας —the article not repeated, the two nouns forming one idea between them (viz. the idea τὴν φανερὰν οὐσίαν). Cf. c. 10, 3.

ἀφίησιν —does not depend on προηγόρευε, but is used for άφιέναι φησίν (which is possibly what Thuc. wrote), just as we might say ‘he gives the land’ for ‘he undertakes to give it.’

εἶναι —like the use of εἶναι in Homer and Herod., expressing purpose, but redundant. M. T. 774.

γίγνεσθαι —this is like the use of the infinitive in the terms of a treaty or any compact. It is in origin probably identical with the so-called infinitive for imperative. But this may be oblique for μηδεμία μοι ὑποψία γιγνέσθω. In any case, Pp.'s explanation, supplying βούλεται, is without doubt wrong. The sentence is probably a note Thuc. wrote in these very words at the time.

παρῄνει δὲ —cf. V. 38, 2 παρῄνουν γενέσθαι ὅρκους. καὶ πρότερον —I. 143. τὰ ἐκ τῶν ἀ. ἐσκομίζεσθαι—cf. c. 5, 7.

ἔς τε μάχην —the ancient critics noticed that polysyndeton is common in Thuc. There are three main members here, each introduced by τε, παρασκευάζεσθαί τε ... ἔς τε ... τά τε, and the first two are complicated by an additional member, which however does not affect the main structure, viz. καὶ ... ἐσκομίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ ἐξαρτύεσθαι. μὴ ἐπεξιέναι—Intr. p. lxix.

τὴν πόλιν ἐσελθόντας φυλάσσειν — cf IV. 70 τὴν πόλιν ἐσελθὼν βεβαιώσασθαι. When a participle and verb which have different constructions take a common object, the object regularly follows the construction required by the participle, as in I. 114, 2 ἐς Ἐλευσῖνα καὶ Θριῶζε ἐσβαλόντες ἐδῄωσαν , IV 18 δοῦναι ἐφ’ ἂ άφιγμένοι ὑμᾶς αἰτούμεθα, VII. 3, 4 μέρος τι πέμψας πρὸς τὸ φρούριον αἱρεῖ, ib. 53, 2 προσπεσόντες τοῖς πρώτοις τρέπουσι. But there is here no need to take τὴν πόλιν with ἐσελθόντας at all.

διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν — the opposite of ἀνιέναι, I 76 ἀρχὴν ἀνιέναι. So Livy XXI. 35, 9

. χεὶρ means ‘control.’ Eur. Hec. 986 . Cf. the legal sense of manus. See also c. 76, 4.

λέγων ... εἶναι —a rare construction—c. 57, 1. ἀπὸ τούτων εἶναι τῶν χρ. τῆς προσόδου — i.e. τὴν ἰσχὺν τῆς προσόδου τῶν χρημάτων ἀπὸ τούτων ( = τῶν ξυμμάχων) εἶναι. Cf. III. 13, 6 ἔστι τῶν χρημάτων άπὸ τῶν ξυμμάχων ἡ πρόσοδος. This sentence must not be pruned, for τῆς προσόδου defines the nature of ἰσχύν, and τῶν χρημάτων is caught up presently by χρημάτων again: the insertion of τῶν χρημάτων is stylistic.

τὰ πολλὰ .. κρατεῖσθαι —‘most successes are won.’

γνώμῃ —‘insight,’ not put in at hap-hazard, but summing up in a word παρασκευάζεσθαι to ἐξαρτύεσθαι. It is on the policy here sketched that Pericles rested his claims to be possessed of γνώμη, or, as Thuc. says in c. 65 πρόνοια. To supply γνώμη was the statesman's part, to supply χρήματα the subjects'.

ἑξακοσίων —in I. 96 we see that under Aristides' administration the φόρος amounted to 460 talents. In the lists of the quota paid to Athene for 450 and 446 B.C., the tribute of some States is seen to be reduced, and the total was probably made up by payments from new subjects. But the tribute was in some cases subsequently raised, so that 600 talents may represent the average ( ὡς ἐ τὶ τὸ πολὺ) in 431.

φόρου —for this genitive of material, cf. ἀργυρίου below. See Rutherford, Syntax, p. 35.

ἀπὸ τῶν ξυμ —the origin ( ἀπὸ) from which money is obtained. Cf. Aristoph. Vesp. 670 δωροδοκοῦσιν ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων (rightly defended by Sobolewski, de praepos. usu Aristoph.).

ἄνευ —this is the ordinary meaning of χωρὶς as a preposition in Attic, but Thuc. only uses χωρὶς as an adverb. The opposite of σὺν ( τοῖς) θεοῖς (see c. 2, 1) is ἄνευ ( τῶν) θεῶν. The opposite of σὺν in its other Attic sense in totals, is usually χωρίς. The opposite of μετά is ἄνευ, and more rarely χωρίς (thus Isocrates has two cases, but in both χωρίς, not ἄνευ, is used to avoid hiatus).

τῆς ἄλλης προσόδου —as rents from public lands, especially the silver mines, the tax paid by resident aliens and by owners of slaves, duties on imports exports and sales, and court fees and fines, amounting in all to at least 400 talents.

ἐν τῇ ἀκροπόλει — in the Opisthodomus of the Parthenon.

ἐγένετο —‘amounted to.’ Cf. c. 20, 4.

τὰ προπύλαια —begun 437, completed 432.

τἆλλα —the Odeum, Parthenon and the sculpture on the buildings was paid for out of this fund.

ἐς Ποτείδαιαν —from first to last the siege cost 2000 talents. It began in the autumn of 433, ended in the winter of 430. Probably Thuc. omits in that sum the expense of Hagnon's expedition (c. 58 ), which cost 400 talents more.

Χωρὶς —‘besides.’ Cf. c. 24, 31, 97. χρυσίου— depends on ταλάντων below.

ὅσα —sc. ἐστί. So c. 9, 4, 97 περί—‘used in.’

σκῦλα Μηδικὰ —sc. ὅσα ἐστί, but this might have been ἐν σκύλοις Μηδικοῖς. The throne of Xerxes and the sabre of Mardonius ( Medus acinaces) were among them.

οὐκ ἔλασσον ἢ π. ταλάντων —cf. IV. 72 παρόντος τοῦ στρατεύματος, ὁπλιτῶν οὐκ ἔλασσον ἑξακισχιλίων. The genitive of comparison does not follow ἔλασσον here, because ταλάντων is already in the genitive absolute, sc. ὑπαρχόντων from above.

Τὰ ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων ἱερῶν — i.e. in temples other than the Parthenon. The temple treasures were of great value.

χρήματα —no doubt Pericles explained the details, whieh he must have known thoroughly after his long tenure of the Generalship, in which he had distinguished himself in Finauce. In this respect he was imitated by many popular leaders who followed him, and, as the war went on, Finance became the most pressing difficulty.

οἷς χρήσεσθαι —cf. c. 102 λέγεται ... ὅτε δὴ ἀλᾶσθαι. This attraction of short relative clauses in Oratio Obliqua into infinitive is less rare in Greek than in Latin (of course qui = et is etc. is different). Thuc. has nine instances.

τῆς θεοῦ — i.e. the statue of Athene. Both in Greek and Latin the name of the person represented is used for the statue itself, as Victoria aurea.

σταθμὸν —predicate.

χρυσίου ἀ. —with τάλαντα. ἀπέφθου — i.e. without alloy.

περιαιρετὸν εἶναι —sc. ἔφη. μὴ ἐλάσσω— often during the war money was borrowed from the ἱερὰ χρήματα. The loans were repaid with interest at a low rate, which Pericles probably proposed at this time.

Τρισχιλίους καὶ μ. —cf. c. 31, 2. 10,000 were on the spot, 3000 at Potidaea.

τῶν ἐν τοῖς φρουρίοις —the garrisons of Attica were supplied mainly from the περίπολοι, young Athenians between 18 and 20 years old. At 18 their age was entered in the ληξιαρχικὸν γραμματεῖον, list of the members of the deme capable of arms kept by the demarch. Not till 20 was a man entitled to attend the Ecclesia. The περίπολοι regularly served in Attica.

ἔπαλξιν —eollective. See c. 4, 2. Again the article dropped with a word approximating to a proper name, in prepositional phrases. The line of fortified walls of Athens and Piraeus, including the long walls, is meant. The citizens who manned these were drawn from the πρεσβύτατοι, those excused by age from serving outside Attica. Legally this age was 60, but in practice it could be, and probably was, reduced.

νεωτάτων —the περίπολοι.

Τοῦ Φαληρικοῦ —begun under Themistocles with τὸ ἔξωθεν ( τεῖχος), which ran to Piraeus. Under Pericles, about 445, a third wall, τὸ διὰ μέσου was built between these two, running to Munychia.

ἦσαν —were, according to Pericles' narrative.

τὸν κύκλον τοῦ ἄστεως —the walls of Athens.

ἀφύλακτον ἦν —about 6 stadia: so that the city walls, as rebuilt after Salamis, were about 50 stadia in circumference.

τοῦ τε μακροῦ = τοῦ ἔξωθεν. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη —namely τὸ ἔξωθεν, the earlier wall, and τὸ διὰ μέσου τεῖχος, called τὰ σκέλη .

σταδίων —genitive of description, almost confined to expressions of magnitude. Cf. c. 23, 3.

Ξὺν ἱπποτοξόταις — including ( ξὺν) the 200 mounted archers, state slaves who served as police, as did the 1200 Σκύθαι who are included in the 1600 τοξόται below.

τριήρεις τὰς π. —see c. 2, 2.

τριακοσίους —in III. 17 we read that 250 ships were employed on active service at the beginning of the war. (As the details there given do not correspond with those given in this book with regard to the fleet in 431, the text is probably wrong in III. 17. )

Ἐς ἀπόδειξιν τοῦ περιέσεσθαι —cf. c. 56 ἐς ἐλπίδα ἦλθον τοῦ ἑλεῖν, and for the rare future infinitive with article, I. 144, 1.

τῷ πολέμῳ —the dative is temporal. Cf. c. 20 ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἐσβολῆ?. It is however rarely that ἐν is omitted with a noun used temporally which is not properly temporal.

Ἀνεπείθοντο —both the compound and the tense denote the difficulty of convincing them. Cf. c. 65, 1. Even now they did not feel quite certain, and were liable to change their minds again. (It was δόξα resulting from πειθώ, not ἐπιστήμη resulting from μάθησις.)

τὴν ἄλλην —perhaps the exclusive άλλος, but κατασκευή, stock, may here include children and wives. See c. 5, 4.

κατ’ οἶκον —see on c. 60, 4.

ξύλωσιν — materia; several verbal nouns in ‐ις are peculiar to Thuc. Cf. ὀλόφυρσις c. 51. Pollux and the Schol. regard this one as coined by Thuc.

καθαιροῦντες —this and ἐσεκομίζοντο both govern ξύλωσιν. ἐπικειμένας—‘off the coast.’

Χαλεπῶς ... ἐγίγνετο —passive for χαλεπῶς τὴν ἀ. ἐποιοῦντο. ἀνάστασις—an unwilling ( μετανάστασις, a willing) removal from one's country.

Ἐπὶ γὰρ —now follows one of the few episodes in Thuc., who never leaves his subject except to comment on some epoch of Athenian history either throwing light on the circumstances he is relating, or imperfectly understood in his day.

κατὰ πόλεις —cf. the condition of Sparta, referred to I. 10, 2. According to tradition, there were 12 πόλεις in Attica; these had arisen by the increase and amalgamation of κῶμαι. ᾠκεῖτο—of the political condition of the district, as often.

πρυτανεῖα —these bore the same relation to the community as the οίκία did to the family. Hence the community entertained its guests there.

ἄρχοντας —‘princes,’ some of whose names may have been immortalised in the names of Attic demes.

οὐ ξυνῇσαν —only common danger brought them together.

ἐπολέμησαν —the war between Athens and Eleusis, given as an example of the early wars in Attica, was probably due to a quarrel about the frontier, which was the range of Mount Aegaleos, over which the Sacred Way after wards ran. Whatever the result, the position of Athens in the Dodecapolis was certainly raised by the war.

Θησεὺς —probably the legend of the coming of Theseus to Athens represents a second Ionic invasion of Attica, to which the strife between Athene and Poseidon, who is identical with Aegeus, father of Theseus, also points. See Plut. Thes. c. 13.

ἐβασίλευσε —‘became king.’ Cf. c. 58 νοσῆσαι, ‘to fall sick.’

μετὰ τοῦ ξυνετοῦ — i.e. uniting power to the ability which he had already.

καταλύσας ... ἀποδείξας ... ξυνῴκισε —the first participle precedes the second in time, and the second gives the action which resulted immediately in that of the main verb. Cf. c. 76 ἀρτήσαντες ... ἀνελκύσαντες ἀφίεσαν, 93 ἀφικομένους ... καθελκύσαντας πλεῦσαι. ξυντελούντων—‘contributed to it,’ in taxes, hence ‘were members of the community.’

ξυνοίκια —neuter plural, the annual festival celebrating the Union, held on the 16th of Hecatombaeon. Plut. Thes. c. 24.

ποιοῦσιν —active not middle, of the body appointing the festival, cf. c. 34, 5.

Ἡ ἀκρόπολις — i.e. ἣ ἀκρόπολις νῦν ἐστι πόλις ἦν, the city was a mere stronghold. ‘What is now the acropolis, and the ground lying under it to the south was the city’ (J.). (The bracked ἡ would imply a contrast with some older acropolis.) The same observation is true of London and Paris.

πρὸς τετραμμένον —here in its literal sense, but oftener metaphorical, as in c. 25, 2; Plat. Phaedo, p. 66 D.

Τεκμήριον δέ —Thuc. disregards the Athenian legends, as suited only to poetry. Deposing the picturesque and enthroning the reasonable, he judges the remote past solely hy the indisputable evidence supplied by the present. For the use of τεκμήρια and σημεῖα, non-forensic πίστεις like ἐνθυμήματα (c. 11, 8) and γνῶμαι (c. 11, 9), cf. 39, 2, 41, 2, 50, 2.

καὶ ἄλλων —the lost allusion to the most ancient temple of Athene, namely the shrine of Athene Polias attached to the Erectheum and containing the venerable wooden figure of the goddess ( ξόανον) and occupying the site of her struggle with Poseidon, would have been the best evidence that the original site of the city was the Acropolis.

τὰ ἔξω —the early temples not on the Acropolis lie at the south of it, viz. the Olympieium at the S.E., begun by Pisistratus, remarkable for its size, and only finished under Hadrian; the Pythium, or temple of Apollo πατρῷος, of which there are no remains, Pausanias says it was close to the Olympieium; the shrine of the Earth-Mother, situated within the τέμενος of the Olympieium; and that of Dionysus in the low ground near the Ilissus. The Pisistratids probably did much to make these temples popular.

τὰ ἀρχαιότερα —the Anthesteria, held in Anthesterion (11th to 13th). The first day was called ἡ Πιθοιγία, the second Χόες, the third Χύτροι. Aristoph. Ran. 215 , Eur. I. T. 960, Harpoc. and Suidas s.v. χόες. [

τῇ δωδεκάτῃ ]—gives one day only, and with it Ἀνθεστηριῶνος μηνός would be required. The date of the χόες seems inserted from the same source from which Harpocration drew.

ποιεῖται —passive of ποιοῦσι, not of ποιοῦνται. See 2 above, and c. 11, 4.

οἱ ἀπ’ Ἀ. — i.e. οἱ ἄποικοι τῶν Ἀθηναίων. νομίζουσι —‘are accustomed to do.’ Cf. 5 below, c. 38, 1.

Τῇ κρήνῃ —S. of the Olympieium, on the Ilissus. The Pisistratids furnished it with nine pipes and beautified it with columns. It was part of the Tyrants' policy to improve their cities and to encourage every form of art.

Καλλιρρόῃ —the name still survives to show the early importance of this spring. See Ruskin, Oxford Lect. on Art, p. 136, Pausanias, I. 14, 1. [

τὰ πλείστου ἄξια ]—Thuc. is arguing that in earlier times the spring was in general use.

πρὸ γαμικῶν — for the λουτρὸν γαμικόν, the water being brought from the spring by a maid called ἡ λουτροφόρος. Pollux III. 43, VIII. 66. But Harpoc. says that a boy brought it. ἐς ἄλλα—ἔθος ἦν καὶ τῶν ἀγάμων ἀποθανόντων λουτροφόρον ἐπὶ τὸ μνῆμα ἐφίστασθαι Harpoc. Cf. Dem. in Leoch. 18, 30. Probably a figure holding a pitcher, which contained water from the spring, was placed on the tomb. Eustathius says the object was to show that the dead had never used the nuptial water.

νομίζεται —‘it is the custom.’ The connection between the λουτρὸν γαμικὸν and the λουτρὸν τῶν ἀποθανόντων is as familiar as utraque taeda. In Eur. Hec. 612 , the bringing of the water to wash the dead body of Polyxena snggests to Hecuba the λουτρὸν γαμικόν.

Κατοίκησιν —c. 102, 5.

πόλις —this meaning is common in Inscriptions and official documents.

Τῇ ... οἰκήσει —causal, with γενόμενοι καὶ οἰκήσαντες. δ’ οὖν—resumes from c. 14. ἐπὶ πολὺ —temporal.

αὐτονόμῳ —independent of any capital.

καὶ —‘even.’

ὅμως — answers καὶ and may be omitted in translating.

οἱ πλείους —restricting οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι. πανοικεσίᾳ γενόμενοί τε καὶ οἰκήσαντες—all go closely together, ‘having been born and having lived with their whole family.’

ἀνειληφότες —having recovered from the effects of the Persian Invasion, when they had abandoned their homes. Not merely ‘had restored their homes,’ which took them only a short time. Cf. VI. 26, where it is said that Athens in 415 ἄρτι ἀνειλήφει ἑαυτὴν ἀπὸ τῆς νόσου καὶ τοῦ ξυνεχοῦς πολέμου.

Κατὰ τὸ ἀρχαῖον —lit. ‘according to early custom,’ ‘primitive,’ not τὸ ἀρχαῖον ‘in early times,’ ‘ancient.’ The early πόλις was held together mainly as a religious union, with its local cult.

ἀπολείπων —joined to preceding plural, and might have been ἀπολείποντες. Cf. c. 65, 10.

*(γπῆρχον —‘had homes ready to receive them.’ It appears that the whole of the country population was opposed to war. The rich landed gentry had town houses, but rarely lived in them and felt the loss of their fine country places. Cf. c. 65; Isocr. VII. 52. The farmers and peasants were ruined by the invasion. Cf. [Lys.] 20. 33.

Ἐλευσινίου — at the foot of the Acropolis, at the N.E. It was regarded with great awe, and even in the time of Pausanias some mysterious sanctity belonged to it. The Boule sat there the day after the Eleusinian Festival ended.

τὸ Πελαργικὸν —( a) a fortification built by the ‘Pelasgians’ on the W. side of the Acropolis, the only side accessible to an enemy; ( b) a space below this fortification and also above it. It is to this space on either side that the curse attached. (On the orthography, Herodian says, Πελαργικὸν ἀντὶ τοῦ Πελασγικόν. Cf Lobeck, Phryn. p. 109.

ἐπάρατον —what was the reason of this? Only the W. side was ‘cursed’ since only on that side could buildings be placed; but this space was part of the pomoerium of the original settlement, the Acropolis being then the τέμενος of Pelasgian Zeus. Hence no human beings were to live there. μὴ—due to the prohibition implied in ἐπάρατον. τοιόνδε — i.e. μὴ οἰκεῖν αὐτό, the relative construction disappearing. See c. 4, 5.

Πελαργικὸν ἀργὸν —such παρονομασία is common in oracles. See c. 54, 2.

ἄμεινον —a favourite word at Delphi, suiting well the oracle which worked by suggestion rather than command.

ἐξῳκήθη —‘was filled with settlers.’

Ξυμβῆναι —‘to have been fulfilled in a manner con- trary to their expectations,’ because the troubles were the cause instead of the result of the occupation.

ἢ προσεδέχοντο —Haase suggested ἢ {ᾗ} προσεδέχοντο, but the relative may be omitted.

γενέσθαι —sc. δοκοῦσι from δοκεῖ above. So Burke, Reflections, ‘In England we are said to learn manners at seeond-hand from your side of the water, and that we dress our behaviour in the frippery of France’ ( i.e, it is said that we dress).

προῄδει — i.e. warned them that the place would some day be inhabited in time of adversity.

μὴ ἐπ’ ἀγαθῷ —after οἶδα the regular negative is οὐ. This μὴ implies a sense of authoritative declaration in οἶδα, and is not a colloquial license. M. T. 688. μὴ belongs to ἀγαθῷ.

Κατεσκευάσαντο —‘fonnd quarters.’

ὡς ἕκαστός που — Aristoph. Eq. 792 , Andoc. ap. Suid. s.v. σκάνδιξ. Andocides refers to the difficulty of getting good food.

ἐχώρησε —from this early trans. use of χωρεῖν comes the meaning ‘receive’ of persons, as in St. Matthew xix. 12.

Ἥπτοντο —cf. Plat. Phaedo, 64 A ὀρθῶς ἁπτόμενοι φιλοσοφίας. Thuc. speaks of the Athenians generally: while the country people were settling down as best they could, the Athenians were meanwhile busy with the details connected with the war, both τὰ ἔξω, ξυμμάχους ἀγείροντες, and τὰ ἔνδον, ναῦς ἐξαρτύοντες. τῇ Π. .—c. 56, 1.

ἐν τούτῳ π. — cf. VII. 50, 4 ἐν παντὶ ἀθυμίας .

Τῆς Ἀτ. ἐς Οἰνόην —for order cf. c. 21, 1, 25, 3.

Οἰνόην —there were two roads to Attica, the one a bad one by the coast, the other an inland one, leading over Cithaeron by the Pass of the Oak's Heads ( Δρυὸς Κεφαλαί) and passing Eleutherae, which is probably the site of Oenoe. In any case Oenoe was on the frontier between Attica and Boeotia and just where the road from Athens and Eleusis branched off, one way to Plataea, the other to the Peloponnese.

ὡς ἐκαθέζοντο —the imperfect implies a prolonged stay. Cf. c. 19, and see c. 3, 1.

προσβολὰς —the siege was preliminary to the invasion. See 19, 1.

παρεσκευάζοντο —for the omission of ὡς with the participle, cf. c. 91, 1.

φρουρίῳ —because it commanded the pass. A similar importance attached to Phyle and Decelea.

ἄλλως —‘in other ways.’

Αἰτίαν τε —to the end of the chapter is parenthetical.

ἔλαβεν ... δοκῶν ... οὐ παραινῶν — δοκῶν gives the cause of ἔλαβεν, παραινῶν the cause of δοκῶν. Cf. c. 86 ἀνθώρμουν ... γνώμην ἔχοντες ... φοβούμενοι. αὐτοῦ—of what has just been described, as often.

ἐν τῇ ξυναγωγῇ — in bello conflando. So Isocr. οἶμαι τὸν πόλεμον θεῶν τινα συναγαγεῖν. ἐπειδή τε— this τε joins ξυνελέγετο to ἐν τῇ ξυναγωγῇ. Four periods are distinguished, (1) the time when Sparta was seeking a casus belli, (2) the time when the contingents were assembling at the Isthmus, (3) the march to Oenoe, (4) the delay at Oenoe

ἥ τε —this τε belongs equally to ἐπειδὴ ξυν. ὁ στρατός, but the order is distorted for the sake of the antithesis between the three periods. Cf. c. 13, 2.

κατὰ τὴν — i.e. ἡ κατὰ τὴν ἄλλην π. σχολαιότης. Cf. Intr. p. xl.

ἄλλην —exclusive, ‘as well.’

μάλιστα δὲ —the most inelegant section in the book. The repetition of what has been said in 2 above is clumsy.

Ἐπελθόντες ἂν —the ἂν belongs to καταλαβεῖν only; of course ἂν is constantly attracted to a partic. which forms the protasis; but sometimes the ἂν also belongs to the partic., which is part of the apodosis, as c. 53, 4 βιοὺς ἂν ... ἀντιδοῦναι. (In some cases it is not easy to decide whether the partic. belongs to prot. or apod., as Demosth. Phil. 1 , 1.)

Ἐν ... ὀργῇ —see c. 59, 2.

Πᾶσαν ἰδέαν —adverbial, = πάντα τρόπον. πειρά‐ σαντες —se. αὐτῆς. In Attic πειρῶμαι = conari. Only Herod. and Thuc. among prose writers use the aetive in this sense. [

τῶν ἐ. Θηβαίων ]—Intr. p. xxxix.

ὀγδοηκοστῇ — i.e. about June 20th.

ἀκμάζοντος —denotes the time preeeding ripeness, in Attica the end of May and the greater part of June.

ἡγεῖτο δὲ —Archidamus has been already referred to again and again as the general. But ef. c. 47, 2, 71, 1; III. 1, 1, 26, 2, 89, 1; IV. 2, 1; V. 54, 1, 57, 1; VII. 19, 1. ὴγεμὼν is the technieal word for the Peloponnesian general, cf. I. 128 Παυσανίας ὁ ἡγεμὼν τῆς Σπάρτης, and the name of the ἡγεμὼν —generally one of the kings—in command of a Spartan expedition is regularly given as a matter of form. As regards Sparta, ἡγεμὼν is regularly the title of a king or regent. Thus Brasidas is ealled only στρατηγὸς or ἄρχων .

Καθεζόμενοι —for the tense, ef. c. 18, 1.

Ἐλευ‐ σῖνα καὶ τὸ Θ. πεδίον —the country round Eleusis.

περὶ τοὺς Ῥειτοὺς —two salt lakes on the boundary between the land of Athens and Eleusis, at the eorner of the Thriasian plain. From Eleusis Archidamus had followed the Sacred Way.

Αἰγάλεων —instead of ‘turning off to the eastward,’ as Grote says, Archidamus probably continued along the direct road to Athens, i.e. the Saered Way, erossing the pass of Daphni, and only then turned north towards Mount Parnes. This agrees better with ἐν δεξιᾷ ἔχοντες τὸ Αἰ. (Mount Skarmanga). The question is eomplicated by the uneertainty of the position of the deme Cropia.

χρόνον πολὺν —with ἔτεμνον. ἐμμείναντες—‘having settled there.’ ἐμμένειν is regularly used of persons: thus ἐμμένω ταῖς σπονδαῖς, not αἱ σπονδαὶ ἐμμένουσιν is the ordinary idiom. For exeeptions, see c. 2, 1 not. crit.

Ὡς ... ταξάμενον ]—by no means in accordanee with the desultory nature of Archidamus' operations. On λέγεται, see c. 57, 1.

ἐς τὸ πεδίον —the Attic plain.

ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἐσβολῇ —temporal. See c. 13, 9, 57, 2. Rutherford, Syntax, p. 68.

Τμηθῆναι —the infinitive after περιορᾶν is found only in Herod. and Thuc.; π. then = ἐᾶν, the notion of perception or want of it being lost. Cf. c. 18, 5. M. T. 903, 6.

Ἐνστρατοπεδεῦσαι —for ἐν in compounds with ad- verbial force, cf. c. 44, 1.

μέρος —see c. 21, 3. There were probably heroes of Marathon to be found among the Acharnians, who were by no means inclined to see their vines cut down without a blow being struck. The deme was proud of its distinction in war. See Aristoph. Ach. 180 .

ὁρμήσειν —transitive, governing τοὺς πάντας .

Τοιαύτῃ μὲν —resuming and dismissing γνώμῃ τοιᾷδε in 1 above. Cf. 9, 1 and 6.

Καί τινα —the principal sentence.

Πλειστοάνακτα —when Euboea and Megara revolted from Athens 445 B.C., and Pericles had crossed to Euboea, Pleistoanax invaded Attica, but retreated after ravaging the Thriasian plain, as Pericles returned.

μεμνημένοι. .ὅτε...ἀνεχώρησε —‘remembering the time when.’ Cf. c. 54, 4 μνήμη ἐγένετο . ὅτε ( ὁ θεὸς ) ἀνεῖλε. Eur. Hec. 112 οἶσθ’ ὅτε χρυσέοις ἐφάνη ξὺν ὅπλοις. Only ὅτε is used in prose to mark a date. See c. 98, 1. So ‘audivi eum eum diceret.’

ἐσβαλὼν ... οὐκέτι προελθὼν — both temporal; cf. c. 68, 3 , 71, 2 , where also the time of the first precedes that of the second.

ἐς Ἐ. καὶ Θριῶζε — i.e. ἐς Ἐ. καὶ τὸ Θριάσιον πεδίον. ἐς τὸ π. οὐκέτι—‘without advancing further.’ Cf. I. 114 τὸ πλἐον οὐκέτι προελθόντες. With the eomparative the ‐έτι is superfluous, but idiomatic.

ἡ φυγὴ —Thuc. writes as though he had mentioned this before, but nothing is said about it in I. 114, and it is again referred to incidentally V. 16. It must have been a very famous event.

Ὡς εἰκὸς —with ἐφαίνετο. ἐν τῷ ἐμφανεῖ —)( ἐν τῷ ἀφανεῖ I. 136. ἐν in an adverbial phrase is eommon.

πλὴν —here an adverb. Cf. c. 34. So ad = ὡς, Livy XXI. 22, 3 ad mille oetingenti, though that use is limited to cases in whieh mille or millia intervenes.

τὰ Μηδικὰ —‘at the time of the Persian war.’ Cf. I. 3, 4 τὰ πρὸ Ἕλληνος. Adverbial aceusative, as in τὸ πρῶτον. μὴ περιορᾶν—distinguish ( a) οὐκ ἐδόκει περιορᾶν, ‘it did not seem good to overlook it,’ ( b) ἐδόκει οὐ περιορᾶν, ‘it seemed that they were not overlooking it,’ ( c) ἐδόκει μὴ περιορᾶν, ‘it seemed better not to,’ i.e. ‘they determined not to,’ implying ‘preferenee or deprecation.’ Rutherford. Syntax, p. 132.

Κατὰ ξ. γ. —so γίγνομαι is often used with participial expressions. Cf. c. 3 ἐκ τοῦ ἴσου γίγνεσθαι. The style here beeomes more animated, the conflicting passions being described, as usual, in short eo-ordinate sentences.

οἱ μὲν — apposition to the universal subject. Cf. c. 16, 1.

παντοίους, ὡς ἀκροᾶσθαι — i.e. every man, to whatever side he belonged, eould quote his own oraele-monger.

ὥρμητο —with infin., as in c. 59. παρὰ —c. 72, 2.

παντί τε —this τε sums up the preeeding three.

στρατηγὸς ὢν —Pericles being στρατηγὸς αὐτοκράτωρ (speeially given unlimited powers) could prevent any of his colleagues from leading them out.

ὑπεξαγάγοι — cause assigned by the people. Hence optative.

Γιγνώσκειν περὶ τοῦ μὴ —cf. c. 55. For the reason of his action, see Intr. p. lxix.

ἐκκλησίαν τε ... τήν τε —the double τε implies two coneurrent acts having the same object in view.

ἐποίει —‘summon.’ ἐκκλησία means the regular meeting ( κυρία ἐκκλησία) which only a στρατηγὸς αὐτοκράτωρ could prevent. It was ordinarily held in each Prytany. ξύλλογος means a special meeting ( συγκλητὸς ἐκκλησία). Cf. c. 59 and IV. 114, 120. These were summoned by the Prytanes at the request of the Strategi. (Gilbert, Beitr. zur innern Geschichte, p. 14, explains this passage differently.) As so many eountry people were now in Athens, all opposed to the war, it would have been very dangerous to eall a meeting.

οὐδένα —but he could not prevent the ξυστάσεις: club intrigues and sueh strained eombinations of opposed interests as oecur in times of excitement took the plaee of ordinary politics. In this hazy atmosphere the figure of Cleon looms indistinctly. (We cannot penetrate into the workings of the ἑταιρεῖαι to which Thuc. refers; but Grote is quite mistaken in saying that Cleon rose now ‘as an opposition speaker.’ He was preparing for the great attaek on Pericles that was made in 430 B.C. Intr. p. lxxvi.)

δῑ ἡσυχίας —c. 13, 2.

Τοῦ μὴ —purpose, a rare construction outside Thuc.

ἐσπίπτοντας ἐς κακουργεῖν —the eommon object is accommodated to the participle. See c. 13, 2.

ἀγροὺς —the Attic plain.

Φρυγίοις —somewhere between Athens and Acharnae in the plain.

τροπὴ ἐγένετο —pass. of τ. ἐποιήσαντο, c. 19.

Τὸ παλαιὸν ξ —made 461 B.C., the Thessalians being enemies of the Dorians and Boeotians from early times. The allianee was made when Sparta sent away the foree which Athens sent to help to subdue the helots.

Πολυμήδης καὶ Ἀριστόνους —these suggestive names are one outeome of the visit of Gorgias to Larissa, which had previously prided itself on ἱππικὴ rather than σοφία. Plat. Meno, 70 B, Isoer. 15, 155 .

ἀπὸ τῆς στάσεως —the Sehol. says ἡ Λάρισσα ἐστασίασε πρὸς ἑαυτήν· διὸ ἑκατέρα μερὶς ἄρχοντα εἶχε. λέγει δὲ ὅτι ἑκατέρα στάσις δύναμιν Ἀθηναίοις ἀπέστειλεν. οἱ μὲν γὰρ δημοκρατίαν ἤγαγον, οἱ δὲ ὀλιγαρχίαν. These explanations are based only on the passage. It is more probable that Thue. means that the troops of Larissa were in two divisions, each having its own general Cf. c. 36, 1; VI. 62. The meanings of μέρος and στάσις are much alike, and as μέρος sometimes has a political, so στάσις perhaps has a military sense. Cf. centuria. A. Philippi, Rhein. Mus. 36, p. 245, proposes ἀρχηγὸς τῆς στάσεως for ἀπὸ τ. ς. Larissa was the most important state in Thessaly. Its prinees elaimed to be descended from Heracles, Pind. Pyth. 10 . (Herodian settles the orthography. It must be admitted that the analogy of Thebes, and of Sparta to some extent, favours the explanation of the Sehol.)

κατὰ πόλεις —though the cities of Thessaly had separate prinees, they seem to have been connected by allianee.

Βριλησσοῦ —Mt. Pentelicon, N.E. of Athens. See 3 below.

Χιλίους ὁπλίτας —10 for each ship, as usual. These marines were generally Thetes. Cf. VI. 43 They were called ἐπιβάται. Καρκίνος—related to the famous tragic poet of the same name, at whom Aristophanes jests several times.

Πρωτέας —had been one of the commanders of the 10 ships sent to Coreyra in 433. Intr. p. lxvii.

Ὅσου —see c. 13, 7.

Ὠρωπὸν —to get there from Pentelieon, they would pass the demes Cephisia, Aphidna and Oenoe, and cross the pass of Deeelea.

τὴν Γραϊκὴν —the name of the coast opposite Eretria. It is probably the plaee whieh gave the name Graeci to the colonists of Italy. See Busolt, G. Gesch., I. p. 14

Ἀθηναῖοι ύπήκοοι —Oropus fell into the hands of Boeotia in 412 B.C. Thuc. leaves his note, made probably in 431, unaltered.

Ἀναχωρησάντων —then the eountry people returned to their demes.

φυλακὰς —to give warning to the eountry people of any fresh invasion and to prevent ships sailing in or out of Megara. Cf. also c. 32, 69. See c. 93, 4. The arrangements were quite different when an enemy was in Attica. Cf. c. 13, 7.

δὴ —Thuc. thinks of the changes which were soon found necessary. Cf. c. 94, 5.

ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς —in the Ecclesia. The position of Pericles was now improved by the retreat of the enemy, and the departure of the country people. In the eity itself and in Piraeus he had a large majority. Both Diodorus and Plutarch call attention to this inerease of influence, but assign the wrong reason.

ποιησαμένοις —might have been aecus. (c. 7, 2), but Thuc. and Lysias keep the dat. more than other writers. Cf. v. 9 9.

ἀναλοῦν —old form of ἀναλίσκειν. εἰπῇ—of the proposer of a motion, ἐπιψηφίσῃ of the president for the day, who put the question. In VIII. 15, after the revolt of Chios early in 412, τὰ χίλια τ. εὐθὺς ἔλυσαν τάς ἐπικειμένας ζημὶας τῷ εἰπόντι ἢ ἐπιψηφίσαντι καὶ ἐψηφίσαντο κινεῖν. κινεῖν—only of things disturbed through neeessity.

ἐς ἄλλο τι —explained by what follows. Cf. c. 1 ἑξῆς. νηίτῃ—old word for ναυτικῷ in this phrase. Thuc. is giving the formal language of the ψήφισμα. θάνατον—‘the penalty they fixed was death.’ ζημίαν goes elosely with ἐπέθεντο, whieh is mid. beeause the motion then passed applied to themselves.

Ἐξαιρέτους —a reserve fleet, distinct from the φυλακάς, inspected yearly; any ships not in first-rate condition were replaeed.

κατὰ τὸν —the addition of the article adds formal preeision to the language.

τριηράρχους —the ships were docked, so that the eaptains would have nothing to do unless there were an attack by sea. See c. 94. ὧν—goes baek to τριήρεις. χρῆσθαι—it is easy to supply ἔδοξε, but by no means certain that Thuc. intended this. See c. 13, 1 γίγνεσθαι and 5 οἷς χρήσεσθαι. ἢν δέῃ—the apod. is implied in τοῦ αὐτοῦ κ .

Ἐκεῖ —the Messenians of Naupactus, placed there by Athens 455 B.C., the Acarnamans and Zaeynthians.

Μεθώνην —contrast the order in e. 18, 1 and 3 below. M., now Modon, is in Messenia, but after the Messenian Wars, circa 650 B.C., Messenia belonged to Laeonia. About the same date, the inhabitants of Nauplia, expelled from Argolis, were settled in Methone by Sparta, to hold the port in her interest as the Messenians afterwards held Naupaetus for Athens.

προσέβαλον —they thought to take it by assault, judging a regular approaeh unnecessary.

ὄντι ... ἐνόντων —see on e. 4, 4.

οὐκ ἐνόντων —se. τῷ τείχει. There were however men in the place, but it was ungarrisoned. The attaek was a surprise.

Περὶ τοὺς χ. τ. —the only phrase in which the plur. of χῶρος oceurs in Thue. Cf. c. 101, 2; III. 102, 4.

Βρασίδας —Thuc. admired Brasidas and relates many of his adventures. They may be read again, adorned with rhetorieal effects, in Diodorus.

φρουρὰν ἔχων —‘with an expeditionary force,’ sent to protect the eoast of Messenia. Cf. φρουρὰν φαίνειν in Xen., ‘to send out a force.’

τετραμμένον —‘with their attention oceupied.’ Cf. c. 40, 2. So versus ad.

ἐπῃνέθη —by a decree passed in his honour, the usual sense of ἐπαινῶ in such eases.

Σχόντες —cf. c. 33, 3.

Φειὰν —now Katakolo, the landing-place for visitors to Olympia.

ἐπὶ δύο ἡ —cf. c. 86, 5. A rare use of ἐπί. Cf. Andoc. II. 8 λύπας ἐπὶ χρόνον πλεῖστον φέρειν. τῆς κοίλης Ἤλιδος—the physieal conditions of the eountry as well as the feud between Elis and Pisatis over the management of the games dating from the 7th cent. B.C., prevented any real union in this district. The N. part, in the valley of the Peneus, was ἡ κοιλή, and was taken by the Aetolian Epeans or vαλεῖοι (Lat. vallis) from the earlier population.

λογάδας —Ionie for ἐπιλέκτους, used by no other Attic prose writer. Eur. Hec. 544 . Suidas s.v. λογάδην. αὐτόθεν — i.e. from the neighbourhood of Pheia itself, whieh, being in Pisatis, belonged to the περιοικίς. ἐκ τῆς περιοικίδος—epexegesis of αὐτόθεν, but also showing that the relieving party was drawn not merely from the immediate neighbourhood of Pheia, but from Pisatis and Triphylia generally ( ἡ περιοικίς, the sense being political not geographical ).

Ἀνέμου κατιόντος —cf. c. 84 ; VI. 2, 4. The regular word of a breeze getting up at sea.

ἐπέβησαν ἐπὶ —so I. 111 ; VII. 69 ; less eommonly simple dat. Contrast ἐπιβαίνω with gen., ‘to set foot in.’

Ἰχθῦν —the promontory on whieh Pheia lay, now C. Katakolo.

τὸν ...λιμένα —probably Pontikokastro. [

οἱ...ἐπιβῆναι ]—this could only apply to ἄλλοι τινές: but it is probably a note on οἱ Μεσσήνιοι καὶ ἄλλοι .

Προσεβεβοηθήκει —plup., because this had caused the departure of the Athenians.

Φυλακὴν —predicate, καὶ joining the two phrases which express the objects of the expedition. For περὶ of vague reference, cf. c. 7, 3.

Κλεόπομπος —was strategus again in 430; c. 58 (? 431/430 or 430/429. See note l.c.)

Θρόνιον —some way inland; the capital of the Epi- cnemidian Locrians, on whom see c. 9, 4.

τε —introduces the third fact.

αὐτῶν —the inhabitants of Thronium, the people being named instead of the plaee, as often.

Ἀλόπῃ —its ruins, like those of Thronium, are on the road from the modern Atalante to Thermopylae.

Αἰγινήτας —Athens had been frequently at war with Aegina, the last war being 460-456 B.C., when Aegina surrendered. See I. 67. {

ἐν }

τῷ αὐτῷ θ —Cl. shows that Thuc. always inserts ἐν in this phrase. Otherwise he uses the gen.

αὐτούς τε —‘brutale applieation du droit du plus fort.’ M. Henry.

οὐχ ἥκιστα —with αἰτίους. [τῇ Π. ἐπικειμένην]—had this been the object Athens would have directed her attacks on Peloponnese from Aegina; but we hear nothing of this.

ἐποίκους — i.e. κληρούχους. This measure was certain to make Pericles very popular.

καὶ — ‘and so.’

Θυρέαν —thus the Aeginetans would form a buffer between Laconia and Argolis. This region was a constant source of dispute between the two.

οἰκεῖν ... νέμεσθαι — these limit ἔδοσαν and ‘denote occupation, not property.’ Bloomf. Cf. c. 30. σφῶν—emphatic. ‘We help you because you helped us.’

ὑπὸ τὸν σεισμὸν —about 464 B.C. Just after, the helots revolted, and the Messenians were expelled in consequence. See c. 25, 1. The Spartans now paid back Athens for placing the Messenians in Naupactus,

Θυρεᾶτις —had been in the hands of Sparta since 495 B.C.

Κατὰ σελήνην —see c. 4, 2 on τελευτῶντος τοῦ μηνός. ὥσπερ καὶ—probably Thue. drew his knowledge of natural phenomena from Anaxagoras, whose influence on Pericles and many of the thoughtful men of the time was very great. A. was called ὁ Νοῦς, his chief doctrine being νοῦς ἐστὶν ὁ διακοσμῶν τε καὶ πάντων αἴτιος. Soerates when a young man once believed in him. See Plato, Phaedo 97 C, where S. speaks of A's physical theory with good-humoured banter. Cf. c. 102, 3. According to a story in Cicero ( de Rep. I. 16) and Plutarch, Per. 35, the people were alarmed at this eelipse, and Pericles explained it after Anaxagoras.

ἐξέλιπε — this chapter correets, while it ignores, the current superstitions about eclipses. Herod. I. 74 tells a similar tale of Thales.

γενόμενος καὶ ἐκφανέντων —see c. 4, 4.

ἀστέρων —Mars and Venus.

Πυθέω —Ionic gen. of Πύθης. Cf. Τηρέω below.

εἶχε —sc. γυναῖκα. Cf. Andoc. I. 50 ὃς ἔχει σου τὴν ἀδελφήν. Σιτάλκης—see c. 95-102. πρόξενον—their representative in the kingdom of the Odrysae.

Τὴν μεγάλην βασίλειαν —the great kingdom existing in 431.

ἐπὶ πλεῖον τῆς ἄλλης —there are several ways of explaining this. The old rendering was ‘made it more powerful than the rest of Thrace,’ but this strains ἐπὶ πλεῖον. The others are (1) ‘extended his kingdom over a great part of Thrace,’ (2) ‘established it over a greater territory than the rest of Thrace comprised,’ i.e. it included more than half of Thrace, (3) ‘formed it on a larger scale than the rest of Thraee.’ Probably (2) is right; I. 9, 3, 71, 3 are similar.

Προσήκει οὐδέν —at a time when Athens was trying to form a conneetion with Thrace, it was natural that people should try to eonneet Athenian history with Thraeian.

τὸ ἔργον —a hint at the murder of Itys by Procne and Philomela. Ovid, Met. VI. 620. For the attitude of Thuc. towards these myths, see Grote I. p. 389.

πολλοῖς —the ordinary prose rule for the agent with perf. pass, which Thuc. generally follows, is that the dat. is used when the subject is nonpersonal: when the subject is a person, ὑπὸ and gen. is invariably used.

ἐν ἀηδόνος μνήμῃ —‘in referenees to the nightingale.’

εἰκὸς δὲ —for this argument cf. c. 11, 8. It was used only by orators and historians: philosophers laughed at it.

κῆδος —an Ionie word for ‘a connexion by marriage,’ found in Herod., Tragedy and late writers.

διὰ τοσούτου — ‘at so short a distance.’ Cf. c. 12, 1.

πολλῶν ἡμερῶν — depends on ὁδοῦ, see c. 13, 7.

Τὰ ἐπὶ Θ —the Chalcidian towns, which were causing much anxiety at the time.

Περδίκκαν —he had acted against Athens in the matter of Potidaea. I. 57-62. ξυνελεῖν— ‘to help to establish their influence over.’

Τε —‘and so.’

ἐποίησε —contrast with ἐποιήσαντο in 4 above.

Σάδοκον —this presentation of the freedom of Athens amused and disgusted many. See Aristoph. Acharn. 141 .

Ἀθηναῖον —Muller-Strubing places καὶ Σάδοκον . .Ἀθηναῖον after ξύμμαχον ἐποιήσαντο above, on the ground that Thuc. could not say that an Abderite made a man a citizen: but it is plain that Thuc. refers to formalities earried out by the Proxenus when a member of his state was made a citizen of the state of which he was Proxenus. (So μυεῖν, ‘to initiate’ into the mysteries, a privilege belonging to the Eumolpidae, and Ceryees is used inexaetly of the man who introduces a candidate for initiation. Cf. [Dem.] 59, 21, Andoc. 1, 132 .

Ξυνεβίβασε —a great gain to Athens. Cf. Intr. p. lxviii.

Θέρμην —eaptured by Athens in 432. I. 61, 2. τ’—‘and so.’

Φορμίωνος —he had gone with reinforeements to Potidaea in 432. See c. 2, 1. He had been Strategus in the Samian War, and again held offiee in 430 and 429. I. 64, 117; e. 69, 80, 102.

Οὕτω μὲν —the usual way in whieh Thue. summarises and dismisses a subject to pass to another. Cf. e. 4, 9, 15, 20.

Οἱ —the influence of the art. extends to Πελοπόννησον, so that ὄντες is attributive.

ἔτι —where they were left c. 25. Σόλλιον—here Demosthenes landed in Aetolia in 426. It remained in the possession of Athens to the peace of Nicias. It appears to be S. of Astacns.

τὴν γῆν καὶ πόλιν —the art. covers both nouns, they being inseparable. Cf. c. 64 ἡ λαμπρότης καὶ δόξα. νέμεσθαι —epexegetie, τὴν γῆν καὶ πόλιν being object to παραδιδόασι. Cf. c. 27, 2.

Ἄστακον —near the mouth of the Achelous.

Κατὰ Ἀκαρνανίαν —‘opposite.’ Cf. Aristoph. Ran. 626 κατ’ ὀφθαλμοὺς = coram te. A rare use.

τετράπολις — the Samaeans were the most important, and in ancient times gave their name to the state. In Od. I. 246 Cephallenia is ealled Same, in IV. 671 Samos.

Παλῆς —the names of the people are given instead of the cities. Cf. c. 9, 4.

Φθινόπωρον —in September.

Μεγαρίδα —for the policy of this, see Intr. p. Ixxii. Megara had a hard fate, gross time-server as she was. In 455 she revolted from Sparta to Athens; then in 445, when Athens was in a bad plight, revolted from her and rejoined Sparta. In 427 Nicias seized Minoa, an island off Megara. In 425 Aristophanes, in the Acharnians, gibed at her sufferings in a spirit worthy of Lauderdale. In 424 the Athenians became masters of Nisaea and the Long Walls that connected Megara with that port. Then the walls were pulled down. In the truce of 423 the line between the Athenians and Megara was carefully defined. Athens lost her influence there by the peace of 421, when Minoa and Nisaea were restored to Megara.

Μεγάροις — i.e. the district of Megara, as with Eleusis c. 19.

Ἐγένετο —of a sum total, as c. 13, 3.

μυρίων — with the 3000 hoplites at Potidaea, the total becomes 13,000, as mentioned in c. 13. Phormio, who had been sent with 1600 more to Potidaea, must have returned already to Athens, though, as often in Thuc., this fact is only referred to incidentally and later See c. 58, 2.

ὅμιλος —so c. 34, 8, 36, 4, 65, 4. Outside Thuc. it is found only in Herod., Tragedy and late authors, as Dion. Hal., Plutarch, Lucian.

Καὶ ἄλλαι —the result was a sore famine in Megara.

Ἀταλάντη —in 426 B.C. part of the island disappeared in an earthquake when it was oeeupied by the Athenians.

φρούριον —predicate. ἡ ἐπὶ Λοκροῖς—ἐπὶ = ad oram sita. So III. 89, 3.

Ὀποῦντος —see c. 9, 2.

Ἐπικούρους —speeially used of mereenaries and tyrants' body-guards. Χρύσιδος —Χρῦσις is masc., Χρυσὶς fem., c. 2, 1.

Τῆς περὶ θ —an uncommon use of περί. See on c. 99, 3, and for the order, cf. c. 18, 1.

πειραθέντες —see c. 19, 1. Supply προσποιήσασθαι. ἀπέπλεον—imperf., as the journey was broken.

Σχόντες ... ἀπατηθέντες ... ἀποβάλλουσι —the first participle is temporal, while the second belongs closely to the verb and defines it like an adverb of manner.

ἐξ ὁμολογίας —‘after an agreement had been made with them,’ the Corinthians, so that they had reason to expect the surrender of the islanders. The antithesis is between ἀπατὴ and ὁμολογία, i.e. ἐξ ὸμολογίας ἀπατὴ γίγνεται, as ἐξ is constantly used of persons, to denote a change of condition; cf. transfuga ex oratore etc.

ἀπροσδοκήτοις —active. See c. 3, 4.

βιαίοτερον —‘not without a struggle,’ with considerable diffieulty.

Νόμῳ —‘custom.’ See c. 35, 1.

ταφὰς —funeral) ) τάφος, tomb.

ἐν τῷδε τῷ π —see e. 1, init.

ἀποθανόντων —in the siege of Potidaea, during the skirmishes with the invaders in Attica, and in the two coast expeditions.

Ὀστᾶ —the bodies had been burnt already at the scene of the action, then the bones were collected and buried at Athens. Cf. Plato, Phaedo, 80 D ἔνια μέρη τοῦ σώματος, ὁστᾶ τε καὶ νεῦρα καὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν ἀθάνατά ἐστιν. προτίθενται — proponunt.

ἀπογενομένων —ef. c. 51, 5. An Ionie word. Herod. II. 85. Suidas, s.v. ἀπεγένετο, says οὕτως Ἀντιφῶν καὶ Θουκυδίδης. Probably it was used in ritual, as ἀποκτιννύναι for ἀποκτείνειν. πρότριτα —so Aristoph. Lys. 611 . Cf. πρόπεμπτα. Both words puzzled ancient commentators. We should say ‘two days’ (before the ἐκφορά).

σκηνὴν ποιήσαντες —in the agora, whieh was in the deme Cerameicus.

ἤν τι —not the things whieh the dead were supposed to require for their existenee below, but fancy presents.

ἐπειδὰν —used here like ὅταν. Contrast 6 below, and c. 72, 3.

κυπαρισσίνας —the sehol. says that cypress was used beeause it does not easily deeay. Cl. says this is mere imagination; but at Veniee carved chests of cypress were used in the time of Shakspere for keeping valuable stuffs in. (‘Taming of the Shrew,’ II. 1 In cypress chests my arras.) The faet that it was used for coffins may be the reason why it was saered to the dead.

φυλῆς —the members of a φυλὴ were buried together ( a) because the φυλαὶ were the largest aggregates based on the family, ( b) because they were the basis of military organisation. ἧς ἕκαστος—ἕκ. is put into the relative clause, as in c. 17, 3.

κενὴ —every effort had to be made to reeover the dead; only for those who were not found after eareful search was the symbolic burial sufficient. Eur. Hel. 1241 Ἕλλησίν έστι νόμος ὃς ἂν πόντῳ θάνῃ [κενοῖσι θάπτειν ἐν πέπλων ὑφάσμασιν. τῶν ἀφανῶν —with κλίνη. For the expression, cf. VIII. 38 ἀποπλέων ἐν κέλητι ἀφανίζεται.

Ὁ βουλόμενος —the generic art. is post-Homeric.

ξένων —thus the aliens would hear the funeral oration, in which Athens was always extolled.

αἱ προσήκουσαι —this limits γυναῖκες, lit. ‘I mean those who are related.’

ἐπὶ τὸν τάφον —the women might be present at the grave, but did not walk in the proeession from the agora.

Προαστείου —that part of the Cerameieus which was outside the gates was used as a cemetery. It was to Athens what the Appian Way was to Rome. It was just outside the Dipylon, the chief and double gateway of Athens. Probably it means ‘the potters' quarter,’ the Athenian potteries being famous. Cf. the potters' field in St. Matthew, XXVII. 7, whieh was bought ‘to bury strangers in.’

πλὴν —see c. 21, 2.

ἐν Μαραθῶνι —see not. crit. Some critics, while admitting ἐν Σαλαμῖνι, deny that ἐν can be used with Μαραθῶνι, and no case where the metre requires ἐν before Μαραθῶνι is found. The names of the sites of famous battles are used elliptically.

αὐτοῦ —on the battle-field.

καὶ —as well as burning the bodies.

τάφον ἐποίησαν —‘made them their grave.’ The mound raised over it still exists, as also the remains of the trophy of victory set up in 490 B.C.

ᾙρημένος ὑπὸ —the subject is a person; therefore ὑπὸ and not the dat. is used with the perf. pass.

μὴ ἀξύνετος — i.e. ξυνετώτατος. ἀξιώσει—Grote and Shil. say ἀξίωσις means the estimate one has of oneself; ἀξίωμα that which others have of one. Such a wide difference does not exist here. ἀξίωσις is the recogintion of a man's γνώμη. προήκῃ —rare for προέχῃ. ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς—the prep. marks the occasion. Cf. 8 below, 35, 1, 42, 1. So in the orators.

ἔ. τὸν πρέποντα —mark the order. c. 2. 2.

Ξυμβαίη —sc. θάπτειν τοὺς ἐκ τοῦ πολέμου, i.e. at the end of each campaign.

Καιρὸς ἐλάμβανε —‘at the right moment,’ = κ. κατε‐ λάμβανε. Cf. c. 18, 2.

ὑψηλὸν πεποιημένον —together. Ste. however places the stop after ὑψηλόν. ὡς ἐπὶ πλεῖστον —so ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ IV. 29, 3; ἐπί πλέον c. 53, 1 (cf. c. 29, 2 note). Cf. Eur. Sup. 857 fol.

ἔλεγε —now follows the λόγος ἐπιτάφιος. It is more worked up than any other speech in Thuc., and conforms closely to the rhetorical rules. The other λ. ἐπιτάφιοι extant are one ascribed to Lysias, one to Demosthenes (see 44, 2), the Menexenus ascribed to Plato; fragments of one by Gorgias (see Intr. p. xlii.), and a considerable part of one by Hypereides. Doderlein says of the speech ‘Arte dicentis ad laudes Athenarum inflexum ac potius ad comparationem vitae Atheniensium liberae, liberalis, vere vitalis, cum tetrica angustaque et aerumnosa Spartanorum disciplina.’

Ἐπαινοῦσι — ἔπαινος filled λ. ἐπιταφίους. τὸν προσθέντα—it is not known who instituted the custom. It was of course ascribed to Solon. After a time, the subjects dealt with became traditional commonplaces. Dion. Hal. enumerates them ( Ars Rhet. VI.) as πατρίς, γένος, φύσις, ἀγωγή, πρᾶξις. Then he shows how the subjects should be treated.

ὡς καλὸν —sc. ὄν . M. T. 875.

νόμῳ —probably ‘institution.’

ἀρκοῦν —used as an adj.

ἂν ἐδόκει — censeam, often instead of censeo, as a polite expression, ‘I am inclined to think’; if I had to settle the matter I should hold. Cf. Burke, On American Taxation, ‘For my part I should choose (if I could have my wish).’

ἔργῳ δηλοῦσθαι —in a public burial, in honour paid to the tomb (a very important matter to the Greeks), and in privileges to the family.

τιμάς, οἷα —the change to neuter shows that only an instance of the many kinds of τιμαὶ is given.

περὶ —not local, but ‘at’ meaning ‘on the occasion of.’

παρασκευασθέντα — with οἷα. καὶ μὴ κ.τ.λ.—Gottleber makes πιστευθῆναι subj. of κινδυνεύεσθαι , i.e. καὶ ( τὸ ) πολλῶν ἀρετὰς πιστευθῆναι μὴ κινδυνεύεσθαι ἐν ἑνί. (This is better than making πιστευθῆναι depend on κινδυνεύεσθαι, as then ἢ οὔ would be required after πιστευθῆναι.)

ἐν ἑνὶ —cf. Eur. I. T.1057-8

. For the pass. κινδυνεύεται cf. c. 43, 5.

πιστευθῆναι —for omission of τό, cf. c. 39, 4.

εὖ τε καὶ χεῖρον — sive bene sive male dixerit.

τὸ μετρίως εἰπεῖν —explained by what follows as meaning neither ἐνδεεστέρως δηλοῦν nor πλεονάζειν .

ἐν ᾧ — in a case where. Cf. c. 1. In this phrase, the relative does not refer to any definite antecedent, but rather to the whole preceding clause.

δόκησις —even if the speaker is sure he has hit the mean, he finds it hard to convey that impression to his hearers. The word δόκησις , impression, is tragic, and used by no other prose writer. See c. 14, 1.

ἀληθείας —

.

ἐνδεεστέρως —cf. c. 50 χαλεπωτέρως. Thuc. uses a considerable number of such comparatives. They are rare in other prose writers (Dobree, Advers. II. 208), except indeed only after ἔχειν intrans., as Plato, Phaedo, 75A ἔχει δὲ ἐνδεεστέρως. πρὸς— prae. Cf. c. 62, 3, 65, 10.

ἀκούοι —protasis to ἂν νομίσειε.

τῷ ὑπερβάλλοντι αὐτῶν —viz. τῶν ἐπαίνων, that which transgresses the limit in these panegyrics they actually discredit. See on c. 59, 3 τὸ ὀργιζόμενον τῆς γνώμης. φθονοῦντες—not that they envy the dead (which the speaker says is not the case c. 45, 1), but they do not like to hear another's praises exaggerated, whether he be living or dead ( περὶ ἑτέρων ἔπαινοι). Cf. Herod. III. 52 φθονέεσθαι κρέσσον ἐστὶν ἢ οἰκτείρεσθαι. Pind. Pyth. I. 85 κρέσσων οἰκτιρμοῦ φθόνος .

Ἐπειδὴ —resumes ἐμοὶ δ’ in 1 above.

ἐδοκιμάσθη —properly of the preliminary test to which newly-appointed officials had to submit to prove they were qualified. Hence δεδοκιμασμένος, like spectatus, ‘tried and approved.’ The word shows Pericles has in his mind a custom rather than a law.

Ἄρξομαι —here begins a subsidiary introduction, the object of which is to get rid of the conventional topics in few words, and lead up to the prothesis (see 4 below).

προγόνων —dismissed with merely a respectful mention, as Pericles' real business is with the present, not the past. He begins with πρόγονοι, the θεοὶ χθόνιοι, as poets and orators begin with the gods. Plato does it sometimes at the beginning of a long discussion; cf. Livy's conclusion to his preface, and the opening of Demosth. de Cor.

πρῶτον —not pleonastic, for the analysis shows that the ἀρχὴ of the speech contains three points.

δίκαιον .. πρέπον —the former of one's duty towards others, the latter of one's duty towards oneself.

αὐτοῖς —with δίδοσθαι. καὶ π. δὲ ἅμα —like non modo ... sed etiam.

ἐν τῷ τοιῷδε —‘on such an occasion as this.’

οἱ αὐτοὶ —predicate with οἰκοῦντες. The Athenians prided themselves on being αὐτόχθονες. διαδοχῇ —instrumental.

Πατέρες —he passes to the period of the Persian Wars.

πρὸς οἷς —they received Attica; they left the maritime confederacy.

ἀρχὴν —Pericles avoids stating the steps by which the Athenian ἡγεμονία was turned into an ἀρχή .

Τὰ πλείω —is accus. of respect, and refers especially to the internal improvements, made in the age of Pericles, of whatever kind. As for the material improvements—buildings and walls—Pericles' connection with them precluded him from referring to them in detail.

ἡμεῖς —Pericles was born about 490 B.C. Hence μάλιστα, ‘more or less.’

ἐν τῇ καθ —lit. ‘living in settled life,’ i.e. ‘in the vigour of life,’ the time between growth and decay. Cic. Cat. maj. 76 constans aetas quae media dicitur.

ἐπηυξήσαμεν —‘have improved it.’

αὐταρκεστάτην —by the increase of the revenue and the advance of culture.

ἐκτήθη —offensive measures) ( ἠμυνάμεθα, defensive. [

πόλεμον ]—this would require Ἑλληνικύν, since Ἕλλην can only be used as an adj. with persons, as VII. 42, 1 ἀκοντιστὰς βαρβάρους καὶ Ἕλληνας. ἀπὸ δὲ—this introduces the prothesis, or statement of the theme of the main portion of the speech (the πίστις ).

ἐπιτηδεύσεως —‘principles’ on which concrete ἐπιτηδεύματα are based. Pericles will explain the meaning and point out the results of the ideas which underlie the Athenian constitution, and show that it is based on philosophy and intelligence. (Aristotle did not admire Pericles much, because Athens degenerated so rapidly after his death; and Plato thought little of most men who took part in public affairs: but the passage in Phaedo, 82 A οἱ τὴν δημοτικήν τε καὶ πολιτικὴν ἀρετὴν ἐπιτηδευκότες, ἣν δὴ καλοῦσι σωφροσύνην τε καὶ δικαιοσύνην, ἐξ ἔθους τε καὶ μελέτης γεγονυῖαν ἄνευ φιλοσοφίας τε καὶ νοῦ, could not apply to Pericles and the circle of Anaxagoras. See Appendix in Archer—Hind's edition).

αὐτὰ —cf. c. 1 ἕκαστα , 43, 1.

μεθ’ οἵας —the prepositions are important. ἀπὸ gives the remote origin, ἐξ the immediate cause, μετὰ the circumstances under which the result was produced. From both ἀπὸ and ἐκ must be distinguished ὑπό, of the agent (see Class. Rev. III. 436 a ),

πολιτείας —of public and active life) ( τρόπων, of personal relations, and intellectual life.

ταῦτα δηλώσας —‘I will explain this before’ etc. The main emphasis is on the partic. as c. 12, 2.

ἐπὶ τῷ παρόντι —‘under the present circumstances,’ i.e. at the end of the first campaign. There will be practical lessons to learn from the description. Intr. p. lxxii. In the same sense ἐπὶ τοῖς παροῦσιν is used VIII. 54, 4.

ἀπρεπῆ — predicate, with λεχθῆναι. Cf. c. 102, 6.

ἀστῶν —so that they might lay to heart the lesson to be learnt.

ξένων — see c. 34, 4.

ξύμφορον —neut. The general topic of the πίστις is τὸ ξυμφέρον. It is changed at c. 43 for τὸ καλόν. ἐπακοῦσαι—‘to hear with attention’) ( ὑπακούειν ‘to hear and obey.’

Οὐ ζηλούσῃ —the institutions of Sparta were based on those of Crete.

παράδειγμα —probably a reference to the embassy sent from Rome to Athens in 454 B.C. to examine the laws of Solon. Livy III. 31. (Hertz, N. Jahrb. 1881, p. 283 fol.)

ὄντες —the partic. is constructed with the subject instead of with πολιτείᾳ, so that the pride of the people is directly appealed to.

ὄνομα —adverb. accus.

ἐς ὀλίγους . . οἰκεῖν —‘the administration is in the hands not of a few but of the majority.’ οἰκεῖν is here intrans. = ‘to be administered,’ and the subject is ἡ πολιτεία. Cf. Plat. Rep. VIII p. 547 C πῶς οἰκήσει ( αὕτη ἡ πολιτεία);

δ. κέκληται —‘our constitution is called a democracy.’ Then μέτεστι δὲ κ.τ.λ. explains that, though named a democracy, the name does not mean that the claims of excellence are disregarded.

πρὸς τὰ ἴδια δ ——‘in protecting their private interests,’) ( ἐς τὰ κοινὰ below.

πᾶσι — i.e. ὀλίγοι, as well as δῆμος. The two cardinal principles on which the democracy rested were ἰσονομία and ἐλευθερία. All being equal in the eyes of the law, the majority of necessity controlled the state. Pericles was convinced that complete democracy was necessary, as only under such a government had all an equal chance of developing their abilities; all being, as Isocr. says, ἐκ τῆς δημοκρατίας πεπαιδευμένοι. κατὰ δὲ—antithesis to μέτεστι πᾶσι rather than to κατὰ μὲν τοὺς νόμους. ἀξίωσιν — existimatio, the consideration accorded to merit, recognition of personal claims

εὐδοκιμεῖ —he alludes especially to officials elected by show of hands, such as the strategi. Those offices which required no special knowledge were filled by lot. Whether the best men were always elected is doubtful. Pericles only claims that nothing stood in the way of merit.

οὐκ ἀπὸ μέρους — ‘not on account of his rank so much as.’ μέρος = a particular class, such as the ὁμοῖοι of Sparta.

ἀγαθόν τι δρᾶσαι —see c. 64, 1; Plat. Rep. I. 332 A.

ἀξιώματος ἀφανείᾳ —the result of ἀξίωσις is ἀξίωμα, a position in the state: ‘by the obscurity of his position.’

κεκώλυται —sc. ἀγαθόν τι δρᾶσαι τὴν πόλιν, a clear statement that abilities are to be devoted to the advancement of the state. (This was the theory of all the best Athenian statesmen: there was some sense in the Seriphian's insult to Themistocles, οὐ δῑ αὑτὸν ἀλλὰ διὰ τὴν πόλιν εὐδοκιμεῖ.)

Ἐλευθέρως —the same liberal spirit that we show in public life underlies all our private relations.

τά τε .. καὶ —parataxis: ‘as ... so.’

πολιτεύομεν —lit. live in the state, τὰ πρὸς τὸ κ. being internal accus. ‘as regards our public life,’ quod attinet ad rempublicam.

ἐς τὴν ὑποψίαν —‘in respect of that mutual suspicion often felt ( τὴν) in the daily business of life.’

ἐπιτηδευμάτων —the outcome of following any particular ἐπιτήδευσις (see c. 36, 4).

δῑ ὀργῆς . . ἔχοντες —c. 13, 2.

εἰ ... δρᾷ —this merely = τὸν δρῶντα, i.e. no time is referred to at all. If it were, ἐάν τι δρᾷ would be required. Cf. c. 64, 6.

καθ’ ἡδονήν τι δρᾷ — genio indulget, ‘does as he likes.’ This is true generally; but in their religious opinions the Athenians were intolerant.

ἀχθηδόνας προστιθέμενοι —‘assuming an ill-humoured expression.’ τῇ ὄψει ‘on our faces’ may be omitted in trans.; unless, indeed, it belongs not to προστιθέμενοι, but to λυπηράς, ‘annoying to see.’ ἀζημίους is active in meaning. ἀχθηδὼν (= ἄχθος) is poetic. Thuc. still alludes to Sparta, where people could not do as they liked, through the rigorous system of police control enforced by the ephors.

Ἀνεπαχθῶς —‘yet, in spite of this freedom from restraint in our private intercourse, we are in our public acts most careful to reverence the laws.’ Both τὰ ἴδια and τὰ δημόσια are adverbial.

αἰεὶ —constantly used of the officials who held office for a year, and denoting the continuous succession of magistrates.

ἀκροάσει —‘showing respect to,’ = ἀκροώμενοι, which means lit. ‘listening eagerly to.’ Cf. c. 21, 3.

αὐτῶν —with ὅσοι. ἄγραφοι — Soph. Antig. 454 ἄγραπτα κἀσφαλῆ θεῶν| νόμιμα δύνασθαι θνητὸν ὄνθ’ ὑπερδραμεῖν . Xen. Mem. IV. 4, 19 . They are the natural laws that are engraved on the heart of every right-minded individual, so that none doubt it is disgraceful to transgress them. Cf. Milton: ‘Those unwritten, or at least unconstraining laws of virtuous education.’

αἰσχύνην ... φέρουσι —‘bring universally admitted disgrace,’ sc. τοῖς παρανομοῦσι.

Ἀναπαύλας —an old Attic word, frequent in trag.

τῇ γνώμῃ —‘for the mind,’ referring to the humanising and artistic value of the festivals.

ἀγῶσι —namely, at the πανηγύρεις, the chief festivals, when business ceased. Such were the Panathenaic Festival and the Dionysia.

θυσίαις —not the ordinary sacrifices, but those performed at the ἑορταί, the most important of which were πανηγύρεις. διετησίοις — ‘which succeed one another throughout the year.’ At Athens the festivals were more frequent than elsewhere, and perhaps ridicule was cast upon them by the Spartans, just as the Romans ridiculed the Jews and Christians for wasting time over their weekly sabbath.

νομίζοντες —= χρώμενοι: an Ionic use, cf. I. 74, end.

κατασκευαῖς εὐ —c. 65, 2.

καθ’ ἡμέραν ἡ τέρψις — i.e. ἡ καθ’ ἡ. τέρψις. Cf. c. 18. 3. For the reason of this transposition, see Intr. p. xl. The object here is to contrast καθ’ ἡμέραν with διετησίοις, in which there is a legitimate gain, since καθ’ ἡμέραν is always used of ordinary business, whereas διετησίοις applies to the holidays: also to extend the force of καθ’ ἡ. to ἐκπλήσσει and τὸ λυπηρόν, as in c. 7, 2 ἐξ Ἰταλίας belongs partly to ποιεῖσθαι. τὸ λυπηρὸν— of the petty worries of life, which oppress the middle classes, and take all the pleasure out of life. Pericles allndes to Sparta. Cf. Burke, On American Taxation, ‘If I were to detail the imports, I could show how many enjoyments they procure which deceive the burden of life.’

Τὰ πάντα —cf. c. 11, 6, 36, 4, ‘all that we need.’ The echo in πάσης ... πάντα is what Cornificius calls traductio. It is a variety of παρονομασία. Cf. VI. 87, 4 ἐν παντὶ γὰρ πᾶς χωρίῳ. VI. 11, 1 διὰ πολλοῦ γε καὶ πολλῶν ὄντων. οἰκειοτέρᾳ κ.τ.λ.—ht. ‘the enjoyment with which we reap the harvest of the good things produced in our own land is not more our own than that of the productions of the rest of the world,’ i.e. ‘we have the advantage of enjoying the products of other countries as freely as those of our own.’

τὰ ἀγαθὰ —not the products of the soil only, but those of the mind as well.

αὐτοῦ —adv., cf. c. 7, 2.

Καὶ —‘further.’ Here Pericles, who has not before openly alluded to Sparta, first avows the contrast.

ταῖς μελέταις ... τοῖσδε —the second dat. restricts the first.

τῶν ἐναντίων —with διαφέρομεν. κοινὴν—Intr. p. lxx. end.

ξενηλασίαις —‘alien acts,’ one of the arcana imperii by which the Ephors tried to keep ont foreign manners. Strangers were not allowed to settle in Sparta. The Athenians felt this as an insult. Cf. I. 144. Aristoph. Av. 1012 ὥσπερ ἐν Λακεδαἰμονι ξενηλατεῖται. ὃ ... ὠφεληθείη — i.e. ὃ εἰ ἴδοι μὴ κρυφθὲν ὠφεληθείη ἄν. Thuc. says that he was unable to obtain information about Spartan military matters owing to the concealment which the government practised. v. 9, 5. Cf. c. 8, 4, and τὸ κρυπτὸν τῆς πολιτεἰας v. 68, 2.

τῷ ἀφ’ ἡμῶν ... εὐψύχῳ some what similar is c. 87, 1 τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης. Demosth. 54, 36 — ἡ ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ἑτοιμότης. ὄση καὶ ὅα πρὸς τὸ ποιεῖν ὁτιοῦν ὑπάρχει. A rare use outside Thuc.: not found in Aristoph., very rare in the orators.

ἐς τὰ ἔργα —contrasted with παρασκευαῖς. Contrast c. 11, 5.

ταῖς παιδείαις —‘respective methods of education.’

ἐπιπόνῳ ἀσκήσει —of the laborious training to which young Spartans were subjected, being taught to imitate the courage and gravity of men. The life they led was half military, half monastic. At Athens ἐπίπονος was only associated with γῆρας, not with νεότης. Plat. Rep. I. p. 329 D.

ἀνειμένως διαιτώμενοι —cf. I. 6, 3 πρῶτοι Ἀθηναῖοι τόν τε σίδηρον κατέθεντο καὶ ἀνειμένῃ τῇ διαίτῃ ἐς τὸ τρυφερώτερον μετέστησαν. It was conflicting ideas that drove Athens and Sparta into war. Doderlein says ‘demonstratur (in this speech) non impotentia tantum et dominandi cupidine ad bellum tam atrox tamque diutinum impulsos esse, sed etiam diversa recti honestique aestimatione et constanti sui utrosque judicii propugnatione.’

τοὺς ἰσοπαλεῖς κ —Editors are not agreed as to the meaning of these words; there are two interpretations: (1) ‘equal dangers,’ i.e. dangers as great as any the Spartans, for all their training, venture to face (so most edd.); (2) ‘struggles in which equal, but not superior, forces oppose us.’ So Kr., Cl., Tillmanns. The general sense favours (1), the Greek favours (2). According to (2), the reservation is implied ‘we do not risk a battle against superior forces, as when the enemy invade Attica.’

Τεκμήριον —see c. 15, 3.

καθ’ ἑαυτούς — i.e. alone, without the help of their allies. καθ’ ἑκάστους is impossible because it would refer to detachments of the Lacedaemonians: had Πελοποννήσιοι stood in place of Λακεδαιμόνιοι, it would have been right.

πάντων —sc. τῶν ξυμμάχων. αὐτοὶ—‘by ourselves.’ The words are arranged so that a great emphasis falls on κρατοῦμεν, up to which point, the exact meaning of αὐτοὶ, which is contrasted with μετὰ πάντων, remains in doubt.

περὶ — = ὐπὲρ, as often in Isocr. and Demosth. Cf. c. 41, 5. Aristoph. Eq. 767 περὶ σοῦ μάχομαι, 781, 1038.

τὰ πλείω — cf. c. 11, 4 τὰ πολλά.

Τε —cf. c. 11, 4. This new fact has an important bearing on τὰ πλείω κρατοῦμεν, enhancing the value of the victories, and excusing the reverses.

ἐπὶ πολλὰ —with ἐπίπεμψιν. At the same time that we are busy with our fleet, we have to send out our citizens on many expeditions by land.

ἡμῶν αὐτῶν — i.e. having no allies available.

ἐπίπεμψιν — (see c. 14, 1) = διὰ τὸ ἡμῶν αὐτῶν (‘partitive’) ἐπιπέμπειν. αὐχοῦσιν—poetical word. Herod. II. 160. αὔχημα, very rare in Attic, occurs in c. 62, 4.

ἀπεῶσθαι —middle.

ὑφ’ ἁ. ἡσσῆσθαι —c. 34, 6.

Καίτοι —resumes the main thought which was in- terrupted at τεκμήριον δέ: ‘and surely.’

ῥαθυμίᾳ —‘with a light heart.’ Cf. ἀνειμένως διαιτώμενοι above. Not in its bad sense. Shil. quotes [Arist.] Eth. VI. 1 οὔτε πλείω οὔτε ἐλάττω πονεῖν οὐδὲ ῥᾳθυμεῖν. πόνων—this word had great significance to the Spartans and Thebans, denoting the ‘training’ which they thought so necessary to success. It is constantly used by Pindar, who holds that πόνος and δαπανή (‘outlay’) together win victory in the games. Observe the παρονομασία in πόνων, νόμων, τρόπων. μετὰ .. ἀνδρείας—the Spartan manliness is the result of military rules, the Athenian of habit formed through our mode of life. ἀνδρείας belongs to both gens., and νόμων ἀνδρείας, τρόπων ἀ. form a chiasmus with ῥαθυμίᾳ, πόνων μ. ἐθέλομεν—‘omnes recentioris aetatis pro ἐθέλοιμεν scripserunt ἐθέλομεν.’ Wichmann. Sta. thinks that Dion. Hal. really wrote the indic., and that this, like other passages he quotes from Thuc., has been altered by Byzantine scribes in his text. The critics ‘corrected’ Dionysius from their MSS. of Thuc.

περιγίγνεται —Dion. Hal. says Thuc. ought to have written περιέσται, because ἐθέλω points to the fut., but there is no reference to time at all here, and if there were the pres. γίγνομαι can apply to the fut. Trans. ‘we are the gainers.’

τοῖς μέλλουσιν ἀλγεινοῖς —it is a question whether the dat. is causal, ‘through coming troubles,’ or dat. commodi, ‘for the sake of.’ Probably it is causal.

ἐς αὐτὰ — τὰ ἀλ. γεινὰ ‘when face to face with trouble.’ The καὶ is paratactic, ‘while,’ and the verb, περιγίγνεται, is gradually lost sight of, until we reach ἐν ἄλλοις, which belongs rather to what follows. This is a good example of Thuc.'s πολύνους βραχυλογία. ἀτολμοτέρους ... φαίνεσθαι —with φαίνομαι Thuc. more often omits than inserts the partic., where an adj. is used. Contrast c. 51, 3 σῶμα αὔταρκες ὂν ἐφάνη.

Φιλοκαλοῦμεν —these words have been assidu- ously translated, paraphrased, and burlesqued. They not only defend Athenian ἀνδρεία, but contain sound advice to his hearers not to let their love of art degenerate into bad taste and mere display, nor their culture undermine their manliness.

εὐτελείας —‘simplicity,’ avoidance of the gorgeous ornamentation that afterwards characterised Asianism.

φιλοσοφοῦμεν —‘combine culture with manliness.’ Observe the ἰσόκωλον (equal number of syllables in two clauses), 11 syllables on each side of καί: this is a variety of παρομοίωσις (Intr. p. lii.), and the παρονομασία in φιλοκαλοῦμεν, φιλοσοφοῦμεν. ἄνευ μαλακίας — Demosth. 3, 24 and 25 has a passage probably suggested by this, in which he contrasts the magnificence of the public buildings with the simplicity of the private life in former times. Pericles refers to the Spartan idea, that learning was unsuited to men of action. The idea is not confined to Sparta.

πλούτῳ —‘we employ our wealth as means for action, not as a subject for boasting.’ Cf. c. 41, 2.

τὸ πένεσθαι —put First, because emphatic. ‘To admit poverty is no disgrace.’ Cf. c. 37, 1. There were penalties for idleness at Athens.

αἴσχιον —another γνώμη in the form of an antithesis. Cf. c. 11, 5, and 2, 3 and 4 below. The comparative implies ‘even if poverty were disgraceful (as some say).’ Plat. Apol. p. 39 A μὴ ού τοῦτ’ ἦ? χαλεπόν, θάνατον ἐκφυγεῖν, ἀλλὰ πολὺ χαλεπώτερον πονηρίαν: the first member must be negative in this idiom, in which opposition is mixed with comparison. Cf. οὐδὲν ἄλλο ... ἀλλ’ ἢ in Plato.

Τοῖς αὐτοῖς —sc. ἡμῖν, all the citizens being meant. ‘In attending to our private business, we do not neglect the state.’ It was Pericles' object to induce all the citizens to take part in politics.

ἕτερα πρὸς ἔργα — i.e. trade, manufacture and agriculture.

τετραμμένοις —c. 25, 2.

ἀπράγμονα —to many, πράγματα were tiresome. Cf. c. 64, 4, and Intr. p. lxxii.

αὐτοὶ —‘we in person,’ the citizens in the ecclesia, as contrasted with the Spartan government, which was almost entirely in the hands of the Ephors and Gerusia.

ἤτοι κρίνομέν γε —in Thuc., the more certain, but less important alternative is put first when these particles are used. But this does not seem to be the case in other authors. ‘At any rate we are sound judges, if we cannot originate.’ This contains an encouragement to the citizens to exercise their right of voting in the ecclesia, since they were capable of pronouncing an opinion on any policy proposed to them: but there are cases in which the citizens conspicuously erred in their judgment. Here, as in other parts, Pericles states his ideal of the constitution.

ἐνθυμούμεθα —of the statesmen.

τοὺς λόγους —alluding to the ‘laconic’ brevity of the Spartans.

ἀλλὰ μὴ — i.e. μᾶλλον βλάβην ἡγούμενοι μὴ προδιδαχθῆναι; the compar. as in 1 above.

προδιδαχθῆναι —by the orators, to whom, in after years, the people became accustomed to look for political guidance.

πρότερον ἢ —for πρότερον ... πρίν, a very rare construction except in Herod., Thuc., and Antiphon. Cf. c. 65, 12.

ἢ ἐπὶ ἃ δεῖ ἔργῳ ἐλθεῖν — i.e. ἣ ἐργῷ ἐλθεῖν ἐπὶ ἃ δεῖ ( ἔργῳ ἐλθεῖν). Cf. Plat. Phaedo, p. 114 B οἳ ἂν δόξωσι διαφερόντως πρὸς τὸ ὁσίως βιῶναι, i.e. οἳ ἂν δόξωσι διαφερόντως βιῶναι πρὸς τὸ ὁσίως ( βιῶναι), where, though Stallbaum's quotations are irrevelant, his explanation is right, in spite of Archer-Hind's objection. The verb really belongs to the 1st member, and is ‘understood’ with the 2nd.

ἐπὶ ... ἐλθεῖν —cf. ἐπεξελθεῖν of actions) ( διεξελθεῖν of words.

Ὥστε —explains what precedes, as though it were ὅτι τολμῶμεν. ἐπιχειρήσομεν—‘mean to undertake.’

ἐκλογίζεσθαι —sc. μάλιστα, ‘give the fullest consideration.’

ὃ — adverbial accus. ‘on the contrary.’ Cf. quod before si. (This is the old explanation, that of Hudson; but it was generally abandoned in favour of the view that ὃ is nom., and to be explained by anacoluthon. The edd. of the last decade have returned to the old view, especially since 1883—Schneider in N. Jahrb. '83, p. 457.) Cf. τὸ δέ. It refers to the whole of the preceding sentence.

ψυχὴν —only here in Thuc.= ‘spirit’; elsewhere ‘life.’ Cl. compares εὔψυχος. οἱ κ.τ.λ. —this defines courage, as distinct from θράσος. Aristotle ( Eth. II. 2, 7 ) places the virtue ἀνδρεία midway between the vices δειλία and θράσος. Cf. Plat. Protag. 351 A, Aristot. Eth. III. 7, 11 fol.

δεινὰ —of the hardships of war.

ήδέα —of the pleasures of peace.

σαφέστατα —courage is one of the four cardinal virtues (justice, temperance, wisdom, and courage). Socrates held that courage consists, not only in being used to danger, but also in the knowledge of good and evil.

μὴ ἀποτρεπόμενοι —this sums up the preceding sections, in which the statement φιλοσοφοῦμεν ἄνευ μαλακίας has been expanded. διὰ ταῦτα= ὅμως.

Ἀρετὴν —in its restricted sense, as Aristot. Rhet. I. 9, 4,=the power of doing good; not in the general sense of the Ethics (= perfection of man and of his functions).

ἐνηντιώμεθα —the perf. denotes ‘we have always been unlike,’ a regular use of the perf. In Aristoph. Av. 385 the MSS. give ἠναντιώμεθα against the metre.

δρῶντες —cf. Pliny, Ep. III. 4, 6 conservandum veteris officii meritum novo videbatur.

τοὺς —‘our.’

βεβαιότερος —‘a firmer friend,’ cf. Aristot. Eth. IX. 7, 2 οἱ εὖ πεποιηκότες φιλοῦσι καὶ ἀγαπῶσι τοὺς εὖ πεπονθότας. ὸ δράσας κ.τ.λ.— i.e. ὁ δράσας τὴν χάριν ἐστι βεβαιότερος ὥστε σῴζειν τὴν χάριν ὀφειλομένην δῑ εὐνοίας ἐκείνου ᾧ δέδωκε τὴν χάριν. Here, as often, ὥστε is inserted where the simple infin. might have been used. Cf. c. 2, 4; Plat. Protag. p. 338 C ἀδύνατον ὥστε σοφώτερόν τιν’ ἑλέσθαι. τὴν χάριν—regarded from the side of both giver and recipient, thus combining the meanings ‘favour’ and ‘gratitude,’ as with gratia.

ὀφειλομένην — ‘as due to him’ ( i.e. to the giver). ὀφειλομένην and σῴζειν are connected, being properly used of property given in trust to another's keeping. Plat. Rep. I. p. 332 A compared with ib. p. 333 C.

δῑ εὐνοίας —‘by (the continuation of) his goodwill towards him to whom he showed the kindness.’

δέδωκε —as in Acts, 20, 35 μακάριόν ἐστι μᾶλλον διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν. Livy, XXII. 13 sub fin., Sallust. Cat. 6 , 5

σῴζειν —as this means ‘to retain the good-will or gratitude of his friends whom he has benefited,’ the middle might be expected: but the object of the act. is to represent the result of the benefit, not on the mind of the doer but on the mind of the recipient; the doer is said to ‘keep safe’ what the recipient ‘keeps safe’ for him, viz. τὴν χάριν. ἀμβλύτερος—‘more indifferent.’ Is it not true?

ἐς —‘as a.’ Cf. Andoc. II. 23 εἰς χρήματα μεγάλας δωρέας. χάριν—free service which will win him gratitude. χάρις, a free gift, is contrasted with ὀφείλημα, a loan, and so a debt.

τῆς ἐλευθερίας τῷ πιστῷ — ‘the confidence due to our liberal ideas.’ Cf. c. 37, 2 ἐλευθέρως. (Not ‘liberality.’)

ἀδεῶς —‘without fear,’ lest, by helping others, we should be injuring ourselves.

Τε —sums up the preceding remarks.

παίδευσιν — not ‘school,’ but ‘liberal education.’ Pericles represents Athens as the Ἑλλάδος Ἑλλάς. Cf. Plat. Protag. 337 D Athens τῆς σοφίας πρυτανεῖον. Isocr. 15, 295 Athens πάντων τῶν δυναμένων λέγειν ἢ παιδεύειν δοκεῖ γεγενῆσθαι διδάσκαλος. Plat. Laws 641 E all Greeks consider Athens φιλόλογός τε καὶ πολύλογος. καθ’ ἕκαστον—Athens as the sum of all the citizens ( τὴν πᾶσαν), with a perfect πολιτεία, is contrasted with the individuals, with their perfect τρόποι. See c. 37, 1.

δοκεῖν ἄν —this ἄν, like the other two, belongs to παρέχεσθαι. παρ’ ἡμῶν—this refers to παίδευσιν, and represents the excellence of the individual as proceeding from the spirit of the whole state.

ἐπὶ πλεῖστ’ ἂν εἴδη —‘to the most varied circumstances.’

μετὰ χαρίτων μάλιστα εὐτραπέλως — i.e. μάλιστα μετά τε χαρίτων καὶ εὐτραπέλως, ‘with the utmost grace and versatility.’ Probably Pericles had in mind the famous lines of Pindar, Pyth. I. 92 to end, μὴ δολωθῆ?ς εὐτραπέλοις κέρδεσσ’, κ.τ.λ., and wished to show that εὐτραπελία in the Athenian character was a virtue.

τὸ σῶμα —= ἑαυτόν .

Ἐν τῷ παρόντι κόμπος —‘passing boast.’

τάδε — see c. 42, 1.

δύναμις —see c. 36, 4.

σημαίνει —cf. Antiphon, Tetr. Γ. γ, 3 ὡς οὐδὲ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἠμύνατο αὐτόν, αὐτὸ τὸ ἔργον σημαίνει. See c. 15, 4.

Τῶν νῦν —sc. πόλεων. ἀκοῆς κρείσσων—‘superior to what men have heard of her.’

ἐς πεῖραν ἔρχεται —‘proves herself in the hour of trial.’

τῷ πολεμίῳ —collective. [

ἐπελθόντι ]—spurious, for (1) it destroys the balance to τῷ ὑπηκόῳ, (2) the sense requires that enemies in general should be referred to, not merely enemies who attack Athens; nor could Pericles mean that Athens never attacked anyone.

ἔχει —= παρέχει. Cf. c. 61, 2.

οἵων — i.e. φαύλων. οὐχ ὑπ’ ἀξίων —= ὑπ’ ἀναξίων, the neg. preceding the prep. as usual. Contrast c. 49, 3.

Σημείων —‘clear proofs,’ viz. in the results of Athenian activity. οὐ δή τοι—δὴ as in c. 40, 3, emphasizing οὐ ‘by no means,’ while τοι ‘assuredly’ also belongs to

οὐ. ἀμάρτυρον —‘without witnesses,’ since all contemporaries, and above all her enemies knew her greatness from her acts in every land and sea. The word has its forensic sense, as used of a plea supported only by the speaker's own testimony.

τοῖς τε νῦν —agent; this disappears in later Attic, except in the cases already noticed. See c. 7, 2.

καὶ —at the beginning of a parenthesis. See c. 2, 4.

Ὁμήρου — i.e. not needing a poet to exaggerate our history. Of course Thuc. did not object to Homer as a poet, but only as a historian.

ὅστις — i.e. ποιητής. A similar change to a relative clause is not uncommon in Isocrates; e.g. 5, 153 τοὺς μὴ μόνον κεχαρισμένως διειλεγμένους, ἀλλ’ οἵτινες ἂν οὕτω ποιήσωσι τὰς σὰς πράξεις θαυμάζειν ὡς οὐδενὸς ἄλλου. (The view that Pericles is intended to reprove Homer for saying so little of the ‘sons of Theseus’ is quite untenable.)

ἔπεσι —‘poetry.’

τὸ αὐτίκα —‘for the moment.’ Cf. I. 21 οὔτε ὡς ποιηταὶ ὑμνήκασι πιστεύων, οὔτε ὡς λογογράφοι ξυνέθεσαν ἐπὶ τὸ προσαγωγότερον τῆ? ἀκροάσει ἢ ἀληθέστερον. The mythical element in early Greek history was due to the influence of epic. See Intr. C. III. init.

τῶν δὲ ἔργων —the influence of the rel. is here lost, on the principle of c. 4, 5, 34, 5. The μὲν aud δὲ are paratactic. The gen. belongs equally to ὑπόνοιαν and ἀλήθεια. ὑπόνοιαν—‘the conception of the facts,’ aroused by poetry. So ὑπονοεῖν ‘to conjecture.’

ἡ ἀλήθεια — i.e. the knowledge gained from investigation of the facts.

ἀλλὰ —antithesis to οὐ ... παρασχόμενοι. καλῶν τε κἀγαθῶν —the MSS. κακῶν is explained to mean ‘of the harm and of the good we have done.’ For κακῶν cf. κακοπαθεῖ above. But Pericles is talking of Atheniau prowess, not contrasting the harm done to her enemies with the benefits conferred on her friends: nor is ἀγαθὰ ‘benefits’ here, but ‘acts of valour,’ which of course inflict harm on enemies. Nor is the reference to the Greek estimate of εὐτυχία, as a compound of good and ill, for which see c. 44, 1: for Pericles is here dealing not with τύχη, but with Athenian γνώμη. The substitution of κακῶν for καλῶν in this phrase, even if it made sense, would be a miserable joke.

ξυγκατοικίσαντες — i.e. while opening the whole world to our prowess, we have at the same time everywhere established monuments of that prowess, in colonies and states made subject to us, and in the scenes of many brave actions.

Περὶ —c. 39, 2.

τοιαύτης —this word sums up the whole of the ἔπαινος A, and prepares the way for ἔπαινος B.

δικαιοῦν —an Ionic and old Attic word, used once by Plato, Laws, p. 934 A. Its usual sense is that of ἀξιοῦν, but sometimes it = ‘to punish.’

οἵδε .. μὴ ἀφαιρεθῆναι αὐτὴν —the clue to the construction is οὐκ ἀφαιροῦμαι τούσδε τὴν πόλιν. τῶν λειπομένων —c. 2, 4.

εἰκὸς —c. 10, 1.

ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς — repeats περὶ ... πόλεως. κάμνειν—an exhortation to persevere in spite of the hardships of the war.

Διὸ δὴ καὶ —‘this is the very reason why.’

τῆς πόλεως —in preference to τῶν ἀνδρῶν, (1) to encourage his listeners (2) because the clearest proof of the greatness of the Atbenians was the greatness of Athens herself.

περὶ ἴσου —‘for an equal prize.’ Kr. quotes Dem. 8, 60 οὐχ ὑπὲρ τῶν ἴσων ὑμῖν τε καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἔσθ’ ὁ κίνδυνος. ( κινδυνεύειν, ἀγωνίζεσθαι and so forth, with περί, ὑπέρ or ἕνεκα are common in the orators. In Andoc. I. 10 εἰς τὸν ἀγῶνα τόνδε κατέστην, περὶ τῶν μυστηρίων ὡς οὔτε μοι ἠσέβηται, the comma should be placed after μυστηρίων .)

τῶνδε —referring to what precedes. In speeches ὅδε is fairly often used thus of οὗτος. Cf. 40, 2, 60, 6, 63, 2, 71, 3, 72, 1, 3. The meaning was aided by gesture and emphasis, so that the use is akin to the deictic ὅδε. The phrase οὔτως εἶχεν frequently refers to what follows in the orators. Antiphon 6, 9 and 14, Isocr. 4, 163 .

μηδὲν —hypothetical rel., so that every nation is included, though Pericles has Sparta in his mind.

ὁμοίως —this, like μηδέν, softens the expression and makes it vaguer. It also increases the force of the exhortation κἀμνειν ὑπὲρ τῆς πόλεως, by increasing the number of states with which Athens is contrasted.

ἐφ’ οἷς —for τούτων ἐφ’ οἷς. Cf. c. 34, 6.

σημείοις —approaches very near the sense of παραδείγμασι: the manifest proofs are the acts in which the fallen had a share.

Καὶ —‘and in fact.’

ὕμνησα —originally of poetic praise, then of a panegyric in prose. Plat. Repub. 364 A.

αἱ τῶνδε —sc. ταῦτα, their deeds justify my words; for ‘they added fresh lustre to the glories which I praised in our city’: therefore, in speaking the praises of the city, I was praising them. The sense is τὰ τῆς πόλεως ἃ ὕμνησα, ταῦτα ἐκεῖνοι ἐκόσμησαν ταῖς ἀρεταῖς. L. and S. wrongly supply τὴν πόλιν, with several edd., to ἐκόσμησαν. ἀρεταὶ—‘valiant deeds.’

οὐκ ἂν —the whole result of this sentence is positive, but the idiom by which the verb after οὐχ ὥσπερ agrees with the thing in the simile and not the thing compared, has nothing to do with this passage. ( Plat. Gorg. 522 A ἀπορεῖν ποιεῖ, οὐχ ὥσπερ ἐγὼ ηὐώχουν ὑμᾶς .)

πολλοῖς —ethic dat., and equivalent here to πολλῶν, but preferred because of the gen. following. ‘There are few Greeks of whom it could be said that tbe report of their deeds does not do more than balance the reality.’

τῶνδε —depends on λόγος. τῷ ἔργῳ —= τῶν ἔργων τῆ? ἀληθείᾳ c. 41, 4.

ἀνδρὸς ἀρετὴν —‘virtue in a man.’

πρώτη τε —= εἴτε πρώτη μηνύει εἴτε τελευταία βεβαιοῖ. For some, especially the younger men, their death was the first μηνυτὴς of the worth which they had not had a previous chance of showing; for others it was but the final confirmation of what had been amply proved before.

καταστροφή — Soph. O. C. 103: meiosis for death.

Τοῖς τἆλλα χείροσι —not referring to any among the dead, but purely hypothetical, and intending to lead to a conclusion a fortiori. If men who have often proved themselves base can by one act rehabilitate themselves, how much more are these men noble who never in any case sbrank from danger? The dat. depends on δίκαιόν ( ἐστι ).

προτίθεσθαι — = προτιμᾶσθαι (see 4 below), pass. They may have preferred wealth and ease to serving their country: in estimating them, we must prefer their one great sacrifice.

ἀφανίσαντες —so that not the least trace of their failings remains.

ὠφέλησαν —the aor. are gnomic.

ἐκ τῶν ἰδιῶν —‘through their private life.’ Pericles is thinking of the indifference to state affairs against which he warns his hearers. See Intr. p. lxxiii.

Τὴν ἔτι —‘the continued enjoyment’ of wealth.

πενίας ἐλπίδι, ὡς .. αὐτὴν —= οὔτε ἐλπίδι, ὡς διαφυγὼν τὴν πενίαν κἂν ἔτι πλουτήσειεν. But πενίας is attracted to ἐλπίδι because of the antithesis to πλούτῳ. ἔτι—some day, as in prophecies and threats.

πλουτήσειεν —ingressive.

ἀναβολὴν ἐποίησατο —these periphrases will be found collected in the index, s.v. ποιεῖσθαι. ποθεινοτέραν—a strong word used of things that are desirable. ποθεῖν is the regular word in oratory to describe the supposed anxiety of tbe hearers to have information on any point. Antiph. 5, 64 ; Andoc. 1, 70 ; Lys. 14. 1; Isocr. 12, 167 ; 15, 43; Isaeus 11, 19; Dem. 4, 28 ; 21, 77; 50, 43; Aeschin. 2, 7 and 44.

αὐτῶν —again a loose reference to what has been described, here = πλούτου ὴ ἔτι ἀπόλαυσις and τὸ ἔτι πλουτῆσαι. λαβόντες —= ὑπολαβόντες, as ‘I take it’ is used by us for ‘I suppose.’ Often in Thuc.

μετ’ αὐτοῦ —sc. τοῦ κινδύνου. It goes with ἐφίεσθαι also.

τῶν δὲ — viz. the enjoyment and the hope: ‘to face this danger in exacting vengeance before tbey indulged in these hopes.’ The chief emphasis is on μετ’ αὐτοῦ. (Only Bh., Kraz and Ste. among recent edd. retain ἐφίεσθαι ).

ἐλπίδι μὲν —the construction differs from that of ἔργῳ, which is adverbial.

τοῦ κατορθώσειν —the fut. is due to the prominence of tbe idea of futurity here. Cf. c. 13, 9. The infin. approximates in these cases to its use in Oratio Obliqua, in that the writer allows the thought of the person to whom he refers to influence the tense ( ἀφανές ἐστιν εἰ κατορθώσομεν). It is characteristic of Thuc. to present an action as it was regarded by the actors themselves. M. T. 113.

ἔργῳ —‘but in the task actually before them at the moment, tbey resolved to trust to themselves’: i.e. the future must be left to τύχη (Providence); the present required γνώμη. ἐν αὐτῷ—what can this be but the act just described, i.e. ἐν τῷ ... σφίσιν αὐτοῖς πεποιθέναι? The sense is ‘in carrying out their resolution,’ i.e. in the struggle itself.

τὸ ἀμύνεσθαι καὶ παθεῖν —cf. Isocr. 2, 36 ἢν δ’ ἀναγκασθῆ?ς κινδυνεύειν, αἱροῦ τεθνάναι καλῶς μᾶλλον ἢ ζῆν αἰσχρῶς. 4, 95 τοῖς καλοῖς κἀγαθοῖς αἱρετώτερόν ἐστι καλῶς ἀποθανεῖν ἢ ζῆν αἰσχρῶς. Intr. p. xl.

τὸ αἰσχρὸν τοῦ λόγου — i.e. τὸ ὀνειδίζεσθαι ὡς δειλοί (Schol.).

ἔφυγον —antithesis to ὑπέμειναν, as very often, e.g. Lys. 13, 27 and 63.

τὸ ἔργον —= τὸν κίνδυνον. δῑ ἐλαχίστου καιροῦ τύχης —human γνώμη is often crossed by divine τύχη, and in this case was so modified that their highest hopes were not realised. The edd. quote Horace Sat. I. 1, 7 horae momento cita mors venit aut victoria laeta, but horae momento denotes a far greater length of time, and does not take in τύχης. But this sentence, the close of the ἔπαινος τῶν ἀποθανόντων, in its intense solemnity, resembles ( mutatis mutandis) the words of St. Paul (1 Cor. 15, 52 , 54) ‘We shall all be changed in a moment, in the twinkling of an eye. ... O grave, wbere is thy victory? O death, where is thy sting?’ So here Pericles refers to the rapidity and sud denness with which τύχη acts. Hence ‘in a moment ordained by Fate, at the crisis not of fear but of glory—they passed.’ (Behrendt rightly objects to Steup's proposal.)

ἀπηλλάγησαν —absolute, a poetical use. Dr. Kennedy ( Cam. Phil. Proceedings 1882, p. 20 fol.) well says that the speaker's voice ‘sinks to the sad and solemn cadence of ἀπηλλάγησαν.’ Supply τοῦ βίου .

Καὶ —‘and thus.’ Here the πίστις B is summed up, preparatory to passing on to the προτροπή (exhortation).

προσηκόντως τῇ πόλει —‘in a manner worthy of Athens.’

τοὺς λοιποὺς —= τοὺς λειπομένους of 41, 5.

ἀσφαλεστέραν — sc. διάνοιαν, though they should pray for a spirit less fatal (in its results). This again shows that τύχη had, in Pericles' view, to some extent crossed the purpose of the fallen.

εὔσεσθαι —for ἀσφάλεια is the gift of God alone. Cf. c. 87, 3. εὐτολμία depends on human resolution.

λόγῳ — i.e. from the words of the orator.

ὠφελίαν —explained in ὅσα ... ἀγαθὰ ἔνεστιν. (On the orthography, Herodian remarks ὠφέλεια· ποιητικώτερον διὰ τὸ ι— καὶ παροξύνεται .)

ἣν —with μηκύνοι. Cf. c. 42, 1.

πρὸς — coram, with a verb of speaking. See c. 5, 7. Cf. III. 53, 4 πρὸς εἰδότας πάντα λελέξεται. καθ’ ἡμέραν—this daily contemplation of the greatness of Athens will lead to a lasting love for her: and that love should be an incentive to noble actions.

τολμῶντες —‘by courage, by knowing what was their duty, and by their sense of honour in the hour of conflict.’

αὐτὰ — i.e. τὴν δύναμιν, but expressing the details of the power. Cf. c. 1. οὖν—‘on that account.’

κάλλιστον —because, while they contributed to the advancement of the state, they obtained a splendid return.

ἔρανον —‘contribution’; both the association and the money subscribed to it were termed ἔρανος, which denotes combination for financial purposes of whatever kind. The object is τὴν ἀρετήν, κ. ἔρανον being predicate.

προιέμενοι —stronger than the ordinary ἔρανον ἐσφέρειν, and used because it is the regular word for sacrificing anything for the state; e.g. Lysias 21, 12 ὑμῖν οὐδὲν προεῖνται τῶν σφετέρων αὐτῶν .

Κοινῇ ... ἰδίᾳ —the antithesis is as obvious as it is forcible. They gave their lives for the common good; they gained for themselves undying fame.

γὰρ —Pericles refers to the distribution of profits made by a financial ἔρανος. (All this is quite clear when Andoc. I. 133-135 is compared: he speaks of the members of an ἔρανος got up by Agyrrhius to farm the tax on imports and exports; the object of the business-men who joined it was διανείμασθαι τὰ κοινά.)

τὸν ἀγήρων ἔπαινον —the praise (which rewards good deeds).

ἐλάμβανον —the tense represents the result of the act ( διδόντες) as growing out of the act itself, as in Lat. ita vitas dederunt ut acciperent, contrasted with ita vitas dederunt ut acceperint.

ἐπισημότατον —the pred. serves to connect the adj. with the rel. clause which follows.

οὐκ ... μᾶλλον, ἀλλ’ —cf. c. 40, 1; 44, 4; ἀλλὰ for ἢ (only after a neg.) gives greater emphasis to the second clause.

παρὰ τῷ ἐντυχόντι ... καιρῷ —a curious expression, since παρὰ with dat. is confined to persons; ‘on every fitting occasion, whether by word or deed.’ This construction is only found when the thing is almost personified; here αἰείμνηστος παρὰ καιρῷ λόγου implies persons: in c. 89, 9 and VIII. 95, 4 Thuc. writes παρὰ ταῖς ναυσὶν εἶναι, in v. 26, 5 γενομένῳ παρ’ ἀμφοτέροις τοῖς πράγμασι. There is only one case in the orators, viz. Andoc. I. 116 ὴ στήλη παρ’ ᾗ ἕστηκας κελεύει .

Σημαίνει —c. 8, 3. Cf. v. 20, 2 ἐς τὰ προγεγενημένα σημαίνει. ἄγραφος μνήμη—cf. c. 38, 3, which shows that by τῆς γνώμης κ.τ.λ. is meant ‘engraved on the heart rather than in material records.’ The difficulty is to explain the art. with ἔργου; it is due to στηλῶν above, the records having been referred to in that word. As the memory is carried in men's hearts, it is confined to no particular country.

Τὸ εὔδαιμον ... τὸ δὲ ἐλεύθερον —predicates, the art. being added because the adj. is used as a noun.

μὴ περιορᾶσθε —‘do not be too anxious about the dangers of war’; the advice is the result of the doctrine ‘happiness is attained by courage,—by retaining a cheerful spirit in peril,’ which cheerfulness Pericles claims to be characteristic of the Athenians as the result of their free institutions ( 39, 4), and now urges them to retain in the war.

Οὐ γὰρ —a paradox: misery is identical with cowardice, since cowardice must involve misery. Therefore those who are prosperous must avoid cowardice ( i.e. be ready to sacrifice their lives), whereas to those who are already miserable cowardice involves no addition to their misery. This decides the meaning of περιορᾶσθε above.

ἡ ἐναντία μεταβολὴ —‘the change from good to bad fortune.’

κινδυνεύεται —c. 35, 1.

ἐν οἷς —‘in whose case.’

μάλιστα — ‘in comparison with others,’ as often. Cf. c. 49, 1, and μᾶλλον ἑτέρων. τὰ διαφέροντα—‘the difference.’

Μετὰ τοῦ —cf. I. 6, 5; VI. 65, 1. ‘Cowardice and disgrace together.’

κάκωσις —= ἡ ἐναντία μεταβολὴ above, according to the doctrine that cowardice is misery, and therefore to the prosperous involves degradation: κάκωσις· ταπείνωσις Hesych.

μετὰ ῥώμης —‘when he is fired by courage and the general hope,’ viz. that his side will win.

ἀναίσθητος — ‘painless.’

Διόπερ —‘This is the reason why,’ viz. because in their death they were εὐδαίμονες, or, as he says presently, εὐτυχεῖς. νῦν—belongs to τῶνδε= τῶν νῦν θαπτομένων, and inserted because since the γνώμη with which 43, 3 opened, Pericles had been generalising.

τοκέας —poetical, for γονέας. πάρεστε —contrast ἐπίστανται below: cf. c. 11, 1. It is clear that the Greek orators interchanged direct address and reflection more rapidly than we can do.

πολυτρόποις —of experiences as varied as those of Odysseus.

τὸ δ’ εὐτυχὲς —sc. ἐστίν; here follows a remarkable definition of εὐτυχία. Intr. p. xl. fol.

οἳ ἂν —cf. c. 62, 4.

τῆς εὐπρεπεστάτης —belongs both to τελευτῆς and λύπης. ‘This is good fortune, to have gained an honourable death, like theirs, or an honourable grief, like yours.’ With ὑμεῖς supply ὥσπερ. καὶ οἷς—the change from οἳ ἂν shows that Pericles is not now speaking generally, but referring to the fallen particularly, so that οἷς ... ξυνεμετρήθη= οἷς ἂν ὥσπερ τοῖσδε ξυμμετρηθῇ. ἐνευδαιμονῆσαι —= εὐδαιμονῆσαι ἐν αὐτῷ ( i.e. τῷ βίῳ). Infin. of purpose. Intr. p. xli.

ἐνταλαιπωρῆσαι —‘whose life has been meted out to prosper in and to suffer in alike,’ i.e. ‘they may be deemed happy in whose life prosperity and adversity are equally balanced.’ A philosophical definition of human εὐτυχία, for which cf. Pindar, Pyth. 7, 20 φαντί γε μὰν οὕτω κεν ἀνδρὶ παρμονίμαν θάλλουσαν εὐδαιμονίαν τὰ καὶ τὰ φέρεσθαι: that man, says Pericles, is happy who has τὰ καὶ τὰ in equal proportions. ( Alii alia, says Herw.: those who do not like this explanation will find others elsewhere. Sta. reads ἐντελευτῆσαι {ἡ εὐδαιμονία} ξυν.)

Μὴ} ποθεῖν ... ὑπομνήματα —cf. the Funeral Oration attributed to Demosth. 16 ὥσπερ ἴχνη γνωρίζουσα νῦν ἡ τῶν οἰκείων αὐτοῖς καὶ φίλων μνήμη πᾶσαν ὥραν ἐπὶ τούτους φέρεται τῷ πόθῳ, πόλλ’ ὑπομνήματα λαμβάνουσα. Plat. Rep. I. p. 329 A τὰς ἐν τῆ? νεότητι ἡδονὰς ποθοῦντες καὶ ἀναμιμνῃσκόμενοι. Add Andoc. I. 70 εἴ τίς τι ὑμῶν ποθεῖ. ἀναστὰς ὑπομνησάτω (if A desiderat aliquid which B is able and willing to give to him, A naturally reminds B of it; conversely, if D has something, which C has lost, and cannot give it to C, but cannot help reminding C of it, D naturally feels desiderium, πόθος).

ὧν — = αὐτοὺς ὧν. καὶ πολλάκις—‘only too often.’

εὐτυχίαις — related to εὐτυχία or τὸ εὐτυχές as τύχαι or τὰ τῆς τύχης to τύχη, i.e. the plur. denotes instances of good luck rather than good luck in the abstract. This refers back to τὸ εὐτυχὲς above: for, though a man cannot be judged prosperous till after his death, still instances of good luck may of course occur in life, and if these are as frequent as the misfortunes of life, the whole result will be τὸ εὐτυχές. Cf. Soph. frag. οὐ χρή ποτ’ εὖ πράσσοντος ὀλβίσαι τύχας | ἀνδρός, πρὶν αὐτῷ παντελῶς ἤδη βίος | διεκπερανθῇ καὶ τελευτήσῃ βίον. Pericles refers especially to the noble deeds of sons who will thus bring joy to their parents. Cf. 43, 4.

αἷς —cf. Isocr. 14, 47 ἢν ὡς εὖ πράττοντας ἔλθωμεν, ἔτι χαλεπώτερον ἔχομεν, οὐ ταῖς ἐκείνων φθονοῦντες εὐπορίαις ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον ἐν τοῖς τῶν πέλας ἀγαθοῖς τὰς ἡμετέρας αὐτῶν συμφορὰς καθορῶντες. λύπη —sc. ἐστίν, ‘a man feels sorrow, not for the want of blessings which he loses before he knows them.’ ὧν is governed by both partic. and verb.

πειρασάμενος —c. 5, 5.

οὗ ἂν —a conspicuous instance of the rule referred to on c. 13, 2; the gen. depends on ἐθάς, while ἀφαιρεθῇ would take accus. The change from ὧν to οὗ is another instance of irregularity in the form of rel. clauses.

ἐθας —synonym of ἠθἀς, Soph. El. 372 ; both forms appear in the ancient lexica: probably ἐθὰς does not occur elsewhere in Attic prose.

Καρτερεῖν —(sometimes joined with ὑπομένειν). See c. 61, 2.

τέκνωσιν π —= παιδοποιεῖσθαι. τῶν οὐκ ὄντων —= τῶν τεθνηκότων. λήθη—‘cause of forgetfulness.’

ἔκ τε .. καὶ ἀσφαλείᾳ —these give the two grounds referred to in διχόθεν; for the variety of construction, cf. c. 36, 4; I. 138, 2, μὴ ἐρημοῦσθαι, by means of the soldiers and citizens she would acquire; ἀσφαλείᾳ, by the increased anxiety of the parents to benefit the state, as explained in the next sentence.

ξυνοίσει —sc. τὸ παῖδας ἐπιγίγνεσθαι. Cf. c. 3, 3.

ἴσον τι ἢ δίκαιον —equal, in the sense of ‘democratic,’ conforming to the equality that characterises the Athenian polity; cf. c. 37, 1: just, in the sense of ‘regular’ or ‘sober,’ in accordance with a sane judgment of religion and politics.

ἐκ τοῦ ὁμοίου —= ὁμοίως, equally with otbers. Adverbial phrases with ἐκ and an adj. are common in Thuc., who has ἐκ τοῦ προφανοῦς, ἐκ τοῦ φανεροῦ, ἐκ τοῦ εὐθέος, ἐκ τοῦ εἰκότος, ἐκ τοῦ εὐπρεποῦς, ἐκ τοῦ αἰσχίονος, ἐκ τοῦ δικαίου, ἐξ ἴσου, and others. This one occurs also I. 143, 4, and elsewhere. One or two of these phrases were colloquial, as ἐξ ἴσου, ἐξ ἑνὸς ( τρόπου or λόγου ), ἐκ παντὸς ( τρόπου) (these are the only ones found in Aristoph.); the rest are formed on the analogy of such simple phrases. The orators use them, but only with common adjectives: Thuc. confines them to speeches and highly-wrought passages. The 8th book contains only three examples.

παραβαλλόμενοι — discrimini objicientes: a dictionary may here be useful to some. To have children in peril would constitute having a stake in the state.

Παρηβήκατε —antithesis to οἷς ἔτι ἡλικία. κέρδος— predicate, in an unexpected place, and so emphatic.

τόνδε —‘your present life,’ i e. your sorrow will be short-lived, because your lives are drawing to a close.

τὸ φιλότιμον — ‘love of honour,’ which would be gratified in their case, as they would be honoured on account of their children's fame.

ἐν τῷ ἀχρείῳ τῆς ἡλικίας —cf. c. 40, 2, = ἐν τῷ γήρᾳ. τὸ κερδαίνειν ... τὸ τιμᾶσθαι—a true description of the ‘last infirmity’ of base and noble minds respectively.

ἀλλὰ —c. 40, 1, 43, 2.

Μέγαν τὸν ἀγῶνα —‘the struggle to emulate them will be a difficult one.’ The partic. is omitted after ὁρῶ. Cf. c. 49, 5. [

τὸν γὰρ .. ἐπαινεῖν ]— the general statement, παισὶ δ’ αὖ, is continued and explained in καὶ μὁλις ἂν ... κριθεῖτε. Then follows the reason in φθόνος γὰρ κ.τ.λ. καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ἀρετῆς—‘by pre-eminent virtue.’ For κατά cf. c. 27, 2.

ἀλλ’ —would more naturally be ἀλλὰ καί. φθόνος—cf. Demosth 18, 315 τίς γὰρ οὐκ οἶδεν, ὅτι τοῖς μὲν ζῶσι πᾶσιν ὕπεστί τις ἢ πλείων ἢ ἐλάττων φθόνος, τοὺς τεθνεῶτας δ’ οὑδὲ τῶν ἐχθρῶν τις μισεῖ; τοῖς ζῶσι πρὸς τὸ ἀντίπαλον—‘envy towards a rival attacks the living.’

πρὸς — adversus (so Grundstrom and Golisch: Sta. propter ).

τὸ ἀντίπαλον — for τοὺς ἀντιπάλους. τὸ μὴ ἐμποδὼν —= τὸ μηκέτ’ ἐμποδών. Cf. τῶν οὐκ ὄντων c. 44, 3. This is the antithesis to τοῖς ζῶσι, while ἀνανταγωνίστῳ εὐνοίᾳ corresponds to πρὸς τὸ ἀντίπαλον, and τετίμηται to φθόνος. ἀνανταγωνίστῳ—‘without opposition.’

τετίμηται —gnomic perf., according to Goodwin; but may be the Homeric use of this word, with pres. sense.

Ὅσαι —as if γυναικῶν instead of γυναικείας preceded.

ἔσονται —contrast πάρεστε above. Cf. c. 44, 1.

ὑπαρχούσης —by no means attributing weakness, but referring to the restraints and household duties which nature imposed on women. Pericles refers to the Spartan women, who, according to Aristotle, lived a very different life from the stern asceticism of the Spartan men.

καὶ ἧς — i.e. καὶ μεγάλη ἐστιν ὴ δόξα ταύτης ἧς. μεγάλη ἡ δόξα —cf. VII. 68 τὸ τούσδε κολασθῆναι ... καλὸς ὁ ἀγών. κλέος—‘talk,’ a neutral word. Cf. Aesch. Ag. 611 , Clyt. says οὐκ οἶδα τέρψιν οὐδ’ ἐπίψογον φάτιν | ἄλλου πρὸς ἀνδρός.

Εἴρηται —the act. or pass perf. is often used thus in bringing a speech to a close (Lys 12, the case referred to by Aristotle at the close of the Rhet. is an example; so probably Eur. Hec. 236 . Cf. dixi.) Hence it is made prominent.

καὶ ἐμοὶ —Shil. rightly explains this as connected with καὶ ἔργῳ, the sense being καὶ λόγῳ ἐμοὶ εἴρηται καὶ ἔργῳ οἱ θ. κεκόσμηνται. ‘I have done my duty in delivery of the oration, the city has in deed partly done hers and is prepared to do more.’

κατὰ τὸν νόμον .. πρόσφορα —a modest description of what had been a metaphysical exposition of the relation of politics to character. Cf. Burke, Reflections, ‘I am unable to distinguish what I have learned from others from the results of my own meditation.’

αὐτῶν —cf. c. 27, 1. Its position gives it the force of a dat. of interest.

μέχρι ἥβης —to the age of eighteen.

θρέψει —of people) ( βόσκειν of cattle. βόσκειν is only used of people contemptuously, except by Herod., and Thuc., who uses the word once, VII. 48 ναυτικὸν πολὺ βόσκοντας: even there the notion of irksomeness comes in.

ὠφέλιμον —something more than a mere distinction.

τοῖσδε —the fallen, τοῖς λειπομένοις ‘the survivors,’ as in 41, 5.

ἀγώνων —with στέφανον, like τροπαῖον μάχης. προτιθεῖσα —‘offering.’

οἷς —in general relation to the whole, ‘among whom.’

τοῖς δὲ —cf. c. 65, 5, δὲ in apodosis.

)Απολοφυράμενοι —the ὀλόφυρσις was part of the regular ceremony, and took place at the conclusion of the speech. [Lys.] Epitaph. end, ἀνάγκη τοῖς ἀρχαίοις ἔθεσι χρῆσθαι, καὶ θεραπεύοντας τὸν πάτριον νόμον ὀλοφύρεσθαι τοὺς θαπτομένους. The Menex. ends thus, τοὺς τετελευτηκότας ἀπολοφυράμενοι ἄπιτε, and [Demosth.] Epitaph. ἀποδυράμενοι ... ἄπιτε. ‘When you have finished (probably aor., as Sta. says, not ἀπο‐, gives this force) your lamentation.’

προσήκει —sc. ἀπολοφυρεσθαι. ἀποχωρεῖτε—Intr. p. xxxii. There is no doubt about the reading because χωρεῖν was much less familiar to the copyists than ἰέναι, and the scholia sometimes explain the former by the latter.

Τοιόσδε —see c. 41, 2. Late authors make no dis- tinction between these pronouns.

τάφος —contrast the meaning in 34, 4.

ἐγένετο —pass. of ταφὰς ἐποιήσαντο, c. 34, 1.

πρῶτον —Thuc. never inserts the art. in these formulae.

Τὰ δύο μέρη — limiting apposition. The arrangements for the campaign are exactly the same as tbose of the pre ceding year, though the Spartans now knew that the Athenians would not offer battle. It is clear therefore that Sparta too saw that the only hope was to wear Athens out. Cf. Intr. p. lxx.

καθεζόμενοι —c. 18, 1.

Ἡ νόσος —‘the famous plague.’ The account (c. 47-54) falls into three parts, (i) its origin ( 47, 48), (ii) symptoms and effects on sufferers ( 49, 50), (iii) effects on morality ( 51, etc.). This description has been imitated by many writers, as Lucretius VI. 1138-1251 who is in turn imitated by Vergil, Georg. III, 478 and Ovid, Met. VII. 523), Procopius, Persica II, 22, who describes the plague at Constantinople in Justinian's reign, A.D. 542, and John Cantacuzene, Emperor of the Eastern Empire, who described very poorly the great plague of 1347 with which the plague of Florence described by Boccaccio and the ‘Black Death’ in England are connected. Superstitious horror, followed by demoralisation, is common to all great plagues.

πρῶτον ἤρξατο —cf. c. 36, 1, 48, 1.

γενέσθαι —the phrase occurs also I. 103 τὸ μῖσος ἤρξατο γενέσθαι, c. 68, 2, III. 18 ὁ χειμὼν ἤρχετο γίγνεσθαι , Isocr. 15, 82 ἤρχετο τὸ γένος τὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων γίγνεσθαι, Andoc. 2, 9 ἤρχετο γίγνεσθαι δυσδαιμονἐστερος. The tense of γίγνομαι must be the same as that of ἄρχομαι; yet ἤρξατο πρἀσσειν is good Greek, though ἤρχετο πρᾶξαι is not (the reason is that γίγνομαι is inceptive, while πράσσω is not, so that ἤρξατο γίγνεσθαι would be a contradiction in terms; thus ἤρξατο γιγνώσκειν would not do).

λεγόμενον —as though νόσημα had preceded.

ἐγκατασκῆψαι —Soph. O. T. 27 ἐν δ’ ὁ πυρφόρος θεός | σκήψας ἐλαύνει, λοιμὸς ἔχθιστος πάλιν. περὶ — circa: c. 7, 3.

οὕτως —with γενέσθαι. ἐμνημονεύετο — anacoluthon. as λεγόμενον μὲν preceded. (Observe that this is not a solecism.) Cf. c. 65, 11.

Τὸ πρῶτον —with θεραπεύοντες, ‘as they treated it at first with no knowledge of its nature.’

μάλιστα .. ὅσῳ καὶ μάλιστα — i.e. the mortality among them was greater than among any other class because they came in contact with the disease more than others. For the double superl. or compar. in proportion, cf. I. 68 προσήκει ἡμᾶς οὐχ ἥκιστα εἰπεῖν, ὁσῳ καὶ μέγιστα ἐγκλήματα ἔχομεν, III. 45 οὐχ ἧσσον τὰς πόλεις, ὅσῳ περὶ μεγίστων , V. 90 πρὸς ὑμῶν οὐχ ἧσσον τοῦτο, ὅσῳ καὶ ἐπὶ μεγίστῃ τιμωρίᾳ ἂν παράδειγμα γένοισθε. Cf. also c. 11, 1 καὶ ἐπὶ πόλιν δυνατωτάτην ... καὶ αὐτοὶ πλεῖστοι ἐρχόμεθα. πρὸς ἱεροῖς — ad loca sacra; cf. c. 87, 6, 94, 4.

ἱκέτευσαν —the aor. sums up all the instances ( complexive).

ἐχρήσαντο — sc. ὅσα, which with ἱκέτευσαν = ὅσας ἱκετείας, but with ἐχρήσαντο= περὶ ὅσα. See L. and S. χράω A. III.

τε —does not belong to the preceding τε, which added a third fact to οὔτε οὔτε, but=‘and so.’

ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ —cf. 51, 1; but contrast 60, 6 χρήμασι νικώμενος. The verbs which commonly have ὑπὸ with things in prose are such as νικῶμαι, βλάπτομαι, διαφθείρομαι, ἀναγκάζομαι, ἡττῶμαι, πείθομαι (Isaeus only has πείθομαι and διαφθείρομαι, Lysias only ἀναγκἀζομαι, ἐπαίρομαι, διἀκειμαι) and the things so used must be such as can be easily personified, such as (1) natural phenomena, as χειμών, σεισμός, ἄπλοια, (2) external circumstances, as κίνδυνος, συμφορά, πληγαί, δεσμοί, κέρδος, χρήματα, νόμος, (3) emotions, as ἡδον ή, φθόνος, (4) words which imply a person, as λόγοι, πράγματα, δύναμις, when the person is often inserted (as in ὑπὸ τῆς τοῦ ῥήτορος δενότητος), and all the topics of rhetoric as ὑπὸ τῶν εἰκότων, ὑπὸ τοῦ δικαίου. The construction is optional in these cases, as the following examples show: Aristoph. Av. 1438 πἀντες τοῖς λόγοις ἀναπτεροῦνται, ib. 1447 ὑπὸ λόγων ἐπαίρεται ; Isocr. 5, 40 τὰς πόλεις ὡμαλισμένας ὑπὸ τῶν συμφορῶν, 6, 65 ὡμαλισμένοι ταῖς συμφοραῖς.

Ἤρξατο —sc. τὸ κακόν. ὑπὲρ —beyond, i.e. further inland, ‘south of.’ So the plague in Justinian's reign was said to have come from Ethiopia and Egypt: the ‘Black Death’ was traced to the Levant.

τὴν πολλήν —limiting apposition.

Ἐν τῷ Πειραιεῖ —it was imported, as in the case of the plague under Justinian.

φάρμακα —so in Germany and England in 1349 the Jews were supposed to have poisoned the wells. The plague had broken out a few days after the Peloponnesians invaded Attica.

φρέατα —‘cisterns,’ for rainwater.

κρῆναι —see c. 15, 5.

οὔπω —probably the astronomer Meton suggested them in 414 B.C.

Ἀφ’ ὅτου —cf. 49, 2, 62, 4, 68, 2. Contrast the phrase ἐξ ὅτου=‘since which time.’

εἰκὸς ἦν —c. 10, 1.

τὰς αἰτίας — = τὰς αἰτίας τοσαύτης μεταβολῆς, ἅστινας υομίζει ἱκανὰς εἶναι. In the adscript, δύναμιν σχεῖν was meant to explain ἱκανὰς εἶναι, ἐς τὸ μεταστῆσαι to explain μεταβολῆς. (To the list of those who bracket here, which is given in the not. crit., add Hampke, Studien, p. 16).

ἀφ’ ὧν ... σκοπῶν —take ταῦτα below with ἀφ’ ὧν,=the symptoms, by which it might be recognised in future. Cf. I. 21, 2 ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων σκοποῦσι, III. 38, 4 ἀπὸ τῶν εὖ εἰπόντων σκοποῦντες. ἄν— belongs to ἔχοι, cf. c. 41, 1.

Ἔτος —Intr. p. xlii.

ὡμολογεῖτο ἐκ πάντων —the other places in Thuc. in which ἐκ = ὑπὸ are I. 20, 2; III. 69, 1; V. 104 ; VI. 36, 2. The use is not found in Aristoph., and there are but very faint and doubtful traces of it in the orators. This use is Ionic, but occurs now and then in Attic (though Shil. denies the use altogether). ὁμολογοῦμαι often has παρὰ instead of ὑπὸ ( Andoc. 1, 140 ; Lysias, 30, 12; Isaeus, 1, 38 and 42; 2, 16 and 40; 4. 15; 11, 10; Demosth. 34, 5 ; Dinarch. 1, 53 and 90; 3, 8), in Demosth. 29, 20 ὁμολογεῖσθαι has πρός; in Isaeus 5, 17 we have ἃ ὡμολογήθη ἡμῖν: so Plat Phaedo, p. 106 C.

προέκαμνε — viz. before the plague established itself. Contrast the opt. and imperf. in c. 51, 1, where Thuc. uses the indef. form because he speaks of a long period of time, whereas here he refers to a definite moment, viz. just before the plague broke out.

ἀπεκρίθη —‘determined in this,’ i.e. ‘the symptoms eventually assumed the character of the disease.’ All who were ailing before were attacked.

Τοὺς δ’ ἄλλους —when once an epidemic has esta- blished itself, it shows itself ‘suddenly and without ostensible cause’ (Collier). These words must not be so pressed as to admit of no exceptions whatever; exceptions are mentioned in c. 51, 1.

πρῶτον μὲν —first stage; intense heat in head, inflammation in eyes, bleeding from throat and tongue, fetid breath, and, after these symptoms, sneezing and hoarseness.

ἄτοπον —cf. c. 51, 1, ‘unnatural.’

ἠφίει —both ἀφίει and ἠφίει are Attic.

φάρυγξ —see not. crit.: ancient grammarians were not agreed on the orthography. Herodian says φάρυξ, Hesych. φάρυγξ .

Ἐξ αὐτῶν —after the symptoms just described. See c. 4, 2.

πταρμὸς —due to inflammation of the mucous membrane.

καὶ ἐν οὐ πολλῷ —second stage: the disease attacks the chest, the consequence of the passage of the morbid action along the membrane that lines the respiratory organ being violent coughing. For ἐν οὐ πολλῷ contrast c. 41, 3.

πόνος —‘the disorder.’

ὁπότε —third stage: the disease, on reaching the stomach, caused vomiting and great distress, and, in most cases, ineffectual retching; then the skin turned livid, and broke out in vesicles which degenerated into ulcers. Then came the crisis.

καρδίαν —‘stomach.’

στηρίξειεν — intrans., a medical use.

ἀποκαθάρσεις —‘vomits of bile.’

ὅσαι —evidently referring to different terms used to denote the various colours that bile has in different diseases, or stages of a disease; e.g. in cholera, the bile is first dark brown, then light green. Probably, as Grote says, Thuc. was acquainted with medical terms.

ὑπὸ ἰατρῶν ὠνομασμέναι —though the subject is non-personal, yet, if it be a nom, or fem. noun, it is not uncommon to find the agent with the perf. pass. expressed by ὑπό, instead of by the regular dat.: see on c. 29, 3.

ταλαιπωρίας —‘distress’ (tenesmus): a medical term.

Λύγξ —rendered ‘retching,’ but Collier says it should be ‘hiccough,’ because the hiccough is an important symptom of deadly maladies, especially of those which affect the membrane of parts within the chest. But (1) this leaves κενὴ unexplained, (2) the disease described is now unknown.

ἐνδιδοῦσα — ‘producing,’ the same use of ἐν as in ἐμποιῶ, ἐντίθημι. μετὰ

ταῦτα —after the previous symptoms (see third stage).

λωφήσαντα —with μετὰ ταῦτα. Cf. c. 2, 1. λωφᾶ·| παύεται Hesych., cf. Plat. Phaedrus, 251 C λωφᾷ τῆς ὀδύνης (Collier takes this with σπασμόν, as do some edd., but this would require λωφῶντα to match ἐνδιδοῦσα ).

Τὸ μὲν ἔξωθεν —adverbial, ἔξωθεν being for ἔξω. Cf. c. 13, 7.

ἁπτομένῳ —with θερμὸν ἦν, ‘to the touch.’

σῶμα —for absence of art. cf. 8 below.

χλωρόν —‘pale.’

φλύκταιναι —transparent vesicles, little blains which degenerate into sores.

τὰ δὲ ἐντὸς —the ἀκμὴ of the disease is now reached. It came in the third stage, and was marked by internal fever, intolerable thirst, and sleeplessness: yet the body was scarcely weakened by its suffering.

μήτε — answered by ἥδιστά τε. τὰς ἐπιβολὰς—for the order, cf. 18, 1.

μηδ’ —not connected with μήτε, but only joins ἐπιβολὰς to ἄλλο τι ἢ and with it= nec nisi; cf. c. 16, 2.

γυμνοὶ —the nom. is justified by τὰ ἐντός, part of themselves, With γυμνοὶ supply ὄντες. Cf. c. 45, 1 ὁρῶ μέγαν τὸν ἀγῶνα. So with τυγχἀνω c. 87, 5, φαίνεσθαι c. 39, 4. In the two cases in which Thuc. uses διατελῶ with adj., he omits ὤν ( I. 34 ; VI. 89 ); contrast VII. 38 παρασκευαζόμενοι διετέλεσαν. ἥδιστα ἂν— i.e. ἥδιστ’ ἂν ἔρριπτον, lit. ‘so as to have thrown themselves (had they been allowed).’ The infin. with ἂν is not common with ὤστε. M. T. 211, 592.

καὶ πολλοὶ — ‘and in fact.’ Cf. c. 2, 4.

ἔδρασαν —cf. c. 11, 8. Here = σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ἔρριψαν. τῇ δίψῃ ἀπαύστῳ—the adj., being pred., is emphatic, as always; ‘which was unceasing.’ (There are not many examples quite like this in Thuc.: I. 49 ἑνέπρησαν τὰς σκηνὰς ἐρήμους, c. 13, 5 τὰ χρήματα οὐκ ὀλίγα, IV. 122 τῇ ἰσχύι ἀνωφελεῖ πιστεύοντες, and VII. 70, 6).

τὸ πλέον καὶ ἔλασσον —the art. omitted with ἔλασσον, though the two things are mutually exclusive, as in I. 10 τὰς μεγίστας καὶ ἐλαχίστας. ἡ ἀπορία τοῦ μὴ—the infin. after a noun, as in c. 60, 7 αἰτίαν τοῦ ἀδικεῖν. The μὴ is added because the whole result is neg., as often. Plat. Apol. p. 38 D ἀπορίᾳ ... τοῦ μὴ ἐθέλειν, ‘the neg. being added as after other neg. or prohibitive words’ (Shil.). Andoc. 2, 12 κίνδυνος περὶ τοῦ μηδὲ αὐτοὺς σωθῆναι, ‘a risk lest not even they should be saved.’ See also c. 62, 3; III. 75, 4 ἡ τοῦ μὴ ξυμπλεῖν ἀπιστία.

)Επέκειτο — instabat; cf. c. 59, 1.

ὅσονπερ καὶ — like ὥσπερ καί, the καὶ merely making the two things parallel.

ἀκμάζοι —iterative, in a rel. clause. Cf. VII. 70, 5 ὅσον χρόνον προσφέροιτο ναῦς. M. T. 521.

ὥστε —the result is in the partic. ἔτι ἔχοντες, not in διεφθείροντο: this inversion of partic. and verb is very common.

οἱ πλεῖστοι —belongs only to διεφθείροντο, a new subject οἱ πολλοὶ (most of the minority who did not die on the 7th or 9th day) being inserted in the next clause.

καὶ ἑβδομαῖοι —the main emphasis is on this, the second member, as constantly in Greek.

ὑπὸ τοῦ καύματος —c. 47, 4.

τι δυνάμεως —cf. I. 5, 1 τι καὶ δόξης , III. 44, 2 ἐχοντάς τι ξυγγνώμης. διαφύγοιεν—‘pulled through.’

ἐπικατιόντος —fourth stage, only reached by comparatively few, marked by ulceration of the bowels, after the internal fever had abated; then followed violent dysentery, leaving the patient so weak that he generally died.

ἀπεφθείροντο —poetical word. See not. crit.

Ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ π. ἱδρυθὲν —Kr. thinks this an adscript, and is followed by F. Muller.

τῶν γε — effects seen in the convalescents ‘a seizure of the extremities remained as a mark (of the disease)’.

ἀντίληψις —for ἐπίσκηψις. Elsewhere ἀ. = an objection to an argument, as Plat. Phaedo p. 87 A. [

αὐτοῦ ]—if the conjecture αὐτὸ = τὸ περιγενέσθαι, it clearly involves a contradiction, since Thuc. is giving the signs of the disease before the recovery, but it might stand in the sense of τὸ κακόν. ἐπεσήμαινε—absolute, cf. c. 8, 3, 43, 3. Cf. Eur. Hec. 1215 .

Ἐς αἰδοῖα —art. omitted, as often with parts of the body.

παραυτίκα ἀναστάντας —‘immediately on their recovery.’ The loss of memory was temporary.

ἠγνόησαν —aor., giving the result of the imperf. ἐλάμβανε .

Κρεῖσσον λόγου —cf. c. 41, 3, but here = ‘not to be described.’

χαλεπωτέρως —see ἐνδεεστέρως 35, 2.

ἢ κατὰ — quam pro.

ἐδήλωσε .. ὂν —cf. v. 9 δείξω οὐ παραινέσαι οἷός τε ὤν. For the aor. cf. c. 51, 5.

ἄπτεται —cf. c. 48, 2.

ἀτύφων —see c. 52.

Τεκμήριον δέ —see c. 15, 4: only here without γὰρ fol- lowing.

ἄλλως —‘at all,’ after περὶ τοιοῦτον. περὶ τοιοῦτον — i.e. περὶ τὰ σώματα. αἴσθησιν παρεῖχον—‘gave an opportunity of observing the effect’ (on animals).

ἀποβαίνοντος —cf. c. 87, 3 ἀποβάντι, the imperf. being used here of the repeated result. In c. 11, 9 the plur was used, pres. partic. of the result as it will affect each man.

Παραλιπόντι —as ἁπτομένῳ 49, 5, ὑπερβάντι 96, 1. ἀτοπίας—‘omitting many peculiarities,’ πολλὰ ἀτοπίας being like μέγα ἰσχίος 97, 4, and the common expressions εἰς τοσοῦτο, εἰς τοῦτο with gen., as Demosth. 21, 62 εἰς τοσοῦτ’ ἀναιδείας ἀφίκετο. Cf. c. 17, 4.

διαφερόντως —lit. differently to one as compared with another, i.e. peculiarities ‘which marked individual cases.’ πρὸς=‘compared with,’ as in 62, 3.

ἐπὶ πᾶν —cf. ἐπὶ μέγα 76, 4, ἐπὶ πλεῖστον 34, 8, 35, 3; translate with τὴν ἰδέαν, ‘its general nature.’ επὶ is local.

ἰσέαν — contrast the meaning in c. 19, 1.

παρελύπει—παρα‐ denotes simultaneous action or intrusion on something more important. Cf. Plat. Phaedo 65 C λογἰζεται κάλλιστα ὅταν αὐτὴν τούτων μηδὲν παραλυπῇ. Cf. παρενοχλεῖν. κατ’ ἐκεῖνον — i. e. throughout the time that the plague lasted.

γἐνοιτο —contrast the mood in 49, 1: here the general form is required by the sense. Cf. 49, 6.

Ἀμελείᾳ —causal, some might have been saved had they been treated.

θεραπευόμενοι —‘in spite of’ etc.

ἕν τε οὐδὲ ἓν —a very strong neg., for which cf. Demosth. 23, 70 ἓν οὐδ’ ὁτιοῦν τούτων, and for οὐδὲν resolved, Andoc. 1, 29 οὔτε μεῖζον οὔτ’ ἔλαττον οὐδὲ ἕν. ὡς εἰπεῖν—qualifies the universal statement Shil. remarks that Thuc. never writes ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν ὅ τι χρῆν προσφέροντας — i.e. ὅ τι χρῆν προσφέρειν ὥστε ὠφελείν. The partic. really belongs to χρῆν. This irregularity is found also with δεῖ. Kr. Gr. Gr. 56, 10, 5.

προσφέροντας —a medical term, to interfere with the course of a malady, etc., by any means. Cf. Plat. Phaedo 63 D δεῖν οὐδὲν τοιοῦτον προσφέρειν τῷ φαρμάκῳ. τοῦτο —c. 53, 3 ὅ τι ἤδη ἡδὺ ... τοῦτο κ.τ.λ., 64, 6. This ‘epanaleptic’ οὗτος is commonest after relative clauses, as Isaeus, 1, 28 Κλεώνυμος ὃς ἦν ἡμῖν οἰκειότατος ... οὗτος κ.τ.λ., but at any rate in colloquial Attic it was freely used even when no rel. preceded.

Ἰσχύος πέρι —cf. c. 62, 1, ‘as regards physical strength or weakness,’ i.e. ‘whether strong or weak.’

ξυνῄρει —subject αὐτό = τὸ νόσημα .

Δεινότατον —pred. to ( a ) ἀθυμία, ( b ) ὄτι .. ἔθνη?σκον. πολλῷ μᾶλλον —sc. ἢ διεφθείροντο ὑπὸ τοῦ κακοῦ, because the worst possible thing to do in illness is to lose hope: they abandoned themselves to despair and really threw their lives away, instead of resisting.

ἀφ’ ἑτέρου θ. — = ἀπὸ τοῦ ἕτερον θεραπεῦσαι. ἀναπιμπλάμενοι—the technical word for taking infection. Cf. Plat. Phaedo, p. 67 A μὴ ἀναπιμπλώμεθα τῆς τούτου φύσεως. So ἀναπλἑως, infected, ib. p. 83 D.

τοῦτο — i.e. the contagion, because ( a) the fear of catching the disease caused neglect of the sick, ( b) while those who attended the sick caught it.

Μὴ θέλοιεν —according to the MSS., which are quite worthless in such a case, the orators said μὴ θέλειν and μὴ ἐθέλειν indiscriminately Shil. prints )θέλοιεν here; so some other edd. after μὴ. It is probable that ἐθέλω is, after all, the invariable prose form. (See Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 416, Meisterhans, p. 142.)

ἀπώλλυντο ... ἐκενώθη?σαν —the complexive aor. again gives the result of the verb in imperf. Cf. c. 50, 1.

τοῦ θεραπεύσοντος —cf. Aesch. Prom. V. 27 ὁ λωφήσων γὰρ οὐ πέφυκέ πω. The art. refers to no person in particular. Kr. Gr. Gr. 50, 4, 3. The fut. partic. with art. is not common. M. T. 826.

ἀρετῆς — = φιλανθρωπίας. Cf. c. 40, 4.

αἰσχύνῃ —cf. c. 43, 1.

ὀλοφύρσεις —the complorationes over those who died: friends had to go because relatives actually wearied even of performing the proper offices for the dead. The καὶ before ὀλοφύρσεις shows that having already neglected to attend to their sick, they also took no notice of them when they died.

τῶν ἀπογιγνομένων —cf. c. 34, 2. The imperf. is used of the constant deaths, as ἀπώλλυντο etc. above.

ἐξέκαμνον —‘wearied of,’ so ἀποκάμν ειν occasionally.

ὑπὸ . . νικώμενοι —c. 47, 4.

Ἐπὶ πλέον —c. 35, 3. Thuc. uses this expression about a dozen times in this sense ( μᾶλλον).

πονούμενον —cf. c. 49, 3.

ἐν τῷ θαρσαλέῳ εἶναι —cf. c. 60 ἐν ἴσῳ ( εἶναι ), III. 22, 6 ἐν ἀπόρῳ εἶναι, and many others.

κούφης —‘vain,’ because ἂν διαφθαρῆναι implies ‘if they fell ill with any other disease.’ They fancied that they could only die of old age.

ὑπ’ ἄλλου .. διαφθαρῆναι —see on c. 47, 4.

Ἐπίεσε .. ἡ ξυγκομιδὴ —the in version makes both emphatic.

ἡ ξυγκομιδὴ ἐκ τῶν ἀ —for the art. not repeated before the prep., cf. c. 18, 3, 38, 1. ( a) The noun or adj. must be connected with a verb which takes the construction used with it ( κομίζομαι ἐκ τῶν ἀ.) to admit of this inversion of the order, ( b) if the words which are inverted precede (see on c. 7, 2), the object is to produce an antithesis; but if, as more commonly, they follow the noun or adj., it is merely for the sake of convenience.

οὐχ ἧσσον — = μᾶλλον.

Καλύβαις —Aristoph. (see c. 17, 1) says ἐν ταῖς πιθάκναισι καὶ γυπαρίοις καὶ πυργιδίοις. ὥρᾳ ἔτους—Suidas gives ὥρα ἔτους· τὸ ἔαρ καὶ τὸ θέρος, and rightly takes ὥρα to denote the best time, as we use ‘the season.’

οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ —it may be judged from tragedy how important the Greeks thought it to make a graceful exit from the world.

ἀλλὰ καὶ —expresses οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ in a positive form. [

ἀποθνῄσκοντες ] —a gloss on ἡμιθνῆτες. (It is not possible to take this as imperf. partic., like ἀπογιγνομένων in 51, 5, since not νεκροὶ ἀποθνῄσκοντες, but νεκροὶ ἀποθνῃσκόντων would be necessary; for νεκρὸς ἀπέθανεν could not be right) καλινδούμενοι—καλινδοῦμαι is figurative in meaning) ( κυλίνδομαι is literal.

Ἐναποθνῃσκόντων —gen. abs. ‘men dying there.’

ἔχοντες — = εἰδότες. ὅ τι —cf. Eur. Or. 418 δουλεύομεν θεοῖς, ὄ τι ποτ’ εἰσὶν οἱ θεοἰ. ἱερῶν καὶ ὁσίων —cf. Isocr. 7, 66 τὴν δημοκρατίαν κος μήσασαν τὴν πόλιν καὶ τοῖς ἱεροῖς καὶ τοῖς ὀσίοις, and 53, 4 θεῶν φόβος ἢ ἀνθρώπων νόμος .

Θήκας —for ταφάς, ‘modes of burial.’ This meaning is sufficiently proved by Sta., who quotes Plat. Rep. 427 B.

ἐπιτηδείων —neut., whatever was required for the burning and burial.

ἐπὶ πυρὰς —governed both by ἐπιθέντες and ἐπιβαλόντες. For ἐπὶ πυρὰς ... ἑπιθέντες . . ὑφῆπτον, see c. 13, 2.

ὃν φέροιεν — M. T. 522.

Πρῶτον ἦρξε —cf. c. 36, 1.

καὶ —besides those instances of ἀνομία just mentioned.

ἐπὶ πλέον —cf. c. 51, 1, ‘to a greater extent’ (than ever before), since the αἰσχύνη which followed the breach of the ἄγραφοι νόμοι (c. 37, 3) was no longer felt.

ἀνομίας —governed by ἧρξε. ἀπεκρύπτετο μὴ —c. 49, 5.

καθ’ ἡδονὴν —as 37, 2, but with a bad sense.

ἀγχίστροφον —Ionic word, not found elsewhere in Attic prose.

μεταβολὴν — 43, 5.

ὁρῶντες —plur., though τις precedes, as after ἕκαστος, ἕτερος, πᾶς, οὐδείς. τῶν τ’ —the τε is answered by καὶ before οὐδέν, and each pair is introduced by a single τῶν, since εὐδαιμόνων . θνῃσκόντων apply to one set of persons, κεκτημένων . . ἐχόντων to another set.

Ἐπαυρέσεις —Ionic for ἀπολαύσεις, which Thuc. also uses, c. 38, 42. It was revived by late writers from Aristotle onwards: Andocides uses it once.

πρὸς τὸ τερπνὸν —cf. c. 65, 8 πρὸς ἡδονήν τι λέγειν. ἐπαύρεσις is the advantage, gain, or good to be got out of any act: generally it is neither immediately realised, nor does it take the form of mere sensual enjoyment; but now honourable ambition and forethought no longer prompted action.

Τὸ μὲν προταλαιπωρεῖν —the art. and inf. depend, as accus of respect, on πρόθυμος ἦν. The purpose of the art, is to contrast the two clauses introduced by μὲν ... δέ, since below ὅ τι δὲ ἤδη ἡδὺ = τὸ δὲ ἤδη ἡδύ. Cf. c. 87, 5, VI. 17 τὸ μὲν ἐς τὴν γῆν ἐσβάλλειν, ικανοί εἰσι, τῷ δὲ ναυτικῷ οὐκ ἂν δύναιντο βλάπτειν. τῷ δόξαντι καλῷ—‘for the sake of what seemed honourable’; cf. VIII. 63 οὐκέτι ἄλλοις ἢ σφίσιν αὐτοῖς ταλαιπωροῦντας. τῷ δόξαντι καλῷ differs from τῷ καλῷ in that the former denotes that no man had the will to strive after that which he himself conceived to be good; much less would he trouble himself about Good as a principle One reflected, τοῦτό μοι δοκεῖ καλὸν εἶναι, ἀλλὰ πρὶν ἐπ’ αὐτὸ ἐλθεῖν διαφθαρησομαι. (There is probably no reference here to good as universally admitted, as some have supposed: δόξαν applies to individual cases.)

νομίζων —the partic. again appended somewhat freely to the preceding clause. Cf. 1 above and 4 below. Here not οὐδεὶς but ἕκαστος must be supplied: somewhat similar is VI. 27 τοὺς δράσαντας ᾔδει οὐδείς, ἀλλὰ . . ἐζητοῦντο καὶ προσέτι ἐψηφίσαντο (sc. οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι ); IV. 59 οὐδεὶς ... ἢν (sc. τις) οἴηταί τι πλέον σχήσειν, ἀποτρέπεται, VI. 84 ὑπολάβῃ μηδεὶς ὡς οὐδὲν προσῆκον ὑμῶν κη?δόμεθα, γνοὺς ὅτι κ.τ.λ. ἤδη τε ἡδὺ καὶ— τε ... καὶ = sive .. sive, the first clause answering to σώματα, the second to χρήματα in 2 above.

πανταχόθεν τὸ ἐς αὐτὸ κερδαλέον — = ( ὅ τι) πανταχόθεν ἐς τὸ ἤδη ἡδὺ κερδαλἐον ἦν, ‘or contributed to the pleasure of the moment, regardless of the source from which it was obtained,’ i.e. men did not care how disgraceful were the means by which they strove to gratify their immediate desires. The sanctity of oaths and contracts was no longer respected; for the sake of gain fraud and crime became καλὸν καὶ χρήσιμον, and what was gained was immediately squandered.

πανταχόθεν —cf. Intr. p. xl.: all means, good or bad, were alike to them.

τοῦτο —cf. c. 51, 2.

καλὸν —1st Cor. 15, 32 φάγωμεν καὶ πίωμεν· αὔριον γὰρ ἀποθνήσκομεν. (Thuc. does not say they really thought these base things καλόν: it was not τὸ δόξαν καλὸν that changed, but τὸ καθεστηκὸς καλόν. The public standard of morality is a very different thing from what each man in his heart thinks moral.)

Τὸ μὲν —‘on the one hand,’ answered by δέ, instead of τὸ δέ. κρίνοντες—anacoluthon, as though the preceding clause had been pass. = ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς νόμου ἀπείργοντο. Such a slight irregularity is not uncommon in Thuc. and tragedy, as Eur. Hec. 971 αἰδώς μ’ ἔχει ... τυγχάνουσα. Cf. III. 36 ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς . ἐπικαλοῦντες. (Shil. quotes IV. 108, as a ‘still bolder anacoluthon.’ But the cases are almost certainly wrong there. As εἰωθότες κ.τ.λ. is clearly general, prob. the gen. abs. should be read.)

ἐν ὁμοίῳ —cf. c. 49, 5, 61 ἐν ἴσῳ δικαιοῦν , 60 ἐν ἴσῳ ( ἐστί).

καὶ μὴ —sc. σέβειν. ἐλπίζων—cf. c. 11, 6; had a plur. been nearer and οὐδεὶς not so near, Thuc. would have written ἐλπίζοντες, as VII. 28, 3.

μέχρι τοῦ —so v. 73, 4.

βιοὺς ἂν —the ἂν belongs also to ἀντιδοῦναι, = βιῶναι ἂν καὶ ἀντιδοῦναι. τιμωρίαν —with τῶν ὰμαρτημάτων. The art. and ἀντιδοῦναι shows that they sinned well knowing that retribution awaited them if they lived. With the general description, cf. St. Matthew, XXIV. 12, where Christ speaks of the destruction of Jerusalem, διὰ τὸ πληθυνθῆναι τὴν ἀνομίαν ψυγήσεται ἡ ἀγαπὴ τῶν πολλῶν. πολὺ δὲ—sc νομίζοντες, and for the interchange of words of saying and thinking which have to be supplied from the context, cf. c. 13. κατεψηφισμένην —sc. τιμωρίαν, i.e. νόσον. ἣν ... εἶναι—cf. c. 13, 5, 24, 2, 102, 5.

εἰκὸς —c. 10, 1.

Τοιούτῳ μὲν —the description is now concluded, the following particulars heing added as an afterthought ( a) to illustrate the superstition rife at the time, ( b) to indicate the locale of the plague.

περιπεσόντες —cf. c. 59, 2, and the phrase, συμφορᾷ περιπεσεῖν, constantly occurring in the orators.

Ἐν —‘during,’ though κακὸν is not temporal. Cf. c. 63, 1.

οἷα εἰκός —cf. c. 5, 4, and ὡς εἰκός VIII. 2, 3.

ἔπους —‘verse,’ 41, 4.

οἱ πρεσβύτεροι —limiting apposition. Cf. 4, 2, 11, 1, 16, 1, 21, 3.

ᾄδεσθαι —c. 8, 2, 21, 3.

ἥξει —common in prophecies, Eur. Sup. 1222 πικροὶ γὰρ αὐτοῖς ἥξετ’ ἐκτεθραμμένοι | σκύμνοι λεόντων. St. Matt. XXIV. 14 τότε ἥξει τὸ τέλος. πόλεμος καὶ λοιμὸς—there is intentional παρομοίωσις here, as often in oracles. The change of λιμὸς to λοιμὸς would be suggested by Il. 1, 61 εἰ δὴ ὁμοῦ πόλεμός τε δαμᾷ καὶ λοιμὸς Ἀχαιούς, and Hesiod, W. and D. 242 μέγ’ ἐπήγαγε πῆμα Κρονίων | λιμὸν ὁμοῦ καὶ λοιμόν .

Ὠνομάσθαι —‘that famine, and not pestilence had been the original word.’ (This translation is imperfect because it introduces a comparatively modern association.)

ὑπὸ τῶν παλαιῶν —might have been dat.

ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος —cf. ἐπὶ τῷ παρόντι c. 36, 4. The gen. is more distinctly temporal = ‘at the moment.’

πρὸς ἃ ἔπασχον —cf. VI. 34 τῶν ἀνθρώπων πρὸς τὰ λεγόμενα καὶ αἱ γνῶμαι ἵστανται. μνήμην ἐποιοῦντο— act. of μνήμη ἐγένετο in 4 below, and = ἀνεμνήσθησαν in 2.

δέ γε —these particles always cap a previous statement, whether made by the speaker himself or an opponent. They are sometimes separated.

καταλάβῃ —c. 18, 2.

Ὅτε —see c. 21, 1.

τὸν θεόν —as Apollo was both healer and destroyer, they thought that the god was helping the enemy by sending the plague. Cf. the opening of Il. 1, and O. T. first chorus.

Περὶ μὲν οὖν —Thuc. leaves this doubtful, without expressing his own opinions: then he goes on with the facts, δὲ being equivalent to δ’ οὖν. ‘As concerns .., they thought that what was happening corresponded to it.’

ὅ τι ἄ. καὶ εἰπεῖν — = ὅ τι καὶ ἀ. εἰπεῖν. ταῦτα μὲν —ἐστι is regularly omitted in this phrase, as in sed haec hactenus. Cf. IV. 41, 4; VII. 87, 6.

Τὸ πεδίον —the Attic plain, as c. 20, 1. This resumes from c. 47. παρῆλθον—after ravaging the plain (contrast c 19), and reaching the north-east parts of it that lie between Mt. Parnes and Pentelicon (Brilessus), they worked their way down the south-east coast district of Attica.

Πάραλον — = the part of Attica stretching south of Mt. Hymettus and Brauron right down to C. Sunium.

Λαυρείου —the mines here, which were an important source of revenue to Athens (Aesch. Persae, 237 ἀργύρου πηγή τις αὐτοῖς ἐστι, θησαυρὸς χθονός), were farmed out on hereditary leases. See Kennedy's Demosth., Intr. to the speech against Pantaenetus. [

οὗ ]—Intr. p. xxxix.

ᾗ πρὸς Π. ὁρᾷ — partem quae spectat ad P. Cf. c. 93, 4.

ἔπειτα δὲ —c. 4, 2. The addition of δὲ emphasizes the antithesis.

Καὶ τότε —with ὤν. Pericles had entered on a fresh year of office in Hecatombaeon 430 (Intr. p. lxv.) since the last mention of him as Strategus.

περὶ τοῦ μὴ —c. 22, 1.

Ἔτι δ’ —cf. c. 13, init.

τῇ Π. —the dat. depends on ἐπίπλουν. ἑτοῖμα—cf. c. 3, 4.

Ἐπὶ τῶν —see c. 80, 2

ἱππαγωγοῖς —this is the first occasion on which the Athenians used transports. (The Persians used them, Herod. VI. 48.) They were triremes (IV. 42; VI. 43 ); in 424 they were sufficiently novel to provide Aristoph. with a joke, Eq. 599. It was very important to have cavalry in the plundering expeditions, in order to be able to penetrate as far inland as possible.

Χῖοι καὶ Λ. — cf. c. 9, 4.

ναυσίν —the dat. of accompaniment, only used in naval and military phrases.

Ὅτε —the imperf., as usual, after ὅτε, denoting that the act described in the principal clause occurs at the same time as that described in the temporal clause. Cf. on c. 21, 1, and c. 99, 6.

τῆς Ἀττικῆς —for the order, cf. c. 18, 1, and contrast 4 below, where the emphasis is on Ἐπίδαυρον, whereas here the point is that the Peloponnesians were still in Attica, cf. 6 below.

Ἐπίδαυρον —the most important place yet attacked by the Athenians; it would have been valuable to them, as it lay on the road to Argos, which was then neutral (c. 9, 2) and might possibly join them if they obtained possession of so considerable a state: and other towns, as Troezen and Hermione might have fallen into their hands.

ἔτεμον —it is not clear why Pericles ravaged the country before attacking Epidaurus: probably he had planned a stratagem to seize the place with a small force while the main body was scattered about and was keeping the troops that guarded the town (only a third of the whole force of Epidaurus, c. 47, 2) occupied.

ἐς ἐλπίδα ἦλθον —the phrases ἐλπίς ἐστι, ἐν ἐλπίδι εἶναι, ἐλπίδα ἔχειν have the simple infin. aor. in most cases, as c. 80, 1; but in c. 85, 4 ἐλπίδος ούσης has the fut. infin., and in 102, 3 ἐλπὶς has ἂν παθεῖν; while in I. 144, 1 we have ἐλπίδα τοῦ περιέσεσθαι. Cf. on c. 13, 9.

οὐ μἐντοι —this failure is probably due to a rally of the inhabitants similar to that of the Plataeans, c. 3. προεχώρησε—impersonal; cf. I. 109 ὼς αὐτῷ οὐ προυχώρει ; III. 18 ἐπειδὴ οὐ προυχώρει ᾗ προσεδέχοντο; al.

Ἐκ τῆς Ἐ. —the attack on Epidaurus was the greatest enterprise of Athens before 427.

Ἁλιάδα —the country round Halice, an unimportant town on the south-east coast of Argolis.

Ἑρμιονίδα —Hermione had a territory of some extent on the coast of the Gulf of Hermione.

Πρασιάς —on north-east coast of Laconia. It suffered severely from the war, and is a proof how effective the method of Pericles was. Intr. p. lxx. Aristoph. Pax, 242 ἰὼ Πρασιαὶ τρισάθλιαι καὶ πεντάκις. οὐκέτι—nothing is said of the route taken by the Peloponnesians after they left Laurium.

κατέλαβον —always takes pres. or perf. part.: IV. 129, 1 (pres.), I. 59, 1 (perf.).

Ὅσον χρόνον —this has to be supplied with καὶ οἱ Ἀ., i.e. the sense is not that the plague raged during the simultaneous ravaging in Attica and in Peloponnese, but ‘both while the Peloponnesians were in Attica, and while the A. were away on the expedition.’

ἔν τε τῇ στρατίᾳ —the order is chiastic: τῇ γῇ—νεῶν—στρατίᾳ—πόλει. Thuc. is very fond of the chiasmus.

ἐλέχθη —constructed with acc. and infin. regularly ( a) when it is used in the sense of ferunt, fertur; cf. c. 20, 1, 47, 3, 77, 6, 93, 4, 98, 3, 102, 5; I. 69; V. 74. Plat. Phaedo, p. 110 C λέγεται εἶναι τοιαύτη ἡ γῆ, in a myth. It is then oftener in the pass.: the act. occurs e.g. I. 9, 2, 138, 4. If however Thuc. wants to imply that he disbelieves the report, he uses ὡς, as in c. 48 ἐλέχθη ὡς ἐσβεβλήκοιεν. (He always inserts some qualification when he is not sure of the truth of what he relates:) ( b) when it = κελεύω. It is not often found with accus. and infin. otherwise. See c. 13, 2 and cf. Andoc. 1, 57 εἰπεῖν κακίαν εἶναι τὰ γενόμενα. ἠσθάνοντο—from the smoke of the pyres.

Τῇ ἐσβολῇ —see c. 20, 1.

ἐνέμειναν —sc. ἐν τῇ γῇ. Complexive aor., as also ἔτεμον. The shortest period they remained was 15 days, 425 B.C. The ordinary time was about 30 days.

Ἅγνων —Intr. p. lxxv. He had been Strategus in 440 B.C., and was again re-elected in 429, c. 95. He led the colony to Amphipolis in 437 B.C., and was honoured as founder until the death of Brasidas in 422 B.C., when the latter took his place in the regard of the people ( v. 11 ). After the Sicilian disaster, when a very old man, he was elected one of the ten Πρόβουλοι. Κλεόπομπος —c. 26, 1. ξυστρατηγοὶ —It is not clear whether Thuc. means they were now in office for the official year Hecatombaeon 431 to Hecatombaeon 430, or for the year 430 to 429. Probably it is the former, and they were now nearing the end of their year of office. The expression probably points to the extraordinary position held by Pericles from Hecatombaeon 432 to Hecatombaeon 430. Intr. pp. lxvi., lxxiv.

μηχανάς —Intr. p. lxxv. Pericles wanted to reduce Potidaea in order that, in case peace should be concluded with Sparta (c. 59, 2), Athens might retain the town.

Παρασκευῆς —with ἀξίως. ἐπινεμομένη—‘spreading among.’ Cf. c. 54, 5. ἐπιγίγνομαι is only used of a disaster which is new. The partic., as well as the verb, governs τοὺς Ἀ. ἐνταῦθα δὴ—following a partic., as in I. 94, 5, = τότε δή νοσῆσαι—‘fell ill,’ ingressive.

ἀπὸ —cf. c. 51, 4.

ξὺν — un-Attic use. See c. 2, 1.

Φορμίων —c. 31, 2, and 2, 1; I. 64, 2. Only the 3000 hoplites referred to in I. 61, 4 were at Potidaea when Hagnon went there.

Κατὰ χώραν μένοντες —so I. 28, 5; III. 22, 6. Isocr. 4, 176 ; Demosth. 24, 5 ; Aristoph. Plut. 367 , et al. Cf. Horace's certa sede manet.

Ὡς ... ἐτέτμητο —the plup. has nothing to do with ἠλλοίωντο, ( i.e. the meaning is not that the land had been ravaged before the change came over their feelings), but describes the state of the country as it lay ruined before their eyes. The other places in which ὡς has the plup. ( III. 23, 1, 26, 4, 27, 1, 69, 2) are similar. Cf. on c. 3, 1.

ὁ πόλεμος —referring to the other miseries besides the ruin of the trees, crops and buildings, such as the difficulty of living and the burdens of service.

ἠλλοίωντο —plup., because the change had come over them before Hagnon's expedition, during Pericles' absence. Intr. p. lxxv.

Ἐν αἰτίᾳ εἶχον —cf. the following, ἐν ὀργῇ ἔ., c. 18, 5, 21, 3, 65, 3; ἐν ἡδονῇ ἔ., III. 9 ; ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ ἔ., c. 89, 1. This idiom is not found in the orators, but occurs in tragedy.

περιπεπτωκότες —see c. 54, 1.

πρὸς τοὺς Λ. —with ξυγχωρεῖν. πρέσβεις—Sta. reads πρεσβείας with MT only. Dion. Hal. thinks that Thuc. ought to have given a detailed account of these transactions. The reason he does not do so is that nothing came of them.

πανταχόθεν —not local, but = ‘utterly.’

ἄποροι καθεστῶτες — i.e. εἰς ἀπορίαν κ. c. 81, 8; εἰς τοσαύτην ἀπορίαν ἐλθεῖν Isocr. 8, 47 ; εἰς τοῦτο καταστῆσαι ἀπορίας Demosth. 22, 132 ; εἰς ἄπορον πεσεῖν Aristoph. Clouds 702.

Ὁρῶν ... ποιήσας —see c. 4, 4.

πρὸς τὰ π. —c. 22, 1, 64, 6 πρὸς πὰς ξυμφοράς , 88, 3 π. τὴν παροῦσαν ὄψιν. ἤλπιζε—of bad events, as in I. 1, 1.

ξύλλογον —c. 22, 1. Pericles still held his extraordinary power. Intr. p. lxvi., and it was perhaps by virtue of this that he was able to have a special meeting summoned. Cf. c. 13, 1.

ἔτι δ’ — i.e. he had not yet been suspended from office and brought to trial ( ἀποχειροτονηθείς). Intr. pp. lxxv. fol. will make this clear.

ἐστρατήγει —‘held office,’ implying that he was still αὐτοκράτωρ. He was just completing another year of office, and was Strategus elect for the official year soon to begin. Cf. c. 55, 2.

τὸ ὀργιζόμενον τῆς γ. —cf. VII. 68 τῆς γ. τὸ θυμούμενον. This neuter partic. as noun abstract presents the idea as an action going on, not as an abstract notion separate from all associations of time and circumstance. Cf. c. 87, 3. It is frequent in Euripides.

πρὸς ... καταστῆσαι —the ordinary construction is ἐς (see 2 above), but τρέπεσθαι has ἐπί, πρός, ἐς, and several verbs ἐπὶ or ἐς in Thuc. Cf. c. 65, 9.

καταστῆσαι —sc. τὴν γνώμην. ἔλεξε—the Schol. labels the speech δημηγορία Περικλέους πρὸς Ἀθηναίους. The speech was also known in antiquity as ἡ οἰκεία Περικλέους δημηγορία .

Καὶ . καὶ —parataxis; cf. c. 46, 1.

προσδεχο‐ μένῳ ... γεγένηται —cf. c. 3, 2. M. T. 900.

τὰ τῆς ὀργῆς — ‘this outburst of wrath,’ as τὰ τῆς τύχης; see on c. 44, 2.

ξυνήγαγον —the aor. of momentary action, as continually in tragedy.

ὄπως —the subjun. is certainly to be preferred to the fut. indic. here, as this is a pure final clause. M. T. 364 ( ὅπως is Thuc.'s favourite final particle, but is rare in other prose authors except Xen.).

εἴ τι —he does not doubt it, but softens the expression.

Πλείω —with ὠφελεῖν. This sentence contains a triple antithesis.

ὀρθουμένην .. σφαλλομένην —the state is personified.

καθ’ ἕκαστον —because it is when prosperity has engendered selfishness and oblivion of corporate life that states go to ruin.

Καλῶς φερόμενος —cf. v. 15, 2, 16, 1; φ. of the course that affairs take. This γνώμη is the premiss of the following enthymeme (see c. 11, 7) ‘It is well for the citizens that the state should prosper even if they have to sacrifice themselves: for the citizens must fall with the state, and when the state prospers, the citizens easily overcome their troubles. Therefore the citizens must sacrifice themselves for the state.’ Cf. 4 below.

τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτὸν —cf. c. 11, 3.

διαφθειρομένης —there is παρονομασία between this and φερόμενος, also between κακοτυχῶν and εὐτυχούσῃ. πολλῷ μᾶλλον —sc. ἢ ἐν κακοτυχούσῃ.

Ὁπότε —‘since,’ so that the verb to be supplied is ἐστί. Andoc 1, 7 and 89.

εἶς ἕκαστος —cf. VI. 41 εἶς τε ἕκαστος καὶ ἡ ξύμπασα πόλις; VIII. 89 ἠγωνίζετο εἶς ἔκαστος. μὴ—the sentence does not end regularly, the construction being carried on to suit the parenthesis ὃ νῦν ὑ. δρᾶτε. We expect καὶ μὴ ἀφίεσθαι. Cf. Plat. Phaedrus, 272 D παντάπασι γάρ, ὃ καὶ κατ’ ἀρχὰς εἴπομεν τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου, ὅτι οὐδὲν ἀληθείας μετέχειν δέοι τὸν μέλλοντα ῥητορικὸν ἔσεσθαι. ταῖς κατ’ οἶκον κ.τ.λ.—epexegesis of δρᾶτε. Cf. VI. 11 ὅπερ ... πεπόνθατε· διὰ τὸ περιγεγενῆσθαι ... Σικελίας ἐφίεσθε. Shil notes that Latin idiom expresses the epexegesis of facio by ut.

κατ’ οἶκον — cf. Aristoph. Lys. 261 ἃς ἐβόσκομεν κατ’ οἶκον, ‘at home.’ This phrase differs from κατὰ τὴν οἰκίαν = ‘about the house,’ Aristoph. Thesm. 402 , and has a wider sense than κατ’ οἰκίαν, ‘in private,’ Aristoph. Vesp. 1180 .

τοῦ κοινοῦ —objective gen. to σωτηρίας, but put first for the sake of the emphatic antithesis to κατ’ οἶκον. ὑμᾶς—he dexterously throws the charge back on them.

ξυνέγνωτε —the prep. here has an adverbial force. Cf. c. 64, 1.

δῑ αἰτίας ἔχειν —cf. c. 59, 2, and 11, 3 This idiom is rare in other Attic prose writers (not found in orators).

Καίτοι —there is no prothesis to this speech (see on c. 36, 4), the reason being that in c. 59. 3, and 65, 1 Thuc. explains the object which Pericles had in the Πίστις, and so had no need to insert it here.

ἐμοὶ —the analysis makes the πίστις begin here. But the Schol. who notes on these words παραγραφικὸν ἐν δεινότητι must have taken this to be part of the προοίμιον and thought that the πίστις began with c. 61. (I begin the πίστις here with Fr. Muller, against the Schol., Altinger and Leitschel, because the object of Pericles in the πίστις certainly was τῆς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ὀργῆς παραλύειν τοὺς Ἀθηναίους, 65, 1. Τὸ παραγραφικὸν comes in the προοίμιον, but Thuc. may have meant the last part of 4 to represent this.)

τοιούτῳ — here follows another enthymeme: ‘You are unjustly angry with Pericles: for he is able, patriotic, honest and can tell you what is best for you; without all these qualities, a statesman is of little use. Therefore, as Pericles has them all, it is wrong to blame him.’

οὐδενὸς ἥσσων —this is all purely rhetorical, for no proof is offered of the premise, which might be disputed. This illustrates excellently Aristotle's remark that, whereas exact truth is the object of the syllogism, probability is the object of the enthymeme.

φιλόπολις —to us philanthropy and cosmopolitanism mean far more than citizenship and patriotism; but in antiquity the former were vague abstractions which interested none but philosophers, whereas the latter were realities for which every right-minded man was ready to sacrifice himself.

χρημάτων κρείσσων —cf. c. 65, 8. Probably Pericles already knew that Cleon was preparing to charge him with intercepting public money. Intr. p. lxxvi.

Ἐν ἴσῳ —cf. 53, 4.

καὶ —‘as’; so after ἴσος III. 14, 1; ὁμοῖος VI. 11, 1; VIII. 76, 4.

ἐνεθυμήθη —c. 40, 2.

οὐκ ἂν ὁμοίως — meiosis. Cf. for ὁμοίως, c. 44, 3.

οἰκείως —like an οἰκεῖος, ‘as a loyal citizen,’ who regards himself as much bound to the state as to his family.

τοῦδε —this I am speaking of, viz. patriotism.

vικώμενος — the reading adopted is far more likely than the MSS. genitive, as the partic. corresponds to γνοὺς and ἔχων. (The gender would be masc., cf. c. 47, 4. So Kr., but recent edd., except Cr., make it neut., with τοῦδε for subj., against which it may be urged ( a) τόδε νικᾶται means ‘this view is rejected,’ unless τόδε is personified, in which case ( b) we should expect χρήμασι also to be personified, and to become ὑπὸ τῶν χ. )

τούτου — i.e. χρημάτων, cf. τοῦδε above.

ἀπόδοιτο —there are readings πολοῖτο and ἀπόλοιτο in inferior MSS.

Καὶ μέσως —with μᾶλλον ἑτέρων. ‘If you thought that I had somewhat more of these qualifications than others.’ ‘Propria laus tantum abest ut sordeat in ore virorum vere magnorum ut liabeat etiam ingenuae magnificaeque simplicitatis plurimum.’ Doderlein. μᾶλλον ἑτέρων—μέσως εἶπε καὶ οὐ σφόδρα, διὰ τὸ φορτικόν. Schol.

αὐτὰ —cf. c. 1. γε —emphasizes τοῦ ἀδικεῖν: ‘you followed my advice because you thought me φιλόπολις, χρημάτων κρείσσων. Is it not then absurd to impute ἀδικία to me?’ He seems again to refer to the plots of Cleon.

Καὶ γὰρ —this takes up τοῦ γε ἀδικεῖν, and belongs to πολλὴ ἄνοια, ‘for undoubtedly it is intensely foolish to go to war.’

αἵρεσις — viz. between peace and war.

πολεμῆσαι ingressive, cf c. 15, 2, 58, 2.

εἰ δ’ —there is not any doubt about it; cf. c. 39, 4, and Andoc. I. 33 εἰ μέν τι ἠσέβηκα ... εἰ δὲ οὐδὲν ἡμάρτηταί μοι, Aeschines, I. 112 εἰ μὲν ἦν ὁ ἀγὼν οὑτοσὶ ἐν πόλει ἐκκλήτῳ, ὑμᾶς ἂν ἠξίωσα εἰ δ’ ὁ ἀγών ἐστιν Ἀθήνησιν ... ἀναμιμνησκειν προσήκει. ἦν — viz. when the Spartan embassies were sent threatening war. Intr. p. lxviii.

εὐθὺς —with ὑπακοῦσαι. ὁ φυγὼν—Shil. takes this as general, but then the pres. partic. would be expected. Pericles alludes to those who had been opposed to war. κινδυνεύσαντας is emphatic.

Ὁ αὐτός εἰμι —this, like ἐξίσταμαι, μεταβάλλετε, πει‐ σθῆναι, μεταμέλειν, and ἐγκαρτερεῖν, is left without further definition. The gloss ἃ ἔγνωτε well gives the general idea of the passage which is clear but exceedingly condensed.

ἀκεραίοις —cf. c. 18, 5; before you had suffered from the invasion and the plague.

λόγον —‘policy,’ as announced in c. 13, and before the war.

ἐν τῷ ἀσθενεῖ τῆς γνώμης —cf. c. 87, 3. Antiphon, Tet. A, 3.3 τὸ θυμούμενον τῆς γνώμης, and c. 59, 3.

ὑμετέρῳ —put with ἀσθενεῖ rather than γνώμης for the antithesis to ἐμόν. It is not uncommon for a neut. adj. with art. to have an epithet; cf. IV. 87, 3 τῷ ὑμετέρῳ εὔνῳ. μὴ —with φαίνεσθαι. διότι—its ordinary sense is ‘because,’ but often from Aristotle onwards = ‘that.’

τὸ λύπουν —in order to secure a permanent advantage in the future, it may be necessary to submit to some temporary inconvenience (c. 53, 3), which a too hasty judgment may mistake for the only outcome of a far-sighted policy.

ἔχει —involves. so ‘makes itself felt.’

ἅπασι —with δήλωσις; the individual's perception of the immediate inconvenience being contrasted with the deferred realisation by the nation of the advantage.

ἐξ ὀλιγοῦ —c. 11, 4.

ταπεινὴ . ἐγκαρτερεῖν —cf. I. 50, 5 νῆες ὀλίγαι ἀμύνειν; v. 111, 2 τὰ ὑπάρχοντα βραχέα περιγίγνεσθαι. Shil. points out that this is not the same as ταπεινοτέρα ἢ ὥστε ἐγ.; being milder, it does not allege utter want of endurance: ‘You are weak in patiently abiding the change.’

Παραλόγῳ —that which is sudden and unexpected— for instance death in certain mortal but lingering diseases— does not necessarily overthrow one's original calculations. Hence the addition of τὸ ... ξυμβαῖνον to τὸ αἰφ. καὶ ἀ. ἄλλοις —neut.

Ἀντιπάλοις — = ἴσοις τῷ μεγέθει αὐτῆς. ξ. τὰς μεγί‐ στας —c. 2, 2.

ἐθέλειν —Shil.'s excellent remark that ἐθέλω = ‘I am willing,’ βούλομαι = ‘I wish,’ needs this much modification, that ἐθέλω is always used by a superior to an inferior, just as they speak of the ‘will’ of the gods. (In Plat. Gorg. 508 C, Shil. says a distinction is hardly recognised: but there ὁ βουλόμενος = ‘anyone who wishes,’ as usual, and ὁ ἐθέλων = ‘anyone whose will and pleasure it is’— εἰμὶ ἐπὶ τῷ βουλομένῳ ὤσπερ οἱ ἄτιμοι τοῦ ἐθέλοντος. At the same time, the example shows that the meanings of the two do overlap. Schmeizer on Plato, Phaedo, c. 50.)

ὑφίστασθαι — = ‘endure’ takes accus.: for meaning with dat., see L. and S.

ἀφανίζειν — c. 34, 3.

ἐν ἴσῳ — = ὁμοίως. δικαιοῦσι —c. 41, 5.

δόξης —with ἐλλείπει, as προσηκούσης with ὀρεγόμενον, the order being due to the elaborate antithesis.

ὅστις . . τὸν —the change of expression relieves the sentence. Isocr. 6, 90 έλέσθαι μὴ τὸ τούτοις ῥᾷστον, ἀλλ’ ὃ πρέπον ἔσται. ἀπαλγήσαντας— only found in Thuc.: for the force of ἀπὸ, cf. ἀπανθεῖν, ἀπέρδω, ἀποτύπτω. τοῦ κοινοῦ τῆς ς. —c. 60, 4.

πόνον —with ἀπέδειξα ὑποπτευόμενον, the object being repeated in αὐτὸν owing to the length of the sentence.

μὴ — subordinate to ὑποπτευόμενον. ὑπάρχον —with ἐνθυμηθῆναι, and both ἐς τὴν ἀρχὴν and μεγέθους πέρι belong to ὑπάρχον, ‘your possession of which, as bearing on your empire in respect of its greatness,’ i.e. ‘the existence of which, as it bears on the greatness of your empire.’

οὔτ’ ἐγὼ —sc. ἐχρησάμην αὐτῷ. κομπωδεστέραν—‘as the pretension it involves is rather arrogant.’

παρὰ τὸ εἰκὸς —‘unduly.’

Οἴεσθε —in this passage the topic τὸ δυνατὸν is used; Index, s.v. τόποι. μερῶν—depends on τοῦ ἑτέρου. ἐπὶ πλέον —sc. νέμεσθαι (c. 29, 2), ‘to any further extent you wish.’

ἄλλο —exclusive, cf. c. 14, 1; ‘nor any nation either.’ βασιλεὺς is not the Persian king, but goes with οὐκ ἔ. ὅστις. οὐδείς. τῶν ἐν τ. π.—cf. c. 41, 3.

ὥστε —the value of Attica cannot be compared with the value of the sea.

οὐ κατὰ .. χρείαν —‘not to be measured by the advantage derived from,’ i.e. is much greater than that. Shil. quotes many examples of οὐ or μὴ κατὰ meaning superior to; the same may mean inferior to, as in the phrase οὐ κατ’ ἀξίαν common in tragedy.

ὧν —sc. ἐστερημένοι. οὐδ’ εἰκὸς — neque decet, c. 10, 1.

χαλ. φέρειν —sc. ἐστερημένοι. [

αὐτῶν ]—probably due to a note ἐστερῆσθαι αὐτῶν. μᾶλλον ἢ οὐ —cf. III. 36, 4 πόλιν διαφθεῖραι μᾶλλον ἢ οὐ τοὺς αἰτίους. Shil. notes that ἢ implies a negative, just as πρὶν does ( A. J. of Phil. II. B. L. G. on πρἱν): and all sentences implying a neg. may be strengthened by an expressed neg. M. T. 815. Thus κινδυνεύω περὶ τοῦ μὴ σωθῆναι means the same thing as κινδυνεύω περὶ τοῦ σωθῆναι. κηπίον—a parterre of flowers. (The other view that κηπίον means a mode of dressing the hair is due to Aelius Dionysius: Eustath., p. 907, quotes Aelius, whose gloss also appears in Photius, Suidas, and more than once in Scholia; cf. Pollux, II. 29 κῆπος γὰρ οὐ μόνον φυταλιά, ἀλλὰ καὶ καλλσμὸς κόμης, κατ’ Αἰλιον Διονύσιον, καὶ κουρᾶς διάθεσις τῶν ἐν κεφαλῇ τριχῶν. Θουκυδίδης δὲ κηπίον φησι.)

ἐγκαλλώπισμα —of display in dress. Cf. Plato, Phaedo, p. 64 D τὰς ἄλλας τὰς περὶ τὸ σῶμα θεραπείας ... οἶον ἱματίων διαφερόντων κτήσεις καὶ ὑποδημάτων καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους καλλωπισμούς. γνῶναι —sc. εἰκός. ἀντιλ. αὐτῆς διασώσωμεν —c. 13, 2.

ἀναληψομένην ... φιλεῖν —the change of construction is due to the change in the sense of γνῶναι, which at first = know, then = judge or decide. M. T. 915.

ὑπακούσασι —with gen. of a perpetual attitude of submission, with dat. ( 61, 1) of submission at a particular moment.

πατέρων — the topic changes to τὸ συμφέρον. See 2 above. Demosth. 3, 36 μὴ παραχωρεῖν τῆς τάξεως ἣν ὑμῖν οἱ πρόγονοι μετὰ πολλῶν καὶ καλῶν κινδύνων κτησάμενοι κατέλιπον κατ’ ἀμφότερα — i.e. κατὰ τὸ κατασχεῖν καὶ διασώσαντες παραδοῦναι. But, as applied to his hearers, κατασχεῖν does not mean to acquire new empire, which Pericles discouraged; but to assert their mastery over their existing empire, and not think of surrendering it to Sparta: κατασχεῖν = both to get and to keep.

φανῆναι —sc. εἰκός. μετὰ πόνων —cf. I. 70, 8 μετἀ πόνων καὶ κινδύνων μοχθεῖν, ib. 19, 3 μετὰ κινδύνων τὰς μελετὰς ποιεῖδθαι. When abstract sing. nouns are used in these phrases (Thuc. has examples), as μετ’ ἀληθείας, the art. is rare.

προσέτι —once Thuc. uses πρὸς as an adv., III. 58, 5: elsewhere προσέτι. αὐτὰ —c. 36, 4.

αἴσχιον — Demosth. 2, 26 πολὺ ῥᾷον ἔχοντας φυλάττειν ἢ κτήσασθαι. ἔχοντας—δεξαμένους, while ἀφαιρεθῆναι is the opposite of κατασχεῖν καὶ διασώσασθαι. ἰέναι ὁμόσε—cf. c. 81, 5, obviam ire. φρονήματι καταφρονήματι —παρονομασία, in the style of Gorgias. Intr. p. lii. The antithesis between confidence and disdain is an antithesis between an instinctive feeling of superiority and a consciousness arising from knowledge of the enemy's inferiority. Cf. Livy, XXI. 41 non eo solum animo quo adversus alios hostes soletis pugnare velim; sed cum indignatione quadam atque ira, velut si servos videatis vestros arma repente contra vos ferentes.

Αὔχημα —Intr. p. liii. αὔχημα is not identified with φρόνημα, but is substituted as the natural result of it.

καὶ —‘mere.’

ἀμαθίας εὐτυχοῦς —fortune sometimes favours cowardly fools, and produces in them a habit of boasting. Pericles probably meant Cleon, and Thuc. suggests him by καὶ (= ‘even’) δειλῷ τινι. καταφρόνησις ὃς ἂν—cf. the definition in c. 44, 1. Sc. τούτῳ ἐγγίγνεται. γνώμῃ—certain knowledge, contrasted with ἀμαθία εὐ.; again suggesting Cleon, who made the un-Socratic discovery that ἀμαθία is ἀρετή! Intr. p. lxxiii.

Τόλμαν —one of the effects of καταφρόνησις, but not always of φρόνημα, which is compatible with cowardice.

ἡ ξύνεσις —stands very close to γνώμη, but only in the intellectual sense of clear insight and circumspection. For the principle that true courage is impossible without ξύνεσις, cf. c. 40, 4. (This illustrates the close connection between Ethics and Metaphysics, so often insisted upon by modern thinkers.)

ἐκ τοῦ ὑπέρφρονος —with ἐχυρωτέραν παρέχεται. ‘Intelligence gives greater solidity to courage as the result of a consciousness of superiority’; such a consciousness of superiority is therefore desirable.

ἐλπίδι —cf. V. 102 ἐπιστάμεθα τὰ τῶν πολέμων ἔστιν ὅτε κοινοτέρας τὰς τύχας λαμβάνοντα ἢ κατὰ τὸ διαφέρον ἑκατέρων πλῆθος. ‘Courage trusts not to hope because fortune has hitherto been fair (that is the strength of the helpless); rather it trusts to insight based on a survey of realities; and that is a far safer prophet.’ In this elaborate antithesis ( a) blind hope is contrasted with clear insight, ( b) the foundation on which hope is built is contrasted with the foundation on which insight is built, the one being treacherous ( τύχη), the other being firm, ( c) there is a contrast, in the form of chiasmus, between ἐλπίδι and ὑπάρχοντα, and between τύχης and γνώμη. ἀπὸ τῆς ὁμοίας τύχης—referring to 4 above; cowards boast when τύχη has been more than ὁμοία to them: the helpless hope on when τύχη has been as much as ὁμοία to them; for an equal share of Heaven's favours is enough to make them suppose they will not be destroyed But brave men, trusting in γνώμη, can bear up even under a temporary withdrawal of their share of Heaven's favour (c. 64, 2). (These words, if retained after τὴν τόλμαν, give no sense, since there is no reason why courage should come ἀπὸ ... τύχης , or why the effect of insight on courage should be limited by such a condition.)

ἀπόρῳ —neut.

γνώμῃ —Thuc. does not often contrast γνώμη with τύχη, by which γνώμη may always be over-ridden. Intr. p. xli.; I. 144, 4; V. 75 τυχῃ μὲν κακιζόμενοι, γνώμῃ δὲ οἱ αὐτοὶ ἔτι ὄντες. It is common in the orators, as Antiphon, 5, 92, Andoc. 1, 140 , Lys. 34, 2 , Isocr. 2, 30 .

Τῆς τε —the topic changes to τὸ συμφέρον; see c. 62, 3, Index s.v. τόποι. εἰκὸς — decet.

τῷ τιμωμένῳ —c. 59, 3. ‘You are bound to support the dignity which the state has obtained through our empire.’

ὑπὲρ ἅπαντας —not a common use of ὑπέρ. Cf. Isocr. ep. 4, 8 τοὺς ὑπὲρ αὑτοὺς ὄντας. τιμὰς—which, though belonging to the state, directly benefit every citizen; in those times the city was everything, the citizen nothing. Cf. 60, 3.

περὶ δουλείας ἀγωνίζεσθαι —as remarked on c. 62, 3, sentences like ἀγὼν περὶ τοῦ δοκεῖν ἀδίκως ἐπιθυμεῖν and ἀγὡν περὶ τοῦ μὴ δοκεῖν ἀ. ἐ. are identical in meaning. In the same way, with all verbs or nouns implying a contest, the noun with περὶ may describe either the object which the combatant referred to wishes to obtain, or the disaster he wishes to avoid, the two being the same thing regarded from different views: thus Lysias' ἐναντιοῦσθαι περὶ έλευθερίας (13, 17) is the same as ἀγωνίζεσθαι περὶ δουλείας. Cf. Lys. 3, 44 ἀγωνίζεσθαι περὶ θανάτου; 21, 20 ἀ. περὶ ἀσεβείας. Demosth. 1, 5 οὐ περὶ δόξης κίνδυνος άλλ’ ἀνδραποδισμοῦ τῆς πατρίδος. δουλείας — i.e. dependence on Sparta, as δ. often denotes merely the opposite of αὐτονομία. κινδύνου ὧν — periculo ob offensas in imperio contractas, danger due to the hatred to which you have been exposed in that empire. ὧν = τούτων ἅ, cognate accus. to ἀπήχθησθε. (One or two edd. prefer to take ὧν as masc., danger from those in governing whom you have incurred hatred; but that does not agree well with the abstract nature of the whole passage.)

Εἴ τις —referring to the combination to which the overtures to Sparta were due.

καὶ τόδε — i.e. τὸ ἐκστῆναι τῆς ἀρχῆς, ‘if that is the honourable part that any of you, prompted by his present apprehension and an indolent spirit, wishes to play.’ τόδε is cognate accus. to ἀνδραγαθίζεται. Cf. 1 above. The friends of peace did not admit that they wished ἐκστῆναι τῆς ἀρχῆς, but Pericles asserts that their policy would lead to loss of empire and even worse disasters.

ἀπραγμοσύνῃ — dat. of manner. The word is purposely chosen to include all who were playing into the hands of Sparta, if only by their apathy. Cf. Intr. p. lxxiii.

ὡς τυραννίδα —it is remarkable that Cleon, who had done so much to get up the attack on Pericles, utters the same sentiment, III. 40. Cleon was really by no means anxious for peace (see Intr. p. lxxiv. fol.), and it is probable that Pericles here points out the absurdity of Cleon's present attitude by adopting a phrase of which all knew that he was fond; leaving the friends of ἀπραγμοσύνη to settle matters with the friends of τυραννὶς as best they could.

ἄδικον δοκεῖ — viz. ‘to the world.’ Pericles does not himself assert that the empire is a despotism, or that it was unjustly acquired: he alludes to an opinion then especially prevalent.

ἐπικίνδυνον —sc. ἐστί.

Οἱ τοιοῦτοι — i.e. οἱ τόδε ἀνδραγαθιζόμενοι. ἑτέρους πείσαντες—‘if they should get others to adopt their views.’

καὶ —with τέ , sive ... sive. Observe the ἰσόκωλον on each side of καί, cf. c. 40, 1, and the ὁμοιοτέλευτα in ἀπολέσειαν and οἰκήσειαν. (These similar endings are not common in Thuc.: there are about a dozen in this book.)

εἴ που —the second protasis to πόλιν ἀπολέσειαν. ἐπὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν—‘by themselves,’ a hint that if they want their ideas carried out, they had better go and live somewhere else. For the phrase, cf. v. 67 , 1; VI. 40, 2 αὐτὴ έφ’ αὺτῆς; VIII. 63, 4.

τὸ ἄπραγμον —‘indolence is not secure unless it be ranged beside activity; nor yet is it expedient in a sovereign state, but only in one that is in subjection, to seek safety by submission.’ τὸ ἄπραγμον and τὸ δραστήριον are for οἱ ἀπράγμονες, οἱ δραστήριοι. Cf. c. 44, 1.

σῴζεται ... τεταγμένον —military words. If indolent persons wish to come out of the struggle safe, they had better take sides with the active; i.e. the peace party can only gain a secure peace by supporting the war party, instead of making overtures to the enemy. Cf. Demosth. 6, 25 οὐ φυλάξεσθ’ ὅπως μὴ πολέμου ζητοῦντες ἀπαλλαγῆναι δεσπότην εὕρητε; ξυμφέρει —subject ὰσφαλῶς δουλεύειν, before which τὸ is omitted, as in c. 35, 1, 39, 4.

ἀσφαλῶς δ. — this is what τὸ ἄπραγμον really means, says Pericles, it is not σωτηρία, as the friends of peace pretend, but δουλεία : ἀσφαλῶς corresponds to οὐ σῴζεται, δουλεύειν to μὴ μετὰ τοῦ δραο τηρίου τεταγμένον, which shows that the adv. is emphatic.

δουλεύειν —cf. 1 above; a state now ἄρχουσα becomes a slave by submitting. Cf. c. 42, 4. (For other views of this passage, see other editions.)

Δῑ ὀργῆς —c. 13, 2.

εἰκὸς ἦν —sc. δρᾶσαι. Cf. c. 11, 8.

πρᾶγμα ... γεγενημένον —for the change to a neut. expression cf. c. 47, 3. πρᾶγμα is in apposition to the sentence generally, as in Andoc. 1, 39 τοῦθ’ ὑπέθετο, δεινότατον πρᾶγμα οἶμαι. ἐλπίδος—cf. c. 11, 6, 85, 4, 102, 3.

κρεῖσσον —cf. c. 41, 3.

οἶδ’ ὅτι —cf. εὖ οἶδ’ ὅτι, and δῆλον ὅτι. μέρος τι —‘considerably.’ [ τι ] εὖ πράξητε —either εὖ ποιεῖν, εὖ πράττειν, etc., or ἀγαθόν τι ποιεῖν, ἀγαθόν τι πράττειν, etc., are the phrases. For the latter, cf. Isocr. 2, 20 , Aristoph. Eccles. 108 .

ἀναθήσετε —‘you intend to attribute it to me.’ So the fut. indic. with εἰ may follow optat. with ἄν, and even alternate with εἰ and optat., as Andoc. 1, 30 δεινὸν ἂν εἴη, εἰ ὲμοὶ ὀργίζοισθε καὶ τὴν διαβολὴν ... κρείττω τῆς ἀληθείας ἡγήσεσθε.

Φἑρειν τε —another reason why their indignation is unmerited is that the plague is sent by a higher power.

τὰ δαιμόνια —this phrase, for τὰ τῆς τύχης, only occurs here, and, as Cl. says, it is probably borrowed from the language of philosophers. Cf. θεῖος, contrasted with ἀνθρώπινος, in Plato; also Andoc. 1, 139 κίνδυνοι θεῖοι) ( κ. ἀνθρώπινοι. ἀναγκαίως —‘with resignation.’ The inevitable should be endured, not argued over.

τά τε ἀπὸ —there is chiasmus with I above; οἱ ὲναντίοι, ἡ νόσος, τὰ δαιμόνια, τὰ ἀπὸ τῶν π. ἐν ἔθει ἦν— ‘was the habit of.’

ἐν ὑμῖν —‘by your act.’ Cf. c. 35 , 1.

κωλυθῇ —‘let it not be impeded,’ i.e. ‘let not your action check it.’

Διὰ τὸ —belongs to εἴκειν and ἀνηλωκέναι. (The Schol., who makes ἀνηλωκέναι depend on γνῶτε, has the honour of having misled Shil.)

πλεῖστα δὲ —‘has never yielded ..., but has sacrificed.’

μεγίστην δὴ —antithesis to ὄνομα μέγιστον. Notice the frequent use of superlatives, esp. μέγιστος and πλεῖστος. Cf. c. 11, 1.

ἢν καὶ νῦν —‘even if, in our present condition ( i.e. in spite of our present power), we should give way at all. Pericles admits the possibility of a decline of the empire.’

καὶ ἐλασσοῦσθαι —‘to decay as well (as to grow).’

καταλελείψεται —permanent result in fut. M. T. 78.

Ἑλλήνων τε ὅτι —epexegesis of ἧς = δυνάμεως. Cf. Plat. Rep. v. p. 469 B Ἕλληνας Ἑλληνίδας πόλεις ἀνδραποδίζεσθαι. ὅτι—put late, because of the emphasis on Ἑλλήνων. πολέμοις—temporal. Cf. c. 13, 9.

καθ’ ἑκάστους —depends, as though it were one word, on πρός. τοῖς πᾶσιν —c. 11, 6.

Καίτοι —‘now it is true that,’ making an admission that increase of power does not increase the number of friends. The objection is answered in 5 below. (Only Bäumlein and Sta. make this clear.)

ἀπράγμων —referring to other states, yet with a hint at οἱ ἀπράγμονες in Athens.

μέμψαιτ’ ἄν — corresponds to the fut. ζηλώσει, φθονήσει. καὶ αὐτὸς —with δρᾶν, ‘he who is ambitious like ourselves.’

ζηλώσει —note the difference between ζῆλος and φθόνος. L. and S. s.v. ζῆλος. εἰ ... κέκτηται —= ὅστις κέκτηται= ὁ κεκτημένος.

Ἐν τῷ παρόντι —‘for a time,’ i.e. until other nations become habituated to it. Cf. c. 41, 2.

ἕτεροι ἑτέρων —c. 51, 1 and 4. Cf. I. 84 διαφέρειν ἄνθρωπον ἀνθρώπου and 3 above; Livy, XXI. 10, 4 ex bellis bella serendo.

ὅστις ... λαμβάνει —= ὁ λαμβάνων. ἐπὶ μεγίστοις—cf. c. 29, 3 ἐπ’ ὠφελίᾳ. ἡ δὲ κ.τ.λ.—there is only one idea in the subject: lit. ‘that which is the splendour of the present remains also the glory of the future in memory for ever,’ by which he means great power, τὰ μέγιστα above. In the present, such power is viewed with dislike, though it is a splendid thing to have; but hatred is short-lived, and in the future will be changed into admiration and respect. Even if this great power decline, it is still remembered. The second member is the more important.

Ἔς τε τὸ μέλλον —there is chiasmus here; παραυτίκα, ἐς τὸ ἔπειτα, ἐς τὸ μέλλον, ἐς τὸ αὐτίκα. προγνόντες—‘providing for future glory and present escape from disgrace, secure both by making an effort now.’

ἐπικηρυκεύεσθε —see c. 1 ἐπεμείγνυντο. Cf. ἐπιδικἀζεσθαι. οἵτινες—with this conclusion, cf. the close of Nicias' speech, VI. 14 τὸ καλῶς ἄρξαι τοῦτ’ εἶναι, ὃς ἂν κ.τ.λ. πρὸς — propter, c. 91, 4.

οὗτοι —c. 58, 3.

καὶ πόλεων καὶ ἰδιωτῶν —sums up the lesson of the whole speech. The interests of the individual cannot be considered apart from those of the community. Cf. Isocr. 3, 51 .

Τῆς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν —‘the indignation directed against him.’

δεινῶν —here regarded from the point of view of the sufferers; in 77, 1 from that of those who cause the suffering.

ἀπάγειν τὴν γ. —cf. c. 59, 3.

Ἀνεπείθοντο —c. 14, 1.

ὁ μὲν —cf. c. 21, 3.

ἀπ’ ἐλασσόνων —‘having less to start with,’ i.e. before the war.

ἐστέρητο —so Andoc. 3, 8 ; Aeschin. 2, 173 of this period.

{ἐν} οἰκοδομίαις —‘consisting in buildings and costly furniture,’ with κτήματα. Cf. Dinarch. 1, 5 ἡ ἐν τῷ λέγειν δύναμις. τὸ δὲ μέγιστον—‘above all,’ adverbial accus.

Πρότερον ... πρὶν —this insertion of πρότερον is due to the comparative and negative nature of πρίν. It is very common. M. T. 658.

χρήμασιν —cf. IV. 65 φυγῇ ἐζημίωσαν. For the probable circumstances see Intr. p. lxxvi.

Ὕστερον —Intr. p. lxxvii.

οὐ πολλῷ —about six months.

ὅπερ φιλεῖ —Thuc.'s objections to a thorough-going democracy are (1) that it is uncertain in its policy, (2) that it encourages rivalry among demagogues, and consequently party strife. Cf. Burke, Reflections, ‘Not being wholly unread in the authors who had seen the most of those constitutions, I cannot help concurring with their opinion, that an absolute democracy, no more than absolute monarchy, is to be reckoned among the legitimate forms of government.’

πάντα — i.e. made him στρατηγὸς αὐτοκράτωρ. ὧν ... ἤλγει —cf. Eur. Hec. 1256 παιδὸς ἀλγεῖν, a poetical construction. Supply ταῦτα, accus. of respect, to ἀμβλύτεροι, and to πλείστου ἄξιον. ἡ ξύμπασα—the state is contrasted with the individuals of which it consists. Cf. c. 7, 2. ξύμπασα ἡ would contrast the whole with part of the city.

Ὅσον τε ... ἐπεί τε — i.e. throughout his administra- tion, both before and after the outbreak of war. For τε ... τε, cf. c. 22, 1, 64, 2, 6.

προύστη —Pericles had been decidedly the first man in Athens since the ostracism of Thucydides, son of Melesias, in 444 B.C.

ἐν τῇ εἰρήνῃ — i.e. the Thirty Years' peace of 445 B.C. (So Bloomfield rightly; for the period 458-445 was regarded as πόλεμος, Andoc. 3, 6 ; Aeschin. 2, 174 . Pericles' decisive appearance dates from B.C. 468, but as πόλεμος below cannot include B.C. 458-445, εἰρήνη cannot include 468-458.)

διεφύλαξεν —the aor. gives the result of his policy. Cf. c. 49, 5. Andocides and Aeschines dilate on the advantages gained by Athens during the peace.

μεγίστη —attributes the greatness of Athens, on which Pericles so often insisted, to Pericles himself. Andoc. and Aesch. wrongly assign the creation of the reserve fund (c. 24 ) to the period of the peace. Andoc., being a consummate liar, probably did this on purpose, and misled Aesch. and puzzled some modern historians.

ὁ δὲ — cf. c. 46, 1. M. T. 564.

δύναμιν —sc. τῆς πόλεως. Cf. 13 below. Unfortunately Pericles failed to notice two sources of weakness: (1) the growing discontent of the allies, (2) the lack of rising politicians who would carry on his policy after his death.

Ἐπεβίω —‘lived beyond’ the beginning of the war.

δ. ἔτη καὶ μ. ἓξ —Intr. p. xvii.

ἐγνώσθη —here follows a defence of Pericles' war policy. The proofs offered of his wisdom are (1) the reversal of his policy led to disaster, (2) in spite of that reversal, Athens held out against great odds until ruined by internal dissensions. This may prove that his policy was good, but Thuc. goes too far in 13 when he implies that Athens would certainly have succeeded if Pericles' advice had been followed.

ἡ πρόνοια ἐς —cf. c. 64, 6, and for the order, c. 52, 1.

Ἡσυχάζοντας — i.e. they were to adopt the policy of wearing out Sparta, and not to attempt to bring the war to an end by a few battles.

ναυτικὸν θεραπεύοντες —the object of Athens was to obtain the recognition of her maritime supremacy, as it existed in 431.

ἀρχἡν μἡ ἐπικτωμένους — not to attempt conquests while the war lasted.

τῇ πόλει κινδυνεύειν —‘endanger the existence of the state,’ by distant undertakings or great land battles.

οἱ δὲ —other ancient authors contrasted Pericles with the demagogues who followed him, as Isocr. 8, 127 , [Aristot.] Rep. Ath. 28 ἕως Π. προειστήκει τοῦ δήμου βελτίω τὰ κατὰ τὴν πολιτείαν ἦν, τελευτήσαντος δὲ Περικλέους πολὺ χείρω. ἔξω τοῦ πολέμου—‘things which seemed to have no connection with the war,’ but really had; e.g. the rivalry between politicians, which led to bad government and consequent mismanagement.

σφίσι —for σφίσιν αὐτοῖς as c. 4, 1.

κατὰ —cf. 11 below.

τοὺς ξυμμάχους — by producing ill-feeling towards Athens among the allies.

κατορθούμενα —reflecting on the selfish policy of Cleon and Alcibiades.

βλάβη κ. —‘proved injurious.’ βλάβη sums up τὰ κακῶς πεπολιτευμένα, the result of which was seen in the Decelean war.

Ἀξιώματι —c. 37, 1.

χρημἄτων δ. ἀδωρότατος — Thuc. again alludes to Pericles' trial. Cf. c. 60, 5.

ἐλευθέρως —cf. c. 37, 2, ‘while respecting their liberty.’

οὐ μᾶλλον —‘instead of.’

διὰ τὸ μὴ . . λέγειν —this is answered by ἔχων. Cf. v. 16, 1 διὰ τὸ εὐτυχεῖν parallel to νομίζων, VII. 70, 4 διὰ τὸ φεύγειν parallel to ἐπιπλέουσα. ἐξ οὐ π.—contrast c. 17, 2 μὴ ἐπ’ ἀγαθῷ. ἐπ’ ἀξιώσει —c. 34, 6. Cf. ἐπ’ αἰσχρᾷ αἰτίᾳ VII. 48, 4; and Livy, XXI. 49 haud cum imparatis, for cum haud imparatis.

πρὸς ὀργήν —‘angrily.’ (Arnold translates ‘so as to excite their anger,’ because πρὸς ὀργήν corresponds to πρὸς ἡδονήν; which no one would think of translating ‘willingly.’ But neither does πρὸς ἡδονὴν = ‘so as to excite their pleasure’; rather πρὸς ἡ. λέγειν = ‘to speak pleasantly,’ ‘to say pleasant things’: moreover Arnold presses the antithesis too closely. ἀντειπεῖν is not the opposite of λέγειν.) Cf. III. 43, 5; VIII. 27, 6. For Pericles' freedom of speech, cf Eupolis, frag. τὸ κέντρον ἐγκατέλιπε τοῖς ἀκροωμένοις, comparing Pericles to a bee.

Γοῦν —‘at any rate,’ introducing an illustration which explains in what sense the preceding statement is to be taken.

κατέπλησσεν —later demagogues, on the contrary, tried only to humour the people.

ἐγίγνετό τε —‘and so it came about that.’ This is an explicit statement that Pericles owed his ascendancy to the influence he had acquired by his abilities.

λόγῳ μὲν —such a tempered democracy was the ideal constitution of Thuc. Cf. VIII. 24, 4, 97, 2.

ὑπὸ ... ἀρχή —the verbal substantive constructed like a pass. partic.

Οἱ δὲ ὕστερον —answering ἐκεῖνος μὲν in 8 above. So ἴσοι ... ὄντες corresponds to δυνατὸς ὢν. αὐτοὶ ... πρὸς ἀλλὴλους—might have been αὐτοὶ πρὸς ἁτούς. Cf. c. 5, 5 on διαβουλευόμενων. καθ’ ἡδονὰς—depends on ἐνδιὁόναι, ‘so as to suit any popular whim.’

καὶ τὰ πράγματα — i.e. to gain their object they were ready not only to flatter the people, but even to place the administration of the state entirely in their hands.

ἐνδιδόναι —after ἐτράποντο ‘they set themselves to.’

Ἄλλα — e.g. the rejection of the Spartan overtures for peace in 410 B.C., and the aggressive warfare of 424 B.C.

ὡς —‘as is natural’ when the administration of a great empire is entirely in the hands of the people.

ὁ ... πλοῦς —sc. ἡμαρτήθη, ὁ πλοῦς being viewed as an ἔργον τοῦ πολέμου. Cf. III. 67 ἁμαρτανόμενα ἔργα, Plato, Rep. VIII. p. 544 D πόλεις ἡμαρτημένας. ( ἡμαρτήθη is not impersonal, a constr. nearly confined to perf. pass.)

ἁμάρτημα πρὸς οὓς —the construction is similar to c. 44, 1 τὸ δ’ εὐτυχἐς, οἳ ἂν κ.τ.λ., 62, 4 καταφρόνησις δὲ ὃς ἂν κ.τ.λ.; thus ἁμάρτημα ἦν πρὸς οὓς ἐ. follows the construction of ἡμἀρτανον πρὸς οὓς ἐ. ‘It was not so much an error of judgment with regard to the people whom they were intending to attack; the blunder they made was rather that the people responsible for the expedition did not consult the interests of those who had been sent out in their subsequent measures.’

ὅσον ... ἐπιγιγνώσκοντες —sc. ἁμάρτημα ἦν. Cf. IV. 26 αἴτιον ἦν οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι προειπόντες. οἱ ἐκπέμψαντες—the extreme democrats.

οὐ τὰ πρόσφορα —of the measures taken after the mutilation of the Hermae, esp. the recall of Alcibiades.

κατὰ —‘in consequence of intrigues for the leadership of the democracy.’ Cf. κατὰ πενίαν c. 37, 1. Thuc. alludes to the position of δήμου προστάτης, recognised leader of the popular party. The list, according to [Arist.] Rep. Ath. 28, is Solon, Pisistratus, Cleisthenes, Xanthippus, Themistocles, Ephialtes, Pericles; after whom the popular leaders degenerated with Cleon and Cleophon.

τά τε —‘they conducted the military operations without vigour.’ Thuc. shifts the blame of the disaster from Nicias to the home authorities.

ἀμβλύτερα —with less vigour than they had since the war broke out.

τὰ περὶ —accus. of respect; έταρἁχθησαν being ‘ingressive.’

πρῶτον — i.e. for the first time during the war. What ruined Athens in the war was the internal discord that broke out after Pericles' death.

Σφαλέντες ... παρασκευῇ —for the dat. cf. 7 above.

δέκα — i.e. 413-404 B.C.

μὲν —answered by καὶ οὐ πρότερον, just as we sometimes find μὲν ... τέ, τε .. δέ. βασιλέως— Darius.

προσγενομένῳ —from 407 B.C.

πρότερον ... ἢ — cf. c. 40, 2. M. T. 653.

ἐν σφίσι —for ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς. See c. 4, 1.

κατὰ —cf. 11 above. [ περιπεσόντες ]—περιπίπτειν regularly takes the dat., and no case in which it takes any prep. but ἐν is known The phrase συμφοραῖς περιπεσεῖν is very common, and probably a commentator wrote this in the margin to illustrate κατὰ .. ἐσφάλησαν .

ἐπερίς‐ σευσε —sc. ταῦτα from ἀφ’ ὧν, ‘such an abundance of resources had Pericles, by means of which he of himself foresaw.’

καὶ πάνυ —c. 11, 6, 51, 2.

αὐτῶν —‘alone.’

πολέμῳ — c. 13, 9.

Εἰσὶ —sc. οἱ Ζακύνθιοι. Cf. c. 26, 2.

τῶν ἐκ — attraction of prep., due to ἄποικοι .

Ἐπέπλεον —‘were on board.’

Κνῆμος —c. 80 fol.

ναύαρχος —an office held for a year. The admiral was almost as important as the kings, who commanded the land forces. His power increased when the Spartan navy became more important.

ξυνεχώρουν —‘did not seem likely to yield,’ imperf. of uncompleted action. Cf. Eur. Her. Fur. 538 καὶ τἄμ’ ἔθνῃσκε τέκν’, ἀπωλλύμην δ’ ἐγώ.

Πρατόδαμος —see not. crit. Mss. often Atticise un-Attic names.

ἰδίᾳ —probably he represented the philo. Lacoman party at Argos; the city was neutral, c. 9, 2.

Σιτάλκην —c. 29. στρατεῦσαι ἐπὶ— ‘send an army to relieve.’

ἦν ... πολιορκοῦν —c. 12, 2. ἦν = versabatur, ‘was engaged.’

δῑ ἐκείνου —‘with his aid.’

Φαρνάκην —satrap of Dascylium, the N. satrapy of Asia Minor, Sardis being the S. satrapy.

ἀναπέμψειν —‘escort inland’; cf. ἀναβαίνειν.

Τὴν ἐκείνου πόλιν — i.e. Athens.

τὸ μέρος —with βλάψωσιν, ‘do their hest to injure,’ adverbial accus.

Περαιώσειν —‘send them across.’ No subject is given for ἔμελλον, but ‘Sitalces and Sadocus’ has to be supplied from the context.

πρὶν ἐσβαίνειν —generally πρὶν takes aor. infin.; the pres. means ‘before the embarkation began.’

καὶ ἐκέλευσεν —sc. τοὺς πεμφθέντας. He ‘had given orders’ before the expedition started.

Τὰ ... τῶν ἐπὶ Θ. —‘the difficulties in Chalcidice.’ Aristeus had been sent with 2000 men from Corinth to aid Potidaea when it revolted, I. 60. πάντας—probably Cleon was responsible for the death of the Spartan envoys. They should have been kept in prison as hostages. Pericles had no voice now in the government, and Thuc. hints that he views this act as a blunder.

δικαιοῦντες —c. 41, 5.

οἷσπερ . . ὑπῆρξαν —attraction for ἅπερ ὑπῆρξαν. Shil. quotes Dem. 19, 321 τὰς εὐεργεσίας ἃς ὑπῆρξαν εἰς ὑμᾶς , lsocr. 14, 57 τὴν αὐτὴν εὐεργεσίαν ἥνπερ αὐτοὶ τυγχάνομεν είς ὑμᾶς ὑπάρξαντες , Aeschin. 2, 26 τὰς εὐεργεσίας ἃς ὑμεῖς ὑπήρξατε. οὓς ἔλαβον—probably some special occasion is here referred to, and the merchants were captured by privateers.

πάντας δὴ —‘without exception,’ δὴ strengthening πάντας. Cf. c. 77, 2.

μηδὲ μεθ’ ἑτέρων —c. 72, 1.

Ἀναστήσαντες —cf. c. 96, 1. πολλοὺς is attracted to the partic, and stands for πολλοί, by a common idiom.

Ἄργος —the Peloponnesians were very anxious to weaken the influence of Athens on the west coast, as they wanted to improve their means of communication with Sicily.

Ἤρξατο πρῶτον —c. 36, 1, 48, 1. the account which follows is inserted to clear up an uncertainty which existed in Thuc.'s time with regard to the history of the northern Argos.

Ἀ. τὴν ἄλλην —Intr. p. xxxvi.

ἀρεσκόμενος τῇ — the pass. of ἀρέσκω is only found in Herod. and Thuc. of Attic writers.

τῇ ... καταστάσει —he found that his brother Alcmaeon had killed their mother Eriphyle. Emigration was then the last resource of the discontented.

ὀνομόσας —the time of the partic. is not here past relatively to the verb ἔκτισε, but is comcident with it. M. T. 150.

Μεγίστη .. δυνατωτάτους —cf. c. 64, 3; μέγεθος of the size, δύναμις of the influence of a state.

Ὑπὸ ξ. . πιεζόμενοι —c. 47, 4.

ἡλληνίσθησαν — ‘adopted the Greek language, which they now speak.’

τὴν νῦν γ. —cognate accus.

ἀπὸ τῶν Ἀ. ξυνοικησάντων —‘as the result of this joint settlement.’ Cf. c. 49, 4 and 2, 1. Ambracia was a colony of Corinth.

Ἀργείους — = οἱ Ἀμφίλοχοι of 7.

χρόνῳ — = χρόνῳ ὕστερον.

Φορμίωνα —some time before the Peloponnesian war.

Ἀμπρακιώτας —those in Argos.

αἱροῦσι ... καὶ ἠνδραπόδισαν —contrast c. 67, 3. See 2 below.

Ἡ ξ. —c. 9, 4. It was very important to Athens.

Ἔχθραν ... ἐποιήσαντο —act. of ἔχθρα ἐγένετο in 2 above.

ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ —c. 65, 7.

Χαόνων —see c. 80, 5.

τἡν δὲ πόλιν —put before ὡς for the sake of the antithesis.

Ὁρμώμενος —‘making Naupactus his head-quarters.’

ἐπὶ —‘to the coast.’

ταῦτα —‘in these parts.’

ἀργυρολογῶσι —‘collect arrears of tribute.’

μἡ ἐῶσιν —‘prevent.’

Φασηλίδος —a Dorian port of Lycia.

τῆς ἐκεῖθεν —for τῆς ἐκεῖ, by attraction to ἀπό. Cf. c. 84, 5.

Ἀποθνῄσκει .. διέφθειρε —‘fell after losing.’ The aor. is antecedent in time to the hist. pres., but is placed after it, and joined by καὶ as the more important member. Cf. c. 67, 3 ξυλλαμβάνει .. ἐκέλευσεν.

Αἵ τε ... ὅ τε ... καὶ ἄλλα τε ... καί τινες —there are two members to this sentence, united by the first καί: each of these two is bisected, the first by τε ... τε, the second by τε ... καί τινες. οὐδὲν μ. ἀπανίστασαν—‘did not force the Athenians to raise the siege,’ any more than the embassies sent by Sparta to Athens before the war demanding that the army should be withdrawn from Potidaea. Intr. p. lxviii. ἀπανίστημι is not found in any other Attic writer. Herod. III. 156.

ἐπεγεγένητο —cf. c. 4, 2.

ἀναγκαίας —‘in their straits for food.’ ‘Non pas nécessaire à la vie, mais imposée par la nécessité.’ Cr. Livy, XXI. 14 pacem magis necessariam quam aequam.

ἀλλήλων ἐγέγευντο —Josephus, VI. 3, 3 wrongly calls such cannibalism a horror unheard of among Greeks. With the austere brevity of Thuc.'s description contrast Macaulay's account of the sufferings in Londonderry, Hist. Eng. c. 12, but the propriety of the close of the picture, where the story of ‘the fat man’ is introduced, may be questioned.

οὕτω δὴ —c. 12, 4.

ἐπὶ σφίσι τ. — ‘against’; contrast c. 90, 2. Cf. III. 13 αἱ δ’ ἐφ’ ἡμῖν τετάχαται. Χενοφῶντι —c. 79.

ἐν —belongs to τὴν ταλαιπωρίαν; for the use cf. c. 3, 1.

ἐς τὴν π. —Intr. p. lxxvii.

Ἐπὶ τοῖσδε ξυνέβησαν, ἐξελθεῖν —cf. IV. 16 ναῦς παρα‐ δοῦναι κομίσαντας Ἀθηναίοις ... αἱ μὲν σπονδαὶ ἐπὶ τούτοις ἐγένοντο. In VIII. 18 the imperative is used throughout the terms. ‘The men ... to go out.’ The inf. is not for ἐπὶ τῷ ἐξελθεῖν, but is the use noticed in c. 13, 1.

ξὺν ἑνὶ — cum singulis vestimentis, Livy, XXI. 12.

γυναῖκας δὲ —probably Thuc. is quoting the actual terms; so he is not responsible for what seems at first an odd correction of γυναῖκας above, but is quite suited to the cumbrous diction of officials. ‘With one garment, except the women.’

Ἄνευ αὐτῶν — injussu suo or privato consilio.

ξυνέ‐ βησαν —might have been ξυμβαῖεν, as in 21, 3. M. T. 713, 714.

ᾗ ἐβούλοντο — Recta, ἐκρατήσαμεν ἂν ᾗ ὲβουλόμεθα, whereas ᾖ βούλοιντο would represent ᾗ ἂν βουλώμεθα. The sentence is equivalent to κρατήσαντες ἂν ἐχρησάμεθα τῇ πόλει ᾗ ἐβουλόμεθα. Cf. c. 4, 7.

ἐποίκους —c. 27, 1. See on c. 101, 6.

Ταῦτα μὲν ... καὶ —the break between μὲν and τοῦ δ’, c. 71, is certainly not violent enough to warrant the supposition that καὶ δεύτερον ἔτος κ.τ.λ. is spurious. In a well-marked antithesis like ταῦτα μὲν ... χειμῶνι, τοῦ δὲ ... θέρους, an author could insert any parenthesis he chose between the μὲν and δὲ clauses. (So Andoc. 1, 29 περὶ μὲν τῶν μυστηρίων summarises what has preceded: then follows a parenthesis of five sections: then in 34 περὶ δὲ τῶν ἀναθημάτων introduces what follows.)

Ἐς μὲν ... ἐστράτευσαν δ’ —cf. c. 94, 4, 98, 2.

πέμψαντες ... ἔλεγον —c. 6, 2.

Οὐ δίκαια —cf. c. 5, 5, the Plataeans had told the Thebans ὅτι οὐ τὰ πεποιημένα ὁσίως δράσειαν. They now appeal both to τὸ δίκαιον and τὸ καλόν. πατέρων ὧν ἐστε— = τῶν πατέρων. Παυσανίας—this was done after the battle of Plataea, 479 B C., after burying the fallen in the territory of Plataea, which was declared autonomous and inviolable.

ἐλευθερώσας —this would remind the Spartans of their professed object in the present war. How could it be ἄξιον ἑαυτῶν to come ἐπὶ δουλείᾳ τῇ Πλαταιῶν? Cf. c. 8, 4.

ἐλευθερώσας . . θύσας —the first partic. is prior in time to the second, and the second prior to the main verb. Cf. c. 52, 3 φθάσαντες . . ἐπιθέντες ... ὑφῆπτον. ξυνάρασθαι τὸν κ.— cf. Demosth. 1, 24 ς. τὰ πράγματα, but the gen. is commoner.

Ἐλευθερίῳ —Pausanias mentions an altar of Zeus Eleutherius and a festival called Eleutheria at Plataea.

ἀπεδίδου —‘conceded’ the right, the imperf. representing the details of the act,

αὐτονόμους —with ἔχοντας. στρατεῦσαι—the change of tense from οἰκεῖν shows that the pres. denotes the continuous, the aor. the single act.

εἰ δὲ μή — introduces the alternative, whether a positive or a negative precedes.

ἀμύνειν —‘Pausanias can scarcely have offered these guarantees in the name of the confederacy without a resolution of the council of strategi to this effect.’ Busolt, G. Gesch. III. p. 212.

Τάδε —c. 41, 2.

τῶν ἡμῖν ἐχθίστων —c. 1 τῶν ἑκατέροις ξυμμάχων.

Ὁρκίους γενομένους —cf. Livy, XXI. 10 foederum arbitros ac testes.

τοὺς ὑμετέρους πατρῴους καὶ ἡ· ἐγχωρίους —‘the gods of your race and of our country.’ πατρῶοι are gods of a family. Cl. says the one art. shows that the same gods are meant by both expressions, but it may only show that the θεοὶ ὅρκιοι are contrasted with the θ. πατρῷοι and θ. ἐγχώριοι. The θ. ὅρκιοι, Arn. says, would be affronted by the violation of the oath; the θ. πατρῷοι of Sparta because the act of Pausanias was annulled; the θ. ἐγχώριοι of Plataea because they would be driven into exile if the strangers seized their land.

ἐδικαίωσε —c. 41, 5.

Τοσαῦτα —c. 12, 1.

ὑπολαβὼν —‘in answer’; as often in Plato.

δίκαια λέγετε — i.e. the justice of your words depends on how far your own acts correspond to your statements.

αὐτονομεῖσθε —imper.

αὐτῶν —the influence of the rel. is lost. Cf. c. 4, 5.

τῶν ἄλλων — i.e. those who did not take part in the battle and ceremony of 479, and are now under the rule of Athens.

ἧς —cf. c. 43, 4 οὓς νῦν ὑμεῖς. μετασχόντες—share in the liberation of Greece as your confederates did then.

πρότερον —the occasion is unknown.

μηδὲ μεθ’ ἑτέρων —c. 67, 4.

δέχεσθε —c. 7, 2.

Ἀδύνατα —the plur. points to the details of a com- plicated action.

ἄνευ —c. 70, 4.

παρ’ ἐκείνοις —cf. c. 21, 3.

εἷεν —the infin. is usual after γὰρ on continuing Or. Obliqua, and this is the only instance of the opt. in Thuc. See also on c. 80, 1, M. T. 675.

οὐκ ἐπιτρέπωσι — i.e. to remain neutral.

ἔνορκοι —‘being included in the treaty in consequence of the stipulation that the Plataeans should admit both.’

πειράσωσι —in the sense of πειρῶμαι. Cf. c. 19, 1, 77, 2. Several MSS. read πειράσουσι, and the fut. indic. after a verb of fearing is occasionally found, as Aristoph. Eccles. 465 , Plat. Rep. V. p. 451 A. But there is no case in Thuc.

Ὑμεῖς δὲ —here δὲ = ἀλλὰ in an answer.

γῆς ὅρους —art. omitted in a geographical expression. Cf. c. 13, 6.

ἕξομεν —sc. ἂ ἂν παραλάβωμεν. παρακαταθήκην—pred. Cf. Plat. Rep. I. p. 332 ἀποδοῦναι παρακαταθεμένῳ. ἐργαζόμενοι —cf. χρήματα ἔνεργα.

Πείθωσιν —perhaps πείσωσιν should be read.

ἡμέ‐ ρας ἐσπείσατο —accus. of duration, ἐν αἷς replacing the numeral.

εἰκὸς ἦν —c. 11, 8.

κομισθῆναι —‘return’ from Athens.

Ἀπαγγέλλοντες —Intr. p. lxxviii.

Ξύμμαχοι —in B.C. 520.

περιόφεσθαι —sc. ἀδικου‐ μένους. ἐπισκήπτουσι—regular word for a solemn order; esp. used of a dying person's last requests.

πρὸς —the only case of this use in Thuc.

Ἐβουλεύσαντο ... ὁρῶντας ... πάσχοντας —the accus., where the nom. is expected, is due to εἰ δεῖ, which interrupts the subject.

ἀδύνατα —c. 72, 2.

Ἐντεῦθεν δὴ —marking the decisive moment. Cf. c. 58, 2.

πρῶτον μὲν —answered by τοσαῦτα ἐπιθειάσας c. 75, 1.

Ξυνίστορες —a solemn word. Aesch. Ag. 1055 , Soph. Ant. 542 , Eur. Supp. 1174 .

οὔτε τὴν άρχὴν ἤλθομεν —‘we did not at first attack.’ This is answered by οὔτε νῦν. δὲ —answers ἀδίκως. τὸ ξυνώμοτον—the oath to aid in giving freedom to Greece. It would certainly be supposed that the oaths then taken were only binding in the war against Persia. Cf. c. 72, 1.

γῆν τήνδε ἐν ᾗ —the art may be omitted with demonstratives when a relative clause follows.

αὐτὴν —c. 4, 5.

ἐναγωνίσασθαι —c. 20, 4. Eur. Bacchae, 507 ἐνδυστυχῆσαι ... ἐπιτήδειος. ἤν τι ποιῶμεν—litotes; cf. ἤν τι πάσχῃ ‘in case he die.’

καὶ εἰκότα —the emphatic member, as always when καὶ is inserted between πολὺς and another adj.

ἀδικίας —depends on κολάζεσθαι and ὑπάρχουσι. τοῖς ὑ.—these dats. depend on ξυγγνώμονες ἔστε = ξυγχωρήσατε.

περιεσταύρωσεν —sc. ὁ βασιλεύς. τοῦ μηδένα—to fetch supplies.

χῶμα ἔχουν —this was not quite close to the wall; but nearly touched it. Cf. c. 77, 3 τὸ μεταξὺ τοῦ τείχους καὶ τῆς προσχώσεως. αὐτῶν—the Plataeans.

Κιθαιρῶνος —the town lay at the N. foot of Cithaeron.

ἐκατέρωθεν —sc. τοῦ χώματος, on both sides the mound was strengthened by planks crossing one another at right angles.

ἀντὶ τοίχων —cf. c. 3, 3. The mound did not run all round the town, and its purpose was to support the siege engines.

ὑλὴν —‘loose wood’) ( ξύλα, timber.

διῃρημένοι —middle, sc. τὸ χοῦν. ἀναπαύλας— ‘relief-parties.’

ξεναγοὶ —the Lacedaemonian commanders of the allies, who were superior to the generals sent by the allies themselves.

ξυνεφεστῶτες — i.e. with the officers of the allies.

ξύλινον τεῖχος —a frame-work of timber, in which the bricks were secured. Buildings are sometimes constructed in this way in Germany. τεῖχος is not really ‘a wall’ here, any more than in Pindar, Pyth. III. 38 τείχει θέσαν ἐν ξυλίνῳ σύγγονοι κούραν, σέλας δ’ ἀμφέδραμεν λάβρον Ἁφαίστου, of which Thuc. was probably thinking.

ξύνδεσμος —sc. τῶν πλίνθων. πυρφόροις—a common expedient in ancient sieges.

μέγα —pred. Cf. Demosth. 2, 8 .

διελόντες —the wooden face of the Spartan χῶμα sloped towards the wall of Plataea, so as to touch it at the ground; hence προσέπιπτε. ᾔρετο ... καὶ ἀντανῄει—parataxis, expressing well the simultaneous advance of wall and mound.

ταρσοῖς —this word describes almost any series of parallel lines, as in basket-work; here reed wattles, (Used also of the ‘tarsal’ bones in the hand and foot; of a bird's wing, and of a bank of oars. The Atticists and their followers notice the word extensively.)

καλάμου —gen. of material.

ἐνίλλοντες —the primary sense is ‘to twist, roll.’ It is connected with ἰλλός, a squint, and Pausanias the Atticist gives ἐνίλλειν’ τὸ ὀφθαλμοῖς καταμωκᾶσθαι (to mock at anyone by winking). From this notion of twisting the word comes to mean ‘to squeeze.’ (This word is much noticed by the Atticists. L. and S. are unsatisfactory; Arn. has a good note.)

τὸ διῃρημένον —‘the hole’ in the χῶμα. διαχεόμενον —sc. αὐτό, what has just been described, viz. the χῶμα as repaired with the wattles. Cf. c. 75, 2.

Τοῦτο —accus. of respect. [

καὶ ξυντεκμηράμενοι ]— as the χῶμα was close to the wall and touched it at the base, it is plain that the Plataeans would not need any τεκμήρια to discover how far to burrow. The edd. speak of calculating distance and direction, but the Peloponnesians had nothing to do but to dig straight ahead, until the χῶμα began to subside.

χοῦν —the earth of the χῶμα, as it fell into the mine.

Ὀλίγοι πρὸς πολλοὶς —a common antithesis; c. 100, 5; I. 110; III. 112; IV. 26; V. 80; VII. 87. ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν—as the enemy gained on them, the Plataeans built a crescent-shaped wall, concave to the besiegers, starting from the extremities of that part of the wall opposite the χῶμα, so that in case the enemy should take the raised wall by storm, they might find another wall behind.

αὐτοῖ — i.e. τοῦ μεγάλου τείχους) ( τοῦ βραχέος = the part which had not been raised.

ἐκ τοῦ ἐντὸς —‘inside,’ like a parte.

μᾶλλον — they had not been exposed to a cross-fire before. Thuc. means that the further in to the crescent the Peloponnesians got in building the χῶμα, the more exposed they would be to a fire from each side: προχωροῦντας ἔσω belongs to γίγνεσθαι also. (There is no need to explain this, as one scholar does, as for ἐν ἀμ. γιγνομένους μᾶλλον πονεῖν,) Cf. Tac. Hist. v. 11 , of the siege of Jerusalem,

τοῦ μ. οἰκοδομήματος —after ἐπὶ μέγα, which = μέγα μέρος and replaces the accus, after κατέσεισε, as in IV. 100 it replaces a nom., ἐσεσιδήρωτο ἐπὶ μέγα τοῦ ἄλλου ξύλου. κατὰ —‘by.’ Cf. c. 99, 1. Aeschin. 2, 124 εἰσπλεῖν κατὰ τὸν ποταμόν. κατέσεισε —‘shook.’

ἄλλας —sc. προσῆγον. καὶ δοκοὺς—the rel. sentence is changed to a principal; this is due to the length of the second clause.

ἀπὸ τῆς τομῆς ἑ. —‘at both ends,’ sc. τῶν δοκῶν. This belongs to ἀρτήσαντες, as also does ἀπὸ κεραιῶν, stout poles, like a ship's yard-arm, made fast to the wall and projecting from it above the siege engines.

ἀνελκύσαντες —on the double partic. with ἀφίεσαν, see c. 15, 2.

ἐγκαρσίας —at an angle to the μηχαναί, χαλαραῖς—‘by letting the chains go.’

διὰ χειρὸς —c. 13, 2.

τὸ προέχον —‘the point.’

ἐμβολῆς —‘head’ of the ram.

χώματι —after ἀντιτείχισμα. Cf. c. 61, 2 δήλωσις ἅπασι. Thus μεῖζον is not required before ἐγίγνετο. Cf. v. 116 ὡς αὐτοῖς τὰ διαβατήρια ἱερὰ οὐκ ἐγίγνετο. ἀντιτείχισμα — i.e. τὸ μηνοειδὲς τεῖχος. δεινῶν—‘means of coercing them.’

πειρᾶσαι —c. 19, 1; also for πᾶσαν ἰδέαν.

φακέλους —an archaism, according to Marcellinus' life of Thuc. 52. It is found in Herod., Hippocrates, once in Eur., and in later authors.

παρέβαλλον —‘threw side by side.’

τοῦ τείχους —the wall that had been raised, τὸ μέγα οἰκοδόμημα. The object was to set fire to the wood-work of the superstructure. Cf. c. 75, 5.

τῆς ἄλλης —after ὅσον. πόλεως — inside the wall, the space between it and the new μηνοειδὲς τεῖχος.

ὄρεσιν —cf. Pindar, Pyth. III. 36 πολλὰν δ’ ὄρει πῦρ ἐξ ἑνὸς σπέρματος ἐνθορὸν ἀἰστωσεν ὕλαν, Hom. Il. 2 , 455 πῦρ ἐπιφλέγει ἄσπετον ὕλην οὔρεος ἐκ κορυφῆς, Eur. Ino. fr. μικροῦ γὰρ ἐκ λαμπτῆρος Ἰδαῖον λέπας πρήσειεν ἄν τις. Thuc. naturally mentions the proverbial case of a forest on fire.

ὑπ’ ἀνέμων —a very common phrase. Cf. c. 85, 6. [

ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ]— explained as = ἀπὸ τοῦ τριφθῆναι, or ἀπὸ τοῦ πυρός. In either case it is quite superfluous.

ἐδέησε —subject τοῦτο. ἐπεγένετο αὐτῇ — i.e. τῇ φλογί. ἐπίφορον —sc. ἐς τὴν πόλιν.

ὕδωρ —this clause is in apposition to τὀδε, both γὰρ and a finite verb being dispensed with.

μέρος ]—Intr. p. xliii.

κατὰ πόλεις — ‘dividing the space among the different contingents.’

ἐντὸς — i.e. between the circumvallation and the city wall) ( ἔξωθεν .

πλῆθος τὸ ἄ. —c. 2, 2.

ἄχρηστον —c. 6, 4. Here οἱ ἄχρηστοι, the general term is distinguished from οἱ πρεσβύτατοι, the particular, and means those whose incapacity was due to other causes than age.

ἐγκαταλελειμμένοι —c. 6, 4. Plat. Phaedo, p. 91 C ὥσπερ μἐλιττα τὸ κέντρον ἐγκαταλιπών. σιτοποιοί—pred; so in Lat., Livy, XXI. 30, 8

; ib. 36 .

τ. οἱ ξύμπαντες —cf. ὁ πᾶς ἀριθμός c. 7, 2.

τοιαύτη —pred., with κατεσκευάσθη = τοιαύτη ἦν ἡ τῆς πολιορκίας κατασκευή, these were the arrangements.

ἐπιστρατείᾳ —cf. ἐπίπλους c. 17, 4. Thuc. would have written τοῖς Πλαταιεῦσι were it not for the proximity of so many datives. Cf. ἐπιβοήθεια τῇ νήσῳ III. 51; ἐπιδρομὴν τῷ τειχίσματι IV. 23; for the obj. = gen. cf. VII. 70 τῶν υὲν φυλακὴν τῶν δ’ ἑπιβουλήν. Βοττιαίους—in the N.W. of Chalcidice, which was called Βοττική. ἀκμάζοντος —c. 19, 1.

τρίτος αὐτός —Intr. p. lxxvii. He had power superior to that of his colleagues for this expedition.

Σπάρτωλον —between Olynthus and Apollonia.

προσχωρήσειν ὑπὸ —pass. of προσάγεσθαι c. 30, 2.

ἔνδοθεν —regarded from the Athenian point of view.

πρασσόντων —c. 2, 3.

ὁπλῖται τε καὶ στρατιὰ —‘hoplites and other troops,’ the general being again added to the particular. Cf. c. 78, 3.

ἐς —‘as a.’

Χαλκιδέων —those from Olynthus.

ἱππέας —the Athenian cavalry were defeated in 431 twice during the invasion of Attica, c. 19, 22.

Εἶχον —sc. οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι. Κρουσίδος—on the Ther- maic Gulf.

ἐπιβοηθοῦσιν —sc. τοῖς Χαλκιδεῦσι.

Προσγιγνομένοις —‘by the arrival of this reinforce- ment’

ἀναχωροῦσι —sc. οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι.

ᾟ δοκοίη —cf. c. 100, 5, per occasionem adequitantes.

ἐπὶ πολύ —of space, as c. 75, 2.

Ὑποσπόνδους —see c. 92, 4.

τοὺς αὑτῶν —contrasted with those of the enemy; not implying that the Chalcidians and Bottiaeans separately took up their dead. Cf. IV. 97, 1.

Ἀμπρακιῶται —they had made an attack on Argos in concert with the Chaones and other tribes of barbarians in the autumn of 430 B.C. c. 68, 9. The Chaones were possibly a remnant of the Pelasgi. Hence they are sometimes treated as Greeks, though Thuc. always calls them barbarians. Grote, II. p. 234, Curtius, Hist. G. I. 104 ‘In later times they were regarded as barbarians ... but, according to their origin, they could claim perfect equality with the other branches of the Greek people.’ (Cf. Matthew Arnold, Lit. and Dogma, init.)

πᾶσαν —this elaborate undertaking is in marked contrast, with the issue, c. 82; and it is quite in Thuc.'s manner to make the opening imposing under such circumstances. Cf. c. 7, 2.

Ἀθηναίων — the Ambraciots were actuated by the tribe hatred existing in that quarter, and they had an old grudge against Phormio (c. 68 ). Now that Athens was in difficulties, they took the chance of revenge, and were at pains to demonstrate to Sparta that they were very important friends to her.

ἀδυνάτων — through being occupied with the fleet, and in protecting their coasts. τῶν ἀπὸ θ. Ἀ.—ἀπὸ is for ἐπὶ by attraction to ξυμβοηθεῖν, ‘the Acarnanians on the sea-coast would be unable to aid’ the inland tribes.

κρατήσουσι ἔσοιτο —the indic. and opt. in the same sentence in Or. Obl. M. T 670.

ὁμοίως —‘would not find it so easy to.’

ἐλπίδα ... λαβεῖν — ἐλπίς ἐστι regularly has aor. infin., like εἰκός ἐστι c. 11, 8.

Ναύπακτον —this appealed equally to the Spartans, Corinthians, and Ambraciots; as the position of the conquered Messenians was a chronic insult to Sparta, Phormio interfered with the western trade of Corinth, and the Ambraciots too had their grudge against him.

Ἔτι —c. 66, 2. Cnemus' year of office had not yet quite expired. For ἔτι of a period nearly complete, cf. c. 59, 3.

ἐπὶ ναυσὶν —the dat. only here and IV. 10, 3. The gen. is regular, as c. 57, 1. So Demosth. 45, 30 says τὰ ἐπὶ τραπέζης ὄντα, 27, 11 μνᾶς ἐπὶ τῇ τραπέζη?; Aristoph. Eq. 754 ἐπὶ ταυτησὶ καθῆται τῆς πέτρας, ib. 783 ἐπὶ ταῖσι πέτραις καθήμενον. There is no difference of sense, but the dat. is rare except with names of places. (Rutherford, Babrius, p. 7, wrongly denies the existence of this dat. in comedy.)

ναυτικῷ —abstract for concrete.

Λευκάδα —an ally of Sparta, c. 9, 2, and a convenient point from which to attack Acarnania.

Ἦσαν ... ξυμ —c. 12, 2.

ἐν παρασκευῇ —c. 17, 5.

ἐκ Λευκάδος ... ἀφικόμενον ἐν Λευκάδι —a convement inaccuracy, as in c. 70, 3. For ἐκ Λ., αὐτόθεν would have been more accurate.

Λαθόντες — i.e. he passed the mouth of the Gulf of Corinth on his way to Leucas without being detected.

εἴκοσι —c. 69 .

Ἀρχικοῦ —the presidency was in the hands of a particular family. The Chaones, then a powerful tribe, subsequently lost their importance, and were little more than a name in the time of Augustus. Verg. G. I. 8; II. 67. They, with the Molossi and Thesproti were the chief Epirot tribes.

Μολοσσοὺς —became under Pyrrhus the rulers of Epirus.

Ἀτιντᾶνας —bordered on the Parauaei near the river Aous.

Ὀροίδῳ —both with ξυνεστρατεύοντο and ἐπιτρέψαντος .

Κρύφα —he was supposed to be an ally of Athens, c. 29, 6.

ὕστερον —c. 5, 3.

Ἐπορεύετο —he started from Ambracia.

Λιμναίαν —between Argos and Anactorium, now Kravassara, and the natural point of departure from the Gulf of Ambracia to the Gulf of Corinth. The first object of the expedition was to obtain control of this route.

Στράτον —on the Achelous, now Sourovigli. In 168 B.C. Livy says it was urbs validissima: now it is a poor village.

Οὔτε ... τε —the two results, like the two causes, are introduced by parallel clauses.

ἔπεμπον κελεύοντες —c. 6, 2.

Οἱ Π. καὶ οἱ ξ. —the former=those sent with Cnemus, the latter the Ambraciots and barbarians. See c. 9, 2.

λόγοις ... ἔργῳ —the antithesis gives a good idea of their confidence that they would succeed.

Μέσον —art. omitted, as with δεξιὸν κέρας. προς‐ ῇσαν— i.e. ᾗσαν πρὸς την πόλιν.

Διὰ φυλακῆς ἔ. —cf. c. 13, 2, but here ἔχειν is intrans., as in VII. 8, 3.

ἀξιούμενοι —‘considered,’

οὔτ’ ἐπέσχον —sc. τὸν νοῦν, ‘had no intention.’ This description is slightly sarcastic.

τὸ στρατόπεδον — i.e. the camp which they had arranged to form, 2 above.

καταλαβεῖν —‘occupy,’ establish themselves in, as III. 31 τῶν πόλεων καταλαβεῖν τινα. (According to Behrendt's conjecture, the sense would be ‘did not pause in their effort to occupy Stratus before the Greeks’; τὸ belonging to the infin., cf. VII. 33, 3 ἐπέσχον τὸ εὐθέως ἐπιχειρεῖν.)

αὐτοβοεὶ —noted by Marcellinus as ἀρχαιότερον τῶν κατ’ αὐτὸν χρόνων. Cf. c. 77, 3 φακέλους.

Ἔτι προσιόντας — i.e. that they had not halted, like the Greeks. Cf. ἔτι προσελθεῖν below and c. 21, 1.

ὁμοίως —‘as they had intended.’

ὁμόσε χωρήσαντες —c. 62, 3.

Καταστάντων — i.e. τῶν Χαόνων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων. M. T. 848.

Οἰηθῆναι —sc. τοὺς Ἕλληνας. For the change of sub- ject, cf. c. 3, 4.

καταληψομένους —sc. τοὺς βαρβάρους.

ἀνελάμβανον —as they arrived in scattered bodies.

ἄνευ ὅ. κινηθῆναι —without arms they could not stir, and even ξὺν ὅπλοις it was dangerous for small foraging parties.

τοῦτο ποιεῖν — i.e. σφενδονᾶν. Cf. c. 11, 8.

Ἄναπον —a tributary of the Achelous.

Οἰνιαδῶν — an important town on a hill in marshy ground near the S. W. coast of Acarnania, W. of the mouth of the Achelous. See c. 102. It had a considerable trade. In 450 B.C. the Messenians of Naupactus had tried to get possession of it, but failed, though Pericles himself laid siege to it with a large fleet. In 428 Asopius, son of Phormio, with the Acarnanians, started from Naupactus on another attempt to get hold of the place, but failed. In 424 the Acarnanians made it join Athens. It was captured and strengthened by Philip of Macedon in 219 (Polyb. IV. 65); and restored to the Acarnanians by Rome in 168, from whom it had been taken by the Aetolians in 213 (Polyb. XXII. 15, Livy, XXXVIII. 11). It was connected with Apulia by trade.

κατὰ φιλίαν —c. 9, 4; with ξυμ. which probably means that the Oeniadae had been with Cnemus from the first, having joined him at Ambracia, though they are not mentioned, c. 80, 5.

ξυμβοήθειαν —sc. τῶν Ἀκαρνάνων.

Ἀπὸ θαλάσσης ἄνω —‘that the Acarnanians on the coast might not aid those in the interior.’ For the attraction of ἀπὸ θαλάσσης, cf. c. 80, 1. ἄνω adds nothing to the sense, and is in fact synonymous with ἀπὸ θ.

ἠναγκάσθησαν — plur. after ναυτικὸν as often. [

τῆς κ.τ.λ. ]— ὁ αὐτὸς always takes the dat.

εἴκοσι —c. 69, 1.

Παραπλέοντας —‘as they were sailing out of the gulf along the coast,’ i.e. ἔξω belongs to the partic.

ἐν τῇ εὐρυχωρίᾳ —‘in the open sea,’ so as to have space for manœuvring.

Στρατιωτικώτερον — i.e. ἐπὶ στρατείαν μᾶλλον. Cf. c. 87, 2. They intended to make descents on the coast of Acarnania, cf. c. 80, 1.

κομιζομένων —belongs in sense to ἀντιπαραπλέοντας far more than to ἑώρων αὐτοὺς which only makes a periphrasis for ἀντιπαρέπλεον. Cf. εἶχον ἐμπείρους c. 4, 2.

Πατρῶν —now the largest town in Peloponnese, but its importance only dates from the 1st century A.D. Its greatest distinction is that here the patriots in 1821 first rose against the Turks.

διαβάλλοντες — = διαβαίνοντες. This intrans. use elsew here only in Herod. and poets.

Χαλκίδος —on the coast of Aetolia, now Varassova, at the mouth of the Euenus, now Phidhari. It had belonged to Corinth, but had been taken by the Athenians 456 B.C. It lay at the foot of the mountain of the same name.

Εὐήνου —Ovid, Met. 9, 104 fol. relates how Hercules slew Nessus here.

ἀφορμισάμενοι —‘though they had slipped from their moorings in the night’; in order to elude the Athenians, the fleet tried to cross over to Acarnania before daybreak. The battle took place soon after dawn, c. 84, 2. ἔλαθον precedes κατεῖδον in time, and is plup. in sense.

πορθμόν — i.e. in the middle of the Gulf of Patrae, in the open, as Phormio had planned; and therefore between Patrae and Chalcis.

Παρεσκευάζοντο —cf. c. 7, 1. The imperf., as Cl. says, is due to the distributive nature of the act described.

Διδόντες —belongs to ὡς μἐγιστον, the circle was as large as possible without leaving an opening. μὴ shows that the partic. implies preference or prohibition: ‘so as not to afford.’

διέκπλουν —this famous manœuvre consisted of ‘rowing through the intervals of the adversary's line, and thus getting in their rear, ... and before the ship of the adversary could change its position, of striking it either in the stern, or in some weak part.’ Grote. τὸ ἐμβάλλειν καὶ διασχίζειν τὴν τῶν ἐναντίων τάξιν. Schol.

τὰς πρῴρας —sc. ἐτάξαντο. This chiasmus is pronounced by F. Stein to be ‘librarii additamentum prorsus supervacaneum.’ Anyhow it is detestable. ( πρῴρα σὺν τῷ ι—, Herodian.)

διὰ βραχέος — with παραγιγνόμενοι, masc. in spite of ναῦς; ‘might be at hand to sail out.’

εἴ πῃ —they were uncertain at what point of the circle the Athenians would attack.

Κατὰ μίαν —‘in a single line,’ one ship behind the other.

ἐν χρῷ — i.e. as near as possible. Cf. ad vivum resecare.

δόκησιν —c. 35, 2.

ἐμβαλεῖν —fut. Cl. quotes IV. 55 δόκησίς τι πράξειν. προείρητο ... ὑπὸ—the construction is due to αὐτοῖς.

Εἰώθει —sc. αὐτὸ from ὅπερ, cf. c. 4, 5.

ὁπόταν — cf. c. 11, 6.

τότε — i.e. when the wind threw them into confusion.

γίγνεσθαι —might be ἔσεσθαι—‘quod enim fit non est, sed erit.’ Sta. Cf. IV. 24 ἤλπιζον .. χειρώσεσθαι, καὶ ἤδη σφῶν ἰσχυρὰ τὰ πράγματα γίγνεσθαι.

Κατῄει —c. 25, 4.

ὑπ’ ἀμφοτέρων —with προσκει‐ μένων.

βοῇ τε —the τε adds the third fact. For the disturbance, cf. Eur. Hec. 607 ναυτική τ’ ἀναρχία | κρείσσων πυρός. ἀναφέρειν—owing to the stiff breeze and heavy sea they could not clear the water.

ἀλκὴν —‘resistance,’ robur. So Herod., common in poets and found frequently in Xen. as Ages. 10, 1; but not found in any other Attic prose.

Δύμην —W. of Achaea; the exact site doubtful.

Μολύκρειον —a small town near Antirrhium.

Πο‐ σειδῶνι —cf. Aristoph. Eq. 561 ὦ Γεραίστιε (Poseidon, from Geraestus, the site of a temple) παῖ Κρόνου, Φορμίωνί τε φίλτατ’ ἐκ τῶν ἄλλων τε θεῶν Ἀθηναίοις, referring to Poseidon's victories, and to the success at Pylus.

Ῥίῳ —cf. c. 86, 2; called also τὸ Ἀντίρριον, now Kastro Roumelias, 11/4 mile from the Rhium on the opposite coast. See L. and S. s.v. ῥίον .

Κυλλήνην —opposite Zacynthus, and a port of im- portance, of which there are no remains.

Λευκάδος — Cnemus was left at Oeniadae. Thence he had crossed to Leucas.

Τῷ Κ. —belongs to ξυμβούλους. The despatch of ξ. to aid the commander was not an uncommon occurrence, and shows with what jealousy the ephors controlled the officials.

βελτίω —observe the truculence of this laconic message.

Πρῶτων — i.e. in the Peloponnesian war.

πειρα‐ σαμένοις —see c. 5, 5.

δῑ ὀλίγου —not post, but per breve, as in διὰ παντὸς τοῦ χρόνου. ἀπέστελλον —like ἔπεμπον, c. 6, 1.

Ναῦς περιήγγελλον —cf. c. 10, 1, and we expect ναῦς παρασκευάζεσθαι or πέμψαι. ὡς ἐπὶ—cf. c. 83, 3.

Ἀγγελοῦντας ... καὶ κελεύων —cf. c. 6, 2. It is clear from the answer to this urgent message that the government did not realise the situation.

Τῷ κομίζοντι —it is strange that the commander is not named, and possible that he is a substitute appointed in place of Pericles, who was then dangerously ill.

Ἀπλοίας — i.e. rough weather. Had they been merely becalmed, they would have rowed. Only found in Herod. of prose writers.

ἐνδιέτριψεν —c. 18, 2.

Πάνορμον —just inside the straits, close to Rhium.

Παρέπλευσε δὲ —cf. c. 7, 1 for the anaphora.

Ῥίον —c. 84, 4.

ἐξω —Antirrhium and Rhium (Kastro Moreas) formed the entrance to the Gulf of Corinth. Phormio anchored W. of Antirrhium.

Ἑπτὰ —probably rather under the distance in those days. Thuc. judged by his eye. Strabo is still less exact; he calls the distance five stadia.

Ὁ πεζὸς —for ὁ π. στρατός. The ellipse of a masc. non-personal noun is rare: this one is found only in Herod. and Thuc.

ἐπειδὴ καὶ —cf. et ipse common in Livy.

εἶδον —sc. ὁρμισαμένους. Cf. c. 11, 8.

Ἐπὶ —c. 25, 3.

μελετῶντες —absolute, only παρα‐ σκευαζόμενοι governing ναυμαχίαν. γνώμην ἔχοντες—with infin. like γνόντες. For the double partic. see c. 15, 2.

οἱ μὲν —the subject subdivided; cf. c. 5, 3.

πρὸς ἐκείνων —‘to their interest’; cf. c. 83, 2.

Ἔπειτα —answers ἐπὶ μὲν in 5.

ποιῆσαι —‘to bring on,’ the act. of the generals; contrast c. 83, 3, mid. of the men.

ἀπὸ τῶν Ἀ. —more formal than ἀπ’ Ἀθηναίων. ἔλεξαν—Intr. p. lviii.

Ἔχει — = παρέχει: ‘does not support a conclusion which can justly cause you alarm.’ [ τὸ] ἐκφοβῆσαι— omitting τὸ take ἐκφοβῆσαι with δικαίαν, as in IV. 17 δίκαιοί εἰσι καὶ ἀπιστότατοι εἶναι. The conclusion they drew from the preceding battle was that they would be defeated in the coming battle: and this conclusion caused them φοβεῖσθαι τὴν μέλλουσαν. But the battle, they are told, does not afford the τεκμήρια for such a conclusion. ( τὸ ἐκφοβῆσαι cannot be accus. of respect, as in c. 53 τὸ προταλαιπωρεῖν, because such an accus. would here certainly contain a reference to the expected issue of the coming fight. The usual translation ‘ground for fear’ gives a wrong sense to every one of the three words. If πεφοβῆσθαι were read, the construction would be δικαίαν πεφοβῆσθαι, = ‘which it is right to fear,’ ἡ τέκμαρσις δικαία ἐστι —πεφοβῆσθαι being equivalent to δἰκαιόν ἐστι τὴν τέκμαρσιν πεφοβῆσθαι, infin. of purpose.)

Ἐπὶ στρατείαν —c. 83, 3.

τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τ —the wind and sea, c. 84, 3.

καὶ πού τι καὶ —the expression barely does more than suggest the possibility of what was certain. The object is to blame τύχη and excuse γνώμη.

Κατὰ —‘owing to.’

προσεγένετο —much like ἐπι‐ γίγνεσθαι, c. 4, 2, but the defeat is regarded as an unavoidable occurrence added to their other disad vantages ( τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης). Cf. Vergil's ‘nec Teucris addita Juno | usquam aberit, Aen. VI. 90.

τῆς γνώμης τὸ μὴ κατὰ κράτος νικηθέν —= ἡ γνώμη μὴ νικηθεῖσα. Cf. c. 59 τὸ ὀργιζόμενον τῆς γνώμης. Militibus fortuna victis invictus ipsorum animus opponitur. Hache. ‘It is not right that our minds, which we feel ( μή, not οὐ) were not conquered by force but have still some answer to give, should be depressed by the result of mere accident.’

κατὰ κράτος — vi, as in κατὰ κ. αἱρεῖν. ἀντιλογίαν —sc. πρὸς τὸ κατὰ κράτος νικηθῆναι , viz. the answer that the disaster was due to ἀπειρία, τύχη, want of παρασκευή. A familiar word in Plato.

ξυμφορᾶς —opposed to γνώμης above.

νομίσαι —sc. δίκαιον. ἀνδρείους ὀρθῶς—‘really brave,’ ὀρθῶς as in Aristoph. Eq. 1085 .

ἀπειρίαν ... προβαλλομένους —‘make in experience an excuse.’

τοῦ ἀνδρείου π. —‘while courage remains.’

ἔν τινι —neut.

Ὑμῶν δὲ —topic τὸ δυνατόν. Index, s.v. τόποι. λείπεται —sc. τῆς ἐκείνων ἐμπειρίας. μνήμην—‘presence of mind.’

ἄνευ εὐψυχίας —the insinuation that the Athenians lacked courage is wholly unsupported by argument.

ἄνευ ἀλκῆς —‘without boldness,’ as in c. 84, 3 robur; it is the result of εὐψυχία.

Ἀπαράσκευοι τυχεῖν —for the omission of ὄντες, cf. c. 39, 4.

Πλῆθος —c. 11, 3.

τὰ δὲ πολλὰ —adverbial accus. For the γνώμη, cf. c. 13, 2.

Προσγενόμενα —here of additional advantages; con- trast 3 above.

διδασκαλίαν —cf. Aesch. Ag. 185 Ζῆνα τὸν πάθη μάθος | θέντα κυρίως ἔχειν. Arn.

Τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτὸν —cf. c. 11, 3.

τις προσταχθῇ —the change from the plur. to the indef. sing. is due to the intervention of ἕκαστος. On the juxtaposition of 2nd and 3rd pers., ἑαυτὸν . . ἕπεσθε etc. see c. 11, 1, 44, 1.

Πρότερον —Cnemus, Machaon, Isocrates and Aga- tharchidas.

οὐ χεῖρον — meiosis, not to offend the others.

ἐνδώσομεν —as in c. 49, 4.

ἢν δέ τις —this vague threat shows that the officers suspected there had been cowardice in the former battle. Cf. c. 85, 2.

Ὀρρωδίαν —the noun is used by no other prose writer but Herod.

αἰσθομένους ὅτι —a substantive clause after αἰσθάνομαι is not very common, cf. I. 50, VII. 49, 1. ὅτι and opt. is found, e.g. in IV. 122 ; V. 2 ; VIII. 100, but the partic. is far commoner.

ξυνιστάμενοι —cf. c. 21, 3.

ἐν τῷ π. —c. 41, 2.

παραίνεσιν ποιήσασθαι —= παρακελεύσασθαι, the harangues of generals being called παραινέσεις or παρακελεύσεις or λόγοι προτρεπτικοί (cf. p. 48); of the three εἴδη or γένη of speeches, viz. λόγοι δικανικοί (forensic), λ. ἐπιδεικτικοί (of which ἐπιτάφιοι are a branch), and λ. συμβουλευτικοί, παραινέσεις belong to the last.

Καὶ προπαρεσκεύαζε —does not influence the construction, ὡς really depending on ἔλεγε. Cf. c. 2, 4. So Livy, XXI. 18 nostra haec quaestio (atque animadversio) in civem nostrum est, nostro an suo fecerit arbitrio.

ὄχλον ... ὑποχωρεῖν —a poetic construction. Cf. Eur. Hec. 812 ποῖ μ’ ὑπεξάγεις πόδα ;

Πρὸς —cf. c. 22, 1, 59, 3.

τοῦ θαρσεῖν —cf. IV. 17, 3 ὑπόμνησιν τοῦ καλῶς βουλεύσασθαι ἡγησάμενοι: ‘council them to take heart.’

οὐκ ἀξιῶν —for the double partic. ὁρῶν ... ἀξιῶν, cf. c. 59, 3.

ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ ἔχειν —c. 59, 2.

Οὐκ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου —the neg. of τὸ πλῆθος, as in c. 13, 1 παραλίπῃ καὶ μὴ δηώσῃ. ᾧ — i.e. τοῦτο ᾧ, the τοῦτο belonging to θαρσοῦσιν, lit. ‘as to that in which they feel confidence,’ viz. ὡς προσῇκον σφίσιν ἀ. εἶναι, the courage which they have shown so often. For the construction, cf. Livy, XXI. 10 id de quo ambigebatur, eventus belli, unde jus stabat, ei victoriam dedit.

κατορθοῦντες —antithesis to ού δῑ ἄλλο τι. Cf. c. 65, 8. διὰ ... ἐμπειρίαν depends on κατορθοῦντες. τὰ πλείω— because they had so seldom fought at sea.

καὶ οἴονται — ‘and so they think.’ For the change from partic. to indic., cf. V. 61, 4 βουλόμενοι ἄλλως τε ... καὶ ὅμηροι ἦσαν. So Eur. Bacchae, 225 πρόφασιν μὲν ὡς δὴ μαινάδας θυοσκόους (sc. οὔσας ), τὴν δ’ Ἀφροδίτην πρόσθ’ ἄγειν τοῦ Βακχίου. ποιήσειν —subject τὴν ἐμπειρίαν.

Τὸ δ’ — i.e. τὸ κατορθοῦν. ἐκ τοῦ δικαίου—cf. c. 44, 3, = δικαίως. περιέσται—‘will be found on our side.’

ἐν ἐκείνῳ — i.e. ἐν τῷ πεζῷ. εὐψυχίᾳ—answers the statement made in c. 87, 5.

προφέρουσι — = προέχειν, only used by Herod., Thuc. and poets.

τῷ δὲ —‘owing to our superiority in experience, we are more confident.’

Τε —adds the third fact to πρῶτον μὲν. ἔπειτα above, and so gives another reason for the conclusion μὴ δείσητε διὰ τὴν—‘for the sake of,’ with ἡγούμενοι. The statement is general.

οὐκ ἂν —the prot., ‘if they had had their own way’ is implied in ἄκοντας. ἐπεχείρησαν —emphatic.

παρὰ πολὺ —‘decisively’; cf. c. 8, 4

Κατὰ ... καὶ ὅτι —cf. c. 65, 7 for κατά. τοῦ παρα‐ λόγου —cf. τῷ οὐκ εἰκότι below; explained in οἱ δ’ ἐκ πολλοῦ ... ἀντιτολμῶσιν: ‘worthy of our astonishing action,’ in offering battle with such inferior numbers. ( τοῦ παρὰ πολὺ is explained to mean τοῦ παρὰ πολὺ προνενικηκέναι, but (1) this is not clear, (2) the previous victory has just been referred to and the probability of another sufficiently implied in κατὰ τὸ προνενικηκέναι: a new reason is now wanted, (3) the next section, introduced by γὰρ, is meaningless.)

Ἀντίπαλοι —‘most men, when they are a match for the enemy.’

πίσυνοι —found also V. 14, 3; VI. 2, 6; otherwise only in Herod. and poets. Cf. Ruth. New Phryn. p. 21. The ordinary word is πιστεύων, as in 2 above.

ἐκ πολλῷ ὑποδεεστέρων —sc. ἐπιόντες: cf. ἀπ’ ἐλασσόνων ὁρμώμενος c 65, 2, ‘whose means are far inferior.’

τῆς διανοίας τὸ β. —‘strength of will.’

τῷ οὐκ εἰκότι —‘because of what they never expected than on account of our expected preparations.’ (Ste. gives up this passage, and other edd. put a sense upon it which the words will not bear.)

κατὰ λόγον —the Peloponnesians were expecting the immediate arrival of reinforcements from Athens; cf. c. 86, 6.

Ἡμεῖς —he hints that the enemy are both ἄπειροι and ἄτολμοι.

Τὸν ἀγῶνα —topic τὸ ξυμφέρον; cf. c. 11, 3.

εἶναι —infin. of limitation, in this phrase almost confined to neg. sentences.

ἐμβολὴν —charge broadside, with the ἔμβολον) ( προσβολή, charge prow to prow.

ἐκ πολλοῦ — e longinquo.

ἀναστροφαί —turning back after any manœuvre to regain the original position of the ship.

ἐν τούτῳ —‘in these circumstances’; cf. ἐν ᾧ c. 1.

Τούτων —in the analysis the peroration is made to begin here. There was in antiquity some doubt about the place where the πίστις ends. The schol. on 10 ὁ δὲ ἀγὼν remarks τινὲς ἀπὸ τοῦ δὲ τοὺς ἐπιλόγους, and the same writer puts οἱ ἐπίλογοι to 11. Cf. the opening of the peroration in c. 11, 9, 87, 8.

παρὰ ταῖς ναυσὶ —Intr. p. xliii. παρὰ is rarely used thus with things, cf. c. 43, 2; but the frequent personification of πόλις, ναῦς, etc. renders the phrase possible. The Athenians, up to the beginning of the action, were on shore, c. 90, 3.

δῑ ὀλίγου —local; cf. c. 29, 3.

κόσμον

καὶ σιγὴν —cf. c. 11, 9.

ἔς τε τὰ πολλὰ ... ναυμαχίᾳ —for ἐς, with ξυμφέρει, cf. IV. 26, 5. The only other passage in which an impersonal noun is in dat. with ξυμφέρει is VI. 83 λόγου μὲν ἡδονῆ? τὸ παραντίκα τερπομένους, τῆ? δ’ ἐγχειρήσει ὕστερον τὰ ξυμφέροντα πράσσοντας.

Ἀγὼν ... καταλῦσαι —generally περί, ὑπέρ, or ἕνεκα, as c. 63, 1, but here the infin. are epexegetic.

ἐλπίδα τοῦ ναυτικοῦ —cf. πενίας ἐλπίδι, c. 42, 4.

Αὖ —‘again.’

ἐθέλουσιν — = εἰώθασι, φιλοῦσι, as in Herod. and Xen.

Ἐπὶ τεσσάρων —‘four deep,’ in four lines.

ἐπὶ τὴν ἑαυτῶν γῆν —with ταξάμενοι, ‘drawing up their ships with the coast of Peloponnesus at their backs’; the four lines extended back towards the coast. (This is obscure enough, but it is the only possible sense. ἐπὶ cannot mean παρὰ ‘along.’)

ἔσω [ἐπὶ] —these are not possible together; but? ὡς ἐπὶ τοῦ κ. The Peloponnesians were moving N.E. from Rhium, and therefore in the direction of Naupactus.

δεξιῷ κέρᾳ —when they began to move up the gulf, the four lines of ships turned to the right, so that there were now four abreast, the right wing leading.

Εἴκοσι —the Peloponnesians had 77 ships (c. 86, 4); as the right wing consists of 20 ships 4 abreast, the rest of the lines were probably so arranged that every fifth line consisted of only 3 ships abreast instead of 4, which would give 3 groups each consisting of 19 ships.

ταύτῃ —‘in this direction,’ towards Naupactus.

διαφύγοιεν —into the open part of the gulf, eastwards.

πλέοντα τὸν ἐπίπλουν —‘the attacking line when it bore down on them.’ Cf. 4 below ἐπιστρέψαντες τὰς ναῦς μετωπηδὸν ἔπλεον.

Ἐρήμῳ — i.e. deprived of its protection, Phormio being at Antirrhium. For the sense, not implying that there were no people in Naupactus, cf. c. 25, 1 ἀνθρώπων οὐκ ἐνόντων. κατὰ σπουδὴν—cf. c. 94, 2.

ἐμβιβάσας — imponere; the object omitted as constantly in naval and military phrases. For the double partic. see c. 4, 4.

Μεσσηνίων —from Naupactus.

Ἐπὶ κέρως —‘in single file.’

ἀπὸ ς. —cf. c. 92, 1. μετωπηδὸν—τὰ μέτωπα, ὅ ἐστι τὰ πρόσωπα τῶν νεῶν, παρεῖχον τοῖς ἐναντίοις. Schol. i.e. they turned to the left, into four lines, as they had been at first.

τάχους —depends on ὡς εἶχεν ἕκαστος. Xen. Hel. 4 , 5, 15.

Τῶν δὲ — i.e. τούτων δὲ = πασῶν τῶν νεῶν. τὸ κέρας — i.e. the right wing, τὰς εἴκοσι ναῦς of 2 above.

τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν —cf. τὸν ἐπίπλουν in 2 above; ‘the sudden turn.’

ἐξέωσαν —technical, ‘to force an enemy to run his ship aground.’

ὅσοι μὴ — = εἰ μή τινες.

Ἀναδούμενοι —the imperf. partic. in this phrase expresses the lashing of each of the vessels. The aor. is used in VII. 74. εἷλον ἤδη—‘had already taken.’

ξὺν τοῖς ὅπλοις —c. 2, 1.

Ἐκράτουν ... διέφθειραν —‘were successful and had disabled.’

φθάνουσιν ... προκαταφυγοῦσαι —aor. partic. here coincident in time with the historic pres. Cf. c. 2, 3 ἔλαθον ἐσελθόντες. αὐτοὺς— = τοὺς ἐν ταῖς ναυσί. ἴσχουσαι— ‘riding at anchor.’

κατὰ —shows the point of the coast. ἴσχω also takes ἐς or dat. παρεσκευάζοντο ἀμυνούμενοι—ὡς omitted, as in c. 18, 1. al.

Ὕστερον —)( φθάνουσιν. Cf. c. 5, 3, 80. ἐπαιά‐ νιζον—it was in honour of Apollo, a curious coincidence.

ἄμα πλέοντες —together.

Μετέωρος —in the middle of the gulf.

περὶ ἣν ... φθάσασα . . διωκούσῃ —‘several MSS. omit καὶ περιπλεύσασα. But φθάνειν περί τι does not appear sanctioned by usage.’ Linwood. Probably Thuc. meant περὶ ἣν to be governed by διωκούσῃ, and the ship was struck broadside when in the act of pursuing the enemy round the anchored vessel.

Διώκοντες .. αἱ μέν —cf. 1 above. In διώκοντες ... καθεῖσαι ... ἐπέστησαν ... δρῶντες ... βουλόμενοι, the first partic. is causal to καθεῖσαι, which is temporal to ἐπέστησαν· δρῶντες defines ἐπέστησαν as in c. 90, 1 ἀναγόμενοι ἐπλεον· βουλόμενοι is causal to ἐπέστησαν. ἐπέστησαν τοῦ πλοῦ—lit. stopped in their course. Cf. IV. 47 ἐπετάχυνον τῆς ὀδοῦ. πρὸς τὴν ἐξ ὀ. ἀντεξόρμησιν—refers to the 11 ships mentioned in 1 above, which ἴσχουσαι ἀντίπρῳροι παρεσκευάζοντο, ‘as the enemy were near and could charge them.’ Both ἐξ ὀλίγου and δῑ ὀλίγου mean ‘suddenly’ or ‘at a short distance.’ Cf. c. 11, 4, 85, 2, 89, 9.

βράχεα — brevia, Verg. Aen. I. 111; found only in Herod. except here.

Ἀπὸ —cf. c. 90, 4.

ὀλίγον μὲν .. ἔπειτα —para- taxis.

Πάνορμον —see c. 86, 4.

ἀνηγάγοντο — equivalent to a plup., as often in rel. clauses. M. T. 58.

Ἓξ —sc. οὔσας. ἄνδρας τε—τε adds the third fact connected with the pursuit.

διαφθείραντες τὸ πρῶτον —c. 90, 5. The whole Peloponnesian fleet, not only the 20 ships on the right wing, fled to Panormus, as the main body of 57 ships had gone to aid the others, and so abandoned their prizes.

Περὶ —‘near.’

ἐξέπεσεν —‘his body was washed up.’

Ὅθεν — = ἐνταῦθα ὅθεν. Cf. Demosth. 45, 81 ἀνάγειν ὅθεν εἴληφας, Andoc. 1, 64 θεραπαίνας ἔλαβον ὅθεν ὁρμώμενοι ταῦτ’ ἐποίουν. ἀναγαγόμενοι — viz. κατὰ τὸ Ἀπολλώνιον c. 91, 1.

ἔστησαν ἔστησαν δὲ καὶ —cf. c. 7, 1, 86, 1 and 2.

ὑπόσπονδα —thus the Peloponnesians acknowledged themselves defeated.

Τροπαῖον τῆς τροπῆς —the same gen. VI. 98, 4; VII. 54. ἥνπερ —c. 90, 6.

ἀνέθεσαν ἐπὶ —the same use of ἐπὶ as in c. 52, 4 ἐπιτιθέναι νεκροὺς ἐπὶ πυράς, 76, 2 ἰζάνειν ἐπί. Ῥίον—in honour of Poseidon, c. 84, 4.

Ἀθηναίων —see on c. 86, 6.

καὶ Κόρινθον — i e. Lechaeum, the port of Corinth.

Αἷς —‘with which.’ Cf. c. 85.

Ἀφύλακτος —yet in c. 24 Thuc. said φυλακὰς κατε‐ στήσαντο κατὰ θάλασσαν; from which Pp concludes that the vessels there mentioned were not armed. Thuc. however seems to imply that the guard-ships had been withdrawn, or at least were not always on the spot. Probably Pericles would have disapproved of this.

ἄκλῃστος —see c. 94, 4. Probably Brasidas planned this attack.

εἰκότως —cf. c. 8, 1.

ἐπικρατεῖν —sc. τοὺς Ἀθηναίους. πολὺ —ἐπικρατεῖν takes the place of the usual comparative.

Τροπωτῆρα —from τροπός, leather, and so a thong which attached the oar to the σκαλμός, thole-pin. The ancients did not use rowlocks like ours.

ἀφικομένους ... καθελκύσαντας —see c. 15, 2.

Ἦν ... προφυλάσσον —cf. c. 67, 1.

προσδοκία ... μὴ ἄν —after the analogy of φόβος, cf. c. 13, 1. If the time were pres., the sentence would be προσδοκία ἐστι μὴ ἂν ἐπιπλεύσειαν. There are very few cases of this construction, and no others in Thuc.

ἐξαπιναίως —see c. 3, 1.

ἀπὸ τοῦ προφανοῦς —a regular formula: cf. ἀπὸ τοῦ εὐθέος III. 43, 5; but ἀπὸ in such phrases is less common than ἐκ. ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου however is often found in Thuc. This use of ἀπὸ is not found iu the orators.

τολμῆσαι ἄν —depends on the idea of thinking implied in προσδοκία ἦν. Sc. ἐπιπλεῦσαι. καθ’ ἡσυχίαν —sc. ἐπιπλεῦσαι, ‘to make an attack without meeting with opposition.’ Intr. p. xliv. Cf. Arist. Eccles. 288 κατὰ σκότον = clam.

μὴ οὐκ —cf. I. 141 τὸ οὐ βἐβαιον ἔχοντες μὴ οὐ προαναλώσειν. M. T. 817.

οὐκέτι —again there is irony in the narrative. Cf. c. 80, 1.

Σαλαμῖνος —first for emphasis. Cf. c. 7, 2, 11, 2.

ὁρῶν — cf. c. 55, 1.

νεῶν τ. φυλακή —cf. c. 69, 1. ἐπ’ αὐτοῦ has a slightly different meaning with φυλακή, as though it were περὶ αὐτό. With φρούριον ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀκρωτηρίου contrast τροπαῖον ἐπὶ τῇ ἄκρᾳ VIII. 106. See c. 80, 2.

τὸν πόλεμον —see c. 1. ἂν ... ἂν—caused by the breaking of the sentence.

Καθεῖλκον —imperf. throughout, describing the action going on.

τῷ πεζῷ δὲ —notice the variation in the order.

Ὡς ᾔσθοντο —c. 3, 1.

ἔστι γὰρ ὅ τι καὶ —cf. καί τις καὶ c. 93, 3, καί τι καὶ c. 87, 2. ἔστιν ὅ τι is part of the object of ἐφόβουν, as φοβῶ σε τοῦτο = I make you fear this.

Οὐκέτι καταλαβόντες —cf. c. 56, 6.

καὶ ... ἅμα — this adds a new fact of importance, like καὶ δὴ καί. κλῄσει —‘the walls, being carried down to either side of the harbour's mouth, were prolonged from thence across the mouth upon shoals, or artificial moles, until a passage only was left in the middle for two or three triremes abreast between two towers, the opening of which might be further protected by a chain.’ Col. Leake, Top. of Athens, p. 311. κλῃστοὶ λιμένες were common. ‘It was not until Athens was in danger of being surprised by the enemy's fleet that the Athenians saw the necessity of fortifying the Peiraeus in the manner customary among the Greeks.’ ib. l.c.

Ἀλεξάνδρου —had sided with the Greeks in the Persian war.

ἐπὶ Χαλκιδέας —cf. c. 79. Athens suffered more annoyance from the north than from any other quarter outside the Peloponnese. Probably the generals who granted terms to Potidaea (c. 70 ) were brought to trial at the instigation of Cleon. Now at last the government hoped to pacify the Chalcidian towns, which had revolted with Potidaea, by means of Sitalces.

δύο ὑποσχέσεις τὴν μὲν ... τὴν δὲ —the object subdivided. Somewhat similar is c. 44, 1.

Ὅ τε ... τοῖς τε Ἀ —the double τε as in c. 22, 1 and 84 marking parallelism.

ὑποσχόμενος —‘made promises.’ What these were is unknown. Intr. p. lxxix.

τῷ πολέμῳ —Cl. proposes τοῦ πολέμου, but probably Thuc. means κατ’ ἀρχὰς τοῦ πολέμου πιεζόμενον αὐτῷ; for in 432 B.C. Athens had made alliance with Philip and was at war with him till August 431 B.C., c. 29, 6.

Φίλιππον —formerly king of upper Macedonia, c. 100, 3; expelled by Perdiccas. He had recently died.

ἐπὶ βασιλείᾳ —purpose, as ἐπ’ ὠφελίᾳ c. 29, 3.

καταλύσειν —c. 29, 5.

Ἡγεμόνα — i.e. as his chief adviser.

Ἅγνωνα — c. 58.

ἔδει ... παραγενέσθαι —cf. c. 5, 1, ‘were to aid him,’ according to an arrangement.

Ἀνίστησιν —c. 68, 1.

ἐντὸς — citra.

Αἵμου — the Balkan.

Ῥοδόπης —Despoto.

ὑπερβάντι —cf. c. 49, 5; here = ultra. The Getae lived then between Mt. Haemus and the Danube, in Bulgaria.

μέρη = ἔθνη. κατῴκητο— this use of the mid. of persous is found ouly in Herod. and Thuc., and is confined to perf. forms. Dion. Hal. fiuds fault with Thuc. for using the mid. where Attic writers use the active.

Ὀρεινῶν —)( ὅσοι πεδία εἶχον c. 101, 3.

αὐτονόμων —)( ὅσων ἦρχε 1 above.

ἄλλα ὅσα —cf. 3 below.

μαχαιροφόρων —a well-known mark of some of the Thracian tribes.

Ἀγριᾶνας —at the source of the Strymon (Struma) and round Mt. Rhodope

Σκόμβρου —another mountain iu the Balkan chain, south of Sophia. The Laeaei were north of the Agrianes.

τὰ πρὸς Παίονας —‘on the side of the P., who from that point were indepeudent.’

Τριβαλλοὺς —in Servia.

Ὀσκίου —a tributary of the Danube (the Isker).

ἐκ τοῦ ὄρους —part of Rhodope.

Νέστος —the Kara-su. The Romans in B.C. 167 made it the northern boundary of Macedonia.

Ἕβρος —the Maritza.

Ἐγένετο —Thuc. probably knew more of Thrace than any other Greek owing to his property, infleuce, and sojourn there.

μέγεθος —accus. of respect.

ἐπὶ μὲν θ. καθήκουσα — ‘extended along the coast line,’ cf. c. 27, 2) ( ἐς ἤπειρον. The construction is ἐγένετο καθήκουσα, like ἦν καθήκουσα, cf. c. 80, 2, 93, 2; lit. extended down to the sea.

μέχρι Ἴστρου ποταμοῦ —cf. Isocr. VII. 80 ἐντὸς Ἅλυος ποταμοῦ, the only case in Attic outside Thuc. where the art. is omitted with the name when ποταμὸς is inserted. The omission is common in Herod.: there are six cases in Thuc.

περίπλους —with τεσσάρων ἡμερῶν. Cf. VI. 1 Σικελίας ( ‐α Kr., Hw.) περίπλους ἐστιν .. ὀκτὼ ἡμερῶν. τὰ ξυντομώτατα —adverbial.

ἱστῆται — stet, of anything which does not shift its position.

νηὶ ς. — = ὁλκάδι .

Διὰ πλείστου .. ἐγίγνετο —‘for in this direction it extended furthest into the interior.’

ἁνύσαι —epexegetic to ἦν ἡ ἀρχή.

Ἦρξαν —ingressive, as ἀρχθῶσι c. 8, 4.

Σεύθου — nephew of Sitalces.

βασιλεύσας —ingressive, as c. 15, 2. Coutrast c. 80, 6.

δύναμις —sc. ἦν, ‘amounted in all to about.’

δῶρα —not voluntary, but like Edward IV.'s benevoleuces.

ὅσα —see c. 13, 4. Cf. I. 16. λεῖα—‘plain,’ unembroidered. κατασκευή—ὑφαντά etc. are reckoned among these ‘effects.’

αὐτῷ —emphatic.

παραδυναστεύουσι —‘princes.’

Περσῶν —probably refers to the practice of giving bounties as rewards for public services.

λαμβάνειν —hinting that these presents were really exactions.

κατὰ τὸ δύνασθαι —‘owing to their power’ (to exact money).

ἐπὶ πλέον — = μᾶλλον. αὐτῷ — i.e. τῷ νόμῳ. ἐχρήσαντο —sc. οἱ Ὀδρυσαί.

Ἐπὶ μέγα ἰσχύος —cf. c. 17, 4.

τῶν γὰρ —sc. βασιλειῶν. ὅσαι—cf. 3 above.

εὐδαιμονίᾳ —of wealth, as beatus. Cf. Eur. Bacchae, 16 Ἀραβίαν εὐδαίμονα. πολὺ δευτέρα μετὰ—‘far inferior to.’ (Arn. trauslates ‘easily second,’ quoting Soph. O. C. 1228 μὴ φῦναι τὸν ἄπαντα νικᾷ λόγον· τὸ δὲ ... βῆναι κεῖθεν ὅθενπερ ἥκει πολὺ δεύτερον ὡς τάχιστα, but there too the δεύτερος πλοῦς is ‘far inferior’ to the πρῶτος πλοῦς .)

Ἕν πρὸς ἓν —cf. Herod. IV. 50 ἓν πρὸς ἓν συμβάλλειν. οὐκ ἔστιν ὅ τι— = οὐδέν, otherwise οὐκ would not be inserted here after οὐδέ. οὐ μὴν οὐδὲ—‘not that they are on a level with other nations in general prudence and intelligence in the employment of the ordinary resources of life.’

ξύνεσιν — meaning that the Scythians, with their natural advantages ( τὰ παρόντα ἐς τὸν βίον), might have been a great nation if they had been blessed with the sense to pursue a definite policy.

Ἑτοῖμα —c. 3, 4.

Κερκίνης —between the Axius (the Vardar) and Strymon.

Σιντῶν —on the right bank of the Strymon.

τεμὼν —by felling the mountain-trees.

Μαιδούς —also on the right bank of the Strymon.

Δόβηρον —‘in one of the first high valleys on the Paeonian (western) side (of Cercine), from which the way to lower Macedonia would be a continued descent, first down the valley of one of the tributary streams of the Axius, and then by the valley of the Axius itself.’ Arn.

Ἀπεγίγνετο ... προσεγίγνετο —a paratactic παρονο‐ μασία. After he had left his own kingdom, it might have been expected that his forces would dwindle down, owing to their miscellaneous character, and the slightness of the ties by which they were connected.

τὸ πᾶν —c. 7, 2.

γενέσθαι —c. 13, 3.

Καταβάντες —attributive, as in c. 30, 1. This order is only possible when the noun, here αὐτόνομοι, has other attributes beside the partic.

ξύμμεικτος —with ἠκολούθει; they were not separated into contingents, but were what histories call ‘a horde.’

πλήθει φ. —‘chiefly formidable on account of their numbers.’

Ἐν —would be ἐς had not the muster at Doberus already been referred to.

κατὰ κορυφὴν — = ἄνωθεν, κατὰ via like κατὰ κράτος, expressing the manner; cf. c. 76, 4. τὴν κάτω Μ.—τὸ παράλιον. Schol.

Τῶν γὰρ —‘for, besides the lower Macedonians, there are also Macedonians in the upper country, amongst whom are iucluded the L. and E.’ Note in Jowett.

Λιγκησταὶ — the district called Lyncestis.

Ἐλιμιῶται —divided from Thessaly by the Cambunian mountains.

βασιλείας —‘have kings of their own.’ J.

Τὴν δὲ περὶ —not παρά, because the regions en umerated below are not merely those actually on the coast, but comprise ἡ κάτω γῆ generally.

Τημενίδαι —hence Philip and Alexander claimed to be Greeks, and their claim was generally admitted.

ἐβασίλευσαν —ingressive.

Πιερίας —between Mt. Olympus and the Thermaic Gulf, the origiual home of the muses and birth-place of Orpheus.

ὑπὸ τὸ Πάγγαιον —after this both the Pieres and Orpheus were connected with Thrace.

κόλπος —see L. and S.

οἰκοῦσιν —their new home was Bottice. They originally dwelt near Pella.

Στενήν —the Paeonians had possessed ‘a narrow strip on the bank of the Axius, down to Pella and the sea.’ Grote points out that this would leave hardly any room for the Bottiaeans, who dwelt north of the Pierians, between the mouth of the Haliacmon (the Indjeh Kara-su) and that of the Axius. Probably Thuc. is mistaken in saying μέχρι θαλάσσης, and the Paeonians did not extend so far east.

Μυγδονίαν — Herod. VII. 123 says the Axius divided Bottia on the south from Mygdonia on the north. Iu this region lived also the Edonians, Crestonians, and Bisaltae (6 below), but the Mygdonians must have been the most important.

Ἐορδίας —east of Lyncestis. N.W. of the Elimiots.

Φύσκαν —somewhere between the Strymon and Axius.

κατῴκηται —c. 96, 1.

Ἀλμωπίας —some where near Eordia and Pieria.

Οὗτοι —= οἱ κάτω; the tribes who were led by the Temenidae and conquered all lower Macedonia, the part which has been described from 3 above. Contrast Μακεδόνες αὐτοὶ below, = the original Macedonians before the conquests, οἱ ἄνω, who remained partially independent, c. 99, 2.

αὐτῶν — those just mentioned were not of Macedonian stock.

Οἱ Μ. οὗτοι—οἱ ὑπὸ Περδίκκου βασιλευόμενοι. καρ‐ τερὰ —secure places in the hills.

Ἀρχέλαος —reigned 413-399 B.C. Eur. wrote a play named after him, and the ‘Bacchae’ was written at his court. It is strange that Thuc. should go out of his way to make this remark about his reign: he must have considered these improvements very important.

ὁδοὺς εὐθείας —cf. c. 98, 1. Andoc. 2, 11 says that Archelaus gave him the right to cut down and export as much timber as he chose.

τἆλλα accus. of respect, τὰ κ. τὸν πόλεμον being object of διεκόσμησε. ὀκτὼ—cf. the position of ἕξ in c. 92, 2.

Τὴν Φιλίππου —the upper part of the Axius.

ὁμολογίᾳ —with προσχωροῦντα) ( κατὰ κράτος .

Ἀριστερᾷ — i.e. ‘east of Pella, as Sitalces was marching southwards.’ Arn.

ἔσω — i.e. further south.

Ὅπῃ δοκοίη —with ἐσέβαλλον, which is used here of a cavalry charge. They charged wherever they chose, as the Thracians were not disciplined. Cf. c. 79, 6.

Ὑπὸ δὲ π. περικλῃόμενοι — = ὁπότε ὑπὸ π. περι‐ κλῄοιντο, corresponding to ἧ? μὲν προσπέσοιεν: hence pres. partic. ‘Whenever (after charging) they were hemmed in by superior numbers, they placed themselves in danger, as they were far outnumbered by the enemy.’

πλῆθος —as in c. 11, 3.

πολλαπλασίῳ —dat. of cause.

Λόγους ἐποιεῖτο —‘had a conference.’ Livy would have reported this conversation at length.

οὐ παρῆσαν — c. 95, 3. The incompetence displayed by Athens against Perdiccas is so strange that the ambassadors sent to Sitalces may have been bribed: for they might easily have sent word when Sitalces really did start. The muddle which followed the death of Pericles is as great as the confusion in the English government during the Bute ministry after the fall of Pitt in 1761. Perhaps it is partly due to the same cause.

ἀπιστοῦντες —Sitalces had become an ally two years before, and his promise had been unfulfilled till now. Cf. c. 29. ἔπεμψαν—‘had sent.’

Ἐν π. ἦσαν —c. 80, 3. The Thessalians and the other Greeks rightly regarded Sitalces now as a mere plunderer.

Θρᾷκες —the tribes living in the plains on the lower Strymon, near Amphipolis.

Παρέσχε λόγον —on the analogy of φόβον παρέχειν, as μὴ below shows: ‘even as far as the ... he caused questionings.’

ἐπὶ —denotes distance, as in ἐφ’ ὅσον, c. 62, 2.

ὑπ’ αὐτῶν ἀγόμενοι —‘induced by the Athenians.’

κατὰ τὸ ξ. —c. 22, 2.

χωρήσωσιν —The change to the plur., suggesting Θρᾶκες, adds a notion of vague terror to the narrative. This small artifice shows how perpetually Thuc. produces pathos by saying the least that cau possibly be said. Cf. Eur. Hec. 277 μή μου τὸ τἐκνον ἐκ χερῶν ἀποσπάση?ς | μηδὲ κτάνητε.

Ἅμα ἐπέχων —‘as he overran them.’

εἶχεν αὐτῳ —cf. c. 102, 2.

ὑπὸ χειμῶνος —one would have supposed that Sitalces would have foreseen this.

ἀναπείθεται —c. 14, 1.

Σεύθου —he succeeded Sitalces. Spardacus was brother of Sitalces.

ὥστ’ —cf. c. 2, 4.

ἐπ’ αὐτῇ —‘along with.’ Cf. Isaeus, 2, 5 ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδελφῆ? προῖκα. προσποιεῖται — sibi conciliat.

Τὰς πάσας —‘in all.’

κατὰ τάχος —again Thuc. contrasts the slightness of the result with the vastness of the plan. Cf. c. 7, 2.

ὑπέσχετο —contrast c. 95, 2.

Ἀστακοῦ —the Corinthians had restored the tyrant Euarchus who had been expelled by the Athenians, c. 31, 33. Cl. thinks the place must have since joined Athens.

Στράτου —c. 80, 8: Coronta is unknown.

Οἰνιάδας —c. 82. As Oeniadae had helped Cnemus effectually, it would have been advantageous to puuish it and prevent it from doing more harm to Athens.

ἄνωθεν μὲν — sc. ῥἐων, ‘flowing past Stratus high up the stream.’

ἐξιεὶς —of water discharging itself into the sea, only in Thuc. and Herod. The meaning reappears in Polybius.

περιλιμνάζων —this applies to the winter only.

Ἐχινάδων —the object of this digression is probably to show that it was as difficult to attack Oeniadae by sea as by land.

προσχοῖ —‘forms deposits.’

ἠπείρωνται — = ἤπειρος γεγένηνται. οὐκ ἐν πολλῷ—c. 17, 2.

τοῦτο παθεῖν —pass. of τοῦτο δρᾶν, as c. 11, 8, 49, 5. This has not happened, as the sea carries away the deposits. Cf. Herod. II. 10.

Τό τε ... αἵ τε —the double cause, as c. 95, 2.

μέγα καὶ πολὺ —cf. c. 5, 2.

ἀλλήλαις —‘help one another to bind the deposits together.’

ἔχουσαι — = παρέχουσαι, as c. 61, 2.

Ὅτε δὴ ἀλᾶσθαι —cf. c. 13, 5, the infin. by assimi- lation to χρῆσαι . M. T. 755. In temporal sentences in Or. Obl. Thuc. generally retaius the mood of the Recta, except III. 95 ἔως καταβαίη, representing ἕως ἂν καταβῶ, IV. 117 πρὶν παρασκευάσαιντο, representiug πρὶν ἂν παρασκευασώμεθα, VII. 48 ὁπότε βούλοιντο, representing ὅταν βουλώμεθα, and III. 22, 8.

μητρός —Eriphyle, c. 68, 3.

χρῆσαι —this meaning occurs in Herod., Thuc., and tragedy only. The Attic is ἀναιρεῖν. οἰκεῖν—pres. (or aor.) infin. after words meaning to give an oracle. M. T. 98.

ὑπειπόντα —‘saying besides,’ as in I. 90, 4.

λύσιν τῶν δειμάτον —technical words of the oracle. Cf. Pausan. 2, 29 . 6 ἐς Δελφοὺς ἀπἐστειλαν ... αἰτήσοντας λύσιν τοῦ κακοῦ. Soph. El. 635 ἄνακτι τῷδ’ ὅπως λυτηρίους | εὐχὰς ἀνάσχω δειμάτων ἃ νῦν ἔχω. εὑρὼν —sc. ταύτην τὴν γῆν. ἥτις μήπω—hypothetical rel., ‘such as was not.’ The vague form is well suited to the oracle.

αὐτῷ —agent.

Ἱκανὴ ἂν κεχῶσθαι — i.e. κεχωσμένη ἂν εἴη, ‘it would be by this time.’

δίαιτα —‘to make a habitation,’ pred. with χῶσθαι. ἐδυνάστευσε—ingressive, as ἐβασίλευσαν c. 99. 3.

ἐπωνυμίαν —it was called Κουρῆτις before.

Ἐλευθέρους —the slaves had been sold.

Τῷ πολέμῳ —c. 47, 1.

ἐτελεύτα —the anaphora is probably unintentional, this being a formula, which, though to us it may become tedious, is quite in accordance with the Greek method of ending quietly. Cf. the closing lines of any Greek play, and the finish of any Greek speech except the de Corona. (I cannot in the least agree with what Dr. Rutherford says on this formula.)